null null

NAME
asmmenu - launch Advanced System Management menu
SYNOPSIS
asmmenu --ip IP-address [--help]
DESCRIPTION
asmmenu launches the Advanced System Management (ASM) interface for a managed system using the
browser on the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
--ip
The IP address or host name of the service processor for the managed system for which to launch
the ASM browser interface.
EXAMPLES
Launch the ASM browser interface for the managed system’s service processor which has the IP address
192.168.131.25:
asmmenu --ip 192.168.131.25
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
June 2007
1
NAME
bkconsdata - back up console data
SYNOPSIS
bkconsdata -r {dvd | usb | ftp | sftp | nfs | none}
[-h host-name] [-u user-ID] [--passwd password]
[-l mount-resource-location] [-o "mount-command-options"]
[-d remote-directory] [-x netcfg]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
bkconsdata backs up critical Hardware Management Console (HMC) data, which is HMC data that is
stored on the HMC hard disk. This backup data may be used to restore the HMC if the HMC needs to be
reinstalled from the HMC recovery CDs in the event of an HMC hard disk failure.
OPTIONS
-r
The archive option for the backup data. Valid values are dvd for the DVD drive on the HMC, usb
for a USB flash memory device, ftp for a remote FTP site, sftp for a remote secure FTP (SFTP)
site, nfs for an NFS mounted remote file system, or none. The none option is used to remove the
backup task lock allowing this task to be re-executed immediately.
-h
The host name or IP address of the remote server.
This option is required when backing up the data to a remote FTP site, SFTP site, or NFS file system. Otherwise, this option is not valid.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the remote FTP or SFTP site.
This option is required when backing up the data to a remote FTP or SFTP site. Otherwise, this
option is not valid.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the remote FTP or SFTP site. If this option is omitted, you will
be prompted to enter the password.
This option is only valid when backing up the data to a remote FTP or SFTP site.
-l
The mount resource location defined on the NFS server where the backup data will be written.
This option is required when backing up the data to a remote NFS file system. Otherwise, this
option is not valid.
-o
Options to be passed to the mount command used to mount the remote NFS file system where the
backup data will be written. The options must be enclosed in double quotes.
This option is only valid when backing up the data to a remote NFS file system.
-d
The directory on the remote server to which to write the backup data. If this option is not specified
when backing up the data to a remote FTP or SFTP site, the backup data will be written to the
user’s home directory. If this option is not specified when backing up the data to a remote NFS file
system, the backup data will be written to the mount-resource-location on the NFS server.
This option is only valid when backing up the data to a remote FTP site, SFTP site, or NFS file
system.
Linux
-x
The data to be excluded from the backup data. The only valid value is netcfg to exclude network
configuration data.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
November 2012
1
EXAMPLES
Back up critical HMC data to DVD:
bkconsdata -r dvd
Back up critical HMC data to a USB flash memory device:
bkconsdata -r usb
Back up critical HMC data to a remote FTP site:
bkconsdata -r ftp -h ftpserver -u ftpuser --passwd ftppassword
Back up critical HMC data to a remote SFTP site (you will be prompted to enter your password):
bkconsdata -r sftp -h sftpserver -u sftpuser
Back up critical HMC data to an NFS mounted remote file system:
bkconsdata -r nfs -h 9.3.145.52 -l /home/hmc/backups
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
November 2012
2
NAME
bkprofdata - back up profile data
SYNOPSIS
bkprofdata -m managed-system -f file [--force] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
bkprofdata backs up profile data for the managed-system.
The rstprofdata command can be used to restore profile data for the managed-system.
The rmprofdata command can be used to remove a profile data backup file.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to back up profile data. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-f
The name of the backup file where the profile data is to be written. If file is not fully qualified, file
will be written to the
/var/hsc/profiles/serial-number directory on the HMC (serial-number is the serial number of the
managed system).
If file already exists, this command will fail unless the --force option is specified.
To back up the profile data to removable media, the media must be present in the removable media
device and the device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued.
The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
--force This option allows the specified backup file to be overwritten if it already exists. If the specified
backup file already exists and this option is not specified, the backup will fail.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Back up the profile data to a file called myFile on a USB flash memory device (a USB flash memory device
must already be connected to the HMC):
lsmediadev (to obtain mount points)
mount /media/sdb1
bkprofdata -m mySystem -f /media/sdb1/myFile
Back up the profile data to a file called backup1 (the file will be written to the /var/hsc/profiles/3413444
directory on the HMC):
bkprofdata -m 9406-570*3413444 -f backup1
Back up the profile data to a file called backup1 (the file will be written to the /var/hsc/profiles/3413444
directory on the HMC). The file backup1 will be overwritten if it already exists:
bkprofdata -m 9406-570*3413444 -f backup1 --force
ENVIRONMENT
None
Linux
November 2006
1
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsmediadev, rmprofdata, rstprofdata
Linux
November 2006
2
NAME
chaccfg - change access control configuration
SYNOPSIS
chaccfg -t {resourcerole | taskrole}
{-f configuration-file | -i "configuration-data"}
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
chaccfg changes the configuration of an access control role.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of access control role to change. Valid values are resourcerole for managed resource
role and taskrole for task role.
-f
The name of the file containing the configuration data needed to change the access control role.
The configuration data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. These attribute name/value pairs form a configuration record. A line feed marks
the end of a configuration record. There can only be one configuration record in the file.
The format of a configuration record is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...<LF>
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...<LF>
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
If ’+=’ is used in the attribute name/value pair instead of ’=’, then the specified value is added to
the existing value for the attribute if the attribute is numerical. If the attribute is a list, then the
specified value(s) is added to the existing list.
If ’-=’ is used in the attribute name/value pair instead of ’=’, then the specified value is subtracted
from the existing value for the attribute if the attribute is numerical. If the attribute is a list, then
the specified value(s) is deleted from the existing list.
The ’+=’ and ’-=’ operators can only be used when changing a managed resource role.
Attribute names for managed resource roles:
name
name of the managed resource role to
change (required)
resources
comma separated list of managed resource
objects (required)
Attribute names for task roles:
name
name of the task role to change
(required)
resources
comma separated list of tasks (required)
Linux
September 2007
1
The -f and the -i options are mutually exclusive.
-i
This option allows you to enter configuration data on the command line, instead of using a file.
Data entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be
enclosed in double quotes.
The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Change the managed resource objects for the managed resource role lpar_role where XXX is a resource
name returned from lsaccfg -t resource --script:
chaccfg -t resourcerole -i "name=lpar_role,resources=XXX"
Add a managed resource object to the managed resource role mr1 where XXX is a resource name returned
from lsaccfg -t resource --script:
chaccfg -t resourcerole -i "name=mr1,resources+=XXX"
Change the task role tr1:
chaccfg -t taskrole -i "name=tr1,"resources=
cec:ChangeCECProperty+CECPowerOn+CECPowerOff,
lpar:ChangeLPARProperty+ChangeProfileProperty""
Change a task role using the configuration data in the file /tmp/cfgFile:
chaccfg -t taskrole -f /tmp/cfgFile
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsaccfg, mkaccfg, rmaccfg
Linux
September 2007
2
NAME
chcod - change Capacity on Demand
SYNOPSIS
To enter a CoD code:
chcod -o e -m managed-system -k CoD-code
To activate or change the amount of On/Off CoD resources:
chcod -o a -m managed-system -c onoff -r {mem | proc}
-q quantity-of-resources -d number-of-days
To activate or change the number of Reserve CoD processors or Utility CoD processors that are not unlimited Utility CoD processors:
chcod -o a -m managed-system -c {reserve | utility}
-r proc -q quantity-of-processors
To deactivate all On/Off CoD, all Reserve CoD, or all Trial CoD resources:
chcod -o d -m managed-system
-c {onoff | reserve | trial}
-r {mem | proc}
To deactivate all Utility CoD processors that are not unlimited Utility CoD processors:
chcod -o d -m managed-system -c utility -r proc
To set or disable a Utility CoD processor minute usage limit:
chcod -o s -m managed-system -c utility -r proc
-l number-of-processor-minutes
DESCRIPTION
chcod performs Capacity on Demand (CoD) operations on the managed-system.
chcod is used to enter a CoD code for the managed-system. It is also used to activate On/Off CoD, Reserve
CoD, or Utility CoD resources, or to deactivate On/Off CoD, Reserve CoD, Trial CoD, or Utility CoD
resources. CoD resources are either memory or processors.
chcod is also used to set or disable a Utility CoD processor minute usage limit.
OPTIONS
-o
The CoD operation to perform. Valid values are e to enter a CoD code, a to activate or change the
number of On/Off CoD, Reserve CoD, or Utility CoD resources, d to deactivate all On/Off CoD,
all Reserve CoD, all Trial CoD, or all Utility CoD resources, and s to set or disable a Utility CoD
processor minute usage limit.
To change the number of On/Off CoD resources or days that are currently activated, specify an
activate operation with this option, specify the total number of activated On/Off CoD resources
that you want with the -q option, and specify the number of days that you want them for with the
-d option. An activate operation is to be used regardless of whether the total number of activated
On/Off CoD resources is being increased, decreased, or kept the same. A deactivate operation is
to be used only when you no longer want to have any activated On/Off CoD resources.
To change the number of Reserve CoD or Utility CoD processors that are currently activated,
specify an activate operation with this option, and specify the total number of activated Reserve
CoD or Utility CoD processors that you want with the -q option. An activate operation is to be
used regardless of whether the total number of activated Reserve CoD or Utility CoD processors is
being increased or decreased. A deactivate operation is to be used only when you no longer want
to have any activated Reserve CoD or Utility CoD processors in the shared processor pool.
Linux
November 2012
1
Note that CUoD, Trial CoD, and unlimited Utility CoD resources are activated by entering a CoD
code. Unlimited Utility CoD processors are also deactivated by entering a CoD code.
-m
The name of the managed system for which the CoD operation is to be performed. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where
tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-k
The CoD code (key) to enter. Letters may be entered in either upper case or lower case.
-c
The CoD type. Valid values are onoff for On/Off CoD, reserve for Reserve CoD, trial for Trial
CoD, and utility for Utility CoD.
-r
The CoD resource type. Valid values are mem for memory and proc for processors.
-q
The quantity of On/Off CoD, Reserve CoD, or Utility CoD resources requested. The value specified must be a whole number which is greater than 0.
When requesting On/Off CoD memory, the value specified must be in megabytes, and it must be a
multiple of 1024 megabytes.
-d
The number of days for which the On/Off CoD resources are requested.
-l
The number of processor minutes to set as the Utility CoD processor minute usage limit.
To disable the Utility CoD processor minute usage limit, specify a 0 with this option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Enter a CoD code:
chcod -m sys1 -o e -k AlphaNumericString12345
Activate 2 GB of On/Off CoD memory for 10 days:
chcod -m 9406-570*1001CA -o a -c onoff -r mem -q 2048
-d 10
Increase to 5 GB of On/Off CoD memory for 3 days:
chcod -m 9406-570*1001CA -o a -c onoff -r mem -q 5120
-d 3
Activate 4 On/Off CoD processors for 5 days:
chcod -m sys1 -o a -c onoff -r proc -q 4 -d 5
Decrease to 1 On/Off CoD processor for 5 days:
chcod -m sys1 -o a -c onoff -r proc -q 1 -d 5
Activate 3 Reserve CoD processors:
chcod -m 9406-570*1001CA -o a -c reserve -r proc -q 3
Decrease the number of activated Reserve CoD processors to 1:
chcod -m sys1 -o a -c reserve -r proc -q 1
Linux
November 2012
2
Activate 1 Utility CoD processor:
chcod -m 9117-MMA*10BACEC -o a -c utility -r proc -q 1
Activate 2 more Utility CoD processors for a total of 3 Utility CoD processors:
chcod -m 9117-MMA*10BACEC -o a -c utility -r proc -q 3
Decrease the number of activated Utility CoD processors to 2:
chcod -m 9117-MMA*10BACEC -o a -c utility -r proc -q 2
Deactivate all On/Off CoD processors:
chcod -m sys1 -o d -c onoff -r proc
Deactivate all Reserve CoD processors:
chcod -m sys1 -o d -c reserve -r proc
Deactivate all Utility CoD processors:
chcod -m sys1 -o d -c utility -r proc
Deactivate all Trial CoD memory and stop the trial:
chcod -m 9406-570*1001CA -o d -c trial -r mem
Set a Utility CoD processor minute usage limit of 100 processor minutes:
chcod -m sys1 -o s -c utility -r proc -l 100
Disable the Utility CoD processor minute usage limit:
chcod -m sys1 -o s -c utility -r proc -l 0
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lscod
Linux
November 2012
3
NAME
chhmc - change Hardware Management Console (HMC) configuration information
SYNOPSIS
To change remote access settings:
chhmc -c {ssh | xntp | sol}
-s {enable | disable | modify}
[--sshprotocol {1 | 2 | all}]
[--help]
To change remote web browser access:
chhmc -c remotewebui
-s {enable | disable}
-i interface
[-a {IPv4-address | IPv6-address[/prefix-length]}]
[-nm IPv4-network-mask]
[--help]
To enable or disable TLS encrypted system logging over TCP:
chhmc -c syslog -t tls
-s {enable | disable}
[--force]
[--help]
To add or remove a remote system logging destination:
chhmc -c syslog
-s {add | remove}
{-a IP-address | -h host-name}
[-t {tcp | tls | udp}]
[--help]
To add or remove an entry in the network time protocol configuration file:
chhmc -c xntp
-s {add | remove}
{-a {IPv4-address | IPv6-address[/prefix-length]} |
-h host-name}
[--ntpversion {1 | 2}]
[-nm IPv4-network-mask]
[-i interface]
[--help]
To configure whether keyboard mapping configuration will occur at the next reboot:
chhmc -c kbdcfg
-s {enable | disable}
[--help]
To configure the network as a startup device:
chhmc -c netboot
-s {enable | disable}
[--help]
To configure an alternate disk partition on the HMC as a startup device:
chhmc -c altdiskboot
-s {enable | disable}
--mode {install | upgrade}
Linux
October 2011
1
[--help]
To permit or deny IP addresses from utilizing HMC services:
chhmc -c {ssh | service}
-s {add | remove}
-a {IPv4-address | IPv6-address[/prefix-length]}
[-nm IPv4-network-mask]
[-i interface]
[--help]
If -nm is omitted, the default IPv4 network
mask will be 255.255.255.255.
If prefix-length is omitted, the default
IPv6 prefix length will be 128.
If -i is omitted, the rule will be applied
to all interfaces.
To add or remove entries from the DNS server search order or the domain suffix search order:
chhmc -c network
-s {add | remove}
[-ns DNS-server]
[-ds domain-suffix]
[--help]
To change network settings for a specific network interface:
chhmc -c network
-s modify
-i interface
[-a {none | list]
[-nm IPv4-network-mask]
[--ipv6auto {on | off}]
[--ipv6privacy {on | off}]
[--ipv6dhcp {on | off}]
[--ipv4dhcp {on | off}]
[--lparcomm {on | off}]
[--tso {on | off}]
[--speed {auto | 10 | 100 | 1000}]
[--duplex {auto | half | full}]
[--jumboframe {on | off}]
[--help]
To change other network settings:
chhmc -c network
-s modify
[-h host-name]
[-d network-domain-name]
[-g gateway]
[--help]
To add or remove SLP service registration IP addresses (please allow at least 3 minutes for the change to
take effect):
chhmc -c slp
Linux
October 2011
2
-s {add | remove}
-a {IPv4-address | IPv6-address[/prefix-length]}
[--help]
To change the locale for the HMC:
chhmc -c locale
-s modify
-l locale
[--help]
To change the HMC date and time, or time zone:
chhmc -c date
-s modify
[--datetime date-time]
[--clock {local | utc}]
[--timezone {time-zone | none}]
[--help]
To change the HMC Kerberos configuration:
chhmc -c kerberos
-s {add | modify | remove}
[{-a KDC-IPv4-address[:port] |
-h KDC-host-name[:port]}]
[--realm realm]
[--defaultrealm realm]
[--clockskew clock-skew]
[--ticketlifetime ticket-lifetime]
[--trace {on | off}]
[--help]
To change the Integrated Management Module (IMM) settings:
chhmc -c imm
-s modify
[-a IPv4-address -nm IPv4-network-mask -g gateway]
[-u user-ID [--passwd password]]
[--mode {ded | shared}]
[--help]
To restart the IMM:
chhmc -c imm
-s restart
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
chhmc changes Hardware Management Console (HMC) configuration information, such as remote access
settings and network settings.
OPTIONS
Linux
-c
The type of configuration to be modified. Valid values are ssh, syslog, xntp, network, slp, kbdcfg, netboot, altdiskboot, locale, service, date, remotewebui, kerberos, imm, and sol for Serial
Over LAN.
-s
The new state value of the configuration. Valid values are enable, disable, add, modify, remove,
and restart.
-i
The interface to configure, such as eth0 or sl0.
October 2011
3
-a
The network IP address.
For network interface configuration, this is the static IP address configuration. Valid values are:
none - no static IP address configured
list - specify a comma-separated list of static IP
addresses. The list can contain zero or one
static IPv4 address and zero or more static
IPv6 addresses in the following format:
static-address/prefix-length
For SLP service registration IP address configuration, specify a comma-separated list of zero or
more IPv4 addresses and zero or more IPv6 addresses. IPv6 addresses must be specified in the
following format: IPv6-address[/prefix-length]. If prefix-length is omitted, the default prefix
length will be 128.
For all other operations except Kerberos and IMM configuration, an IPv4 or IPv6 address can be
specified.
For Kerberos configuration, use this option to specify the IPv4 address of the Key Distribution
Center (KDC). An optional port number can be specified following the IPv4 address. If the KDC
has an IPv6 address, then you cannot use this option to specify the IP address of the KDC. You
must use the -h option to specify the host name of the KDC instead. Either this option or the -h
option to specify the KDC is required for a Kerberos add or remove operation. This option is not
valid for a Kerberos modify operation.
-nm
The IPv4 network mask.
--ipv6auto
The IPv6 autoconfiguration setting for the network interface.
Valid values are:
on - autoconfigure IPv6 addresses
off - do not autoconfigure IPv6 addresses
--ipv6privacy
The IPv6 privacy extension setting for the network interface.
Valid values are:
on - use privacy extensions for autoconfiguration
off - do not use privacy extensions for autoconfiguration
--ipv6dhcp
The IPv6 DHCP setting for the network interface.
Valid values are:
on - obtain an IPv6 address automatically via DHCP
off - do not obtain an IPv6 address automatically via DHCP
--ipv4dhcp
The IPv4 DHCP setting for the network interface.
Valid values are:
on - obtain an IPv4 address automatically via DHCP
off - do not obtain an IPv4 address automatically via DHCP
This option cannot be used if a static IPv4 address has also been specified with the -a option.
Linux
October 2011
4
--lparcomm
The partition communication setting for the network interface.
This option has been deprecated. Use the chpsm command to configure which network interfaces
are enabled for partition communication.
--tso
The TCP segmentation offload (TSO) setting for the network interface.
Valid values are:
on - enable TSO
off - disable TSO
--speed The speed setting for the network interface.
Valid values are:
auto - automatically detect and set speed
10 - 10Mbps
100 - 100Mbps
1000 - 1000Mbps
Specify auto unless you have a requirement to use a fixed speed setting.
--duplex
The duplex setting for the network interface.
Valid values are:
auto - automatically detect and set duplex
half - half duplex
full - full duplex
Specify auto unless you have a requirement to use a fixed duplex setting.
Valid combinations of --speed and --duplex are:
--speed auto --duplex auto
--speed 10 --duplex half
--speed 10 --duplex full
--speed 100 --duplex half
--speed 100 --duplex full
--speed 1000 --duplex full
--jumboframe
Enables or disables jumbo frames on the network interface. The jumbo frame size is 9000 bytes.
Valid values are:
on - enable jumbo frames
off - disable jumbo frames
Do not enable jumbo frames on the network interface that is used to connect to managed systems or managed frames. Managed systems and managed frames do not support jumbo
frames.
Do not enable jumbo frames on the network interface that is used for partition communication. Resource Monitoring and Control (RMC) does not support jumbo frames.
Linux
-d
The network domain name.
-h
The host name.
October 2011
5
For Kerberos configuration, use this option to specify the host name of the Key Distribution Center
(KDC). An optional port number can be specified following the host name. Also, either this
option or the -a option to specify the KDC is required for a Kerberos add or remove operation.
This option is not valid for a Kerberos modify operation.
-g
The default gateway IP address.
-ns
The nameserver IP address to add or remove.
-ds
The domain suffix to add or remove.
--ntpversion
The ntp version if the server is not at NTP version 3 and above.
--mode When configuring an alternate disk partition on the HMC as the startup device, specify the mode
to use when starting up. Valid values are install and upgrade. The default value is upgrade.
When configuring the HMC IMM settings, specify the IMM network interface mode. Valid values
are ded for dedicated and shared. The default value is ded.
-l
The locale. For a list of all locales supported by the HMC, issue the lshmc -L command.
For the new locale to take effect for the local HMC console, you must log off the console and log
back on. For the new locale to take effect for the HMC command line, you must reboot the HMC.
--datetime
The new date and time to set on the HMC’s clock. date-time must be specified using the following
format:
MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss]
where MM is the month, DD is the day, hh is the hour in 24 hour format, mm is the minutes, CC is
the century, YY is the year, and ss is the seconds.
This option is required when the --clock option is specified.
You must reboot the HMC after setting the date and time.
--clock The BIOS clock type. Valid values are local and utc.
--timezone
The time zone to set for the HMC. time-zone must be specified in continent/city format. Specify
none to remove the time zone setting.
You must reboot the HMC after setting the time zone.
--realm
The Kerberos realm name.
When the first Kerberos realm and KDC is added to the HMC, that realm is set as the default
realm and Kerberos is automatically enabled on the HMC. When the last Kerberos realm and
KDC is removed from the HMC, Kerberos is automatically disabled on the HMC. Then, if
another Kerberos realm and KDC is added to the HMC, Kerberos will automatically be enabled
again, and the default realm will be set to the new realm. There is no other way to enable or disable Kerberos on the HMC.
This option is required for a Kerberos add or remove operation. This option is not valid for a Kerberos modify operation.
Linux
October 2011
6
--defaultrealm
The Kerberos default realm name.
When no realms exist on the HMC, the default realm is automatically set to the next realm that is
added to the HMC.
This option is not valid for a Kerberos add or remove operation.
--clockskew
The Kerberos clock skew value in seconds. This is the maximum allowable amount of clock skew
before Kerberos considers messages invalid. The clock skew is set to the default value of 120 seconds whenever Kerberos is enabled on the HMC, unless this option is specified.
This option is not valid for a Kerberos remove operation.
--ticketlifetime
The Kerberos ticket lifetime value (lifetime for credentials). The format of this value is a whole
number followed by s for seconds, m for minutes, h for hours, or d for days. The ticket lifetime is
set to the default value of 2d (2 days) whenever Kerberos is enabled on the HMC, unless this
option is specified.
This option is not valid for a Kerberos remove operation.
--trace Enables or disables Kerberos authentication logging. When enabled, trace messages are logged in
the /var/log/messages file on the HMC.
Valid values are:
on - enable Kerberos authentication logging
off - disable Kerberos authentication logging (default
value)
This option is only valid for a Kerberos modify operation.
--sshprotocol
The SSH protocol to use. Valid values are 1 for version 1, 2 for version 2, or all for both versions
1 and 2. The default value is 2.
-u
The new IMM user ID.
--passwd
The new IMM user password. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to enter the password.
-t
The type of connection to use for forwarding syslog messages to the remote destination. Valid values are tcp for unencrypted TCP, tls for TLS encrypted TCP, and udp for unencrypted UDP.
If this option is not specified, it defaults to udp.
The HMC does not support both encrypted and unencrypted remote system logging destinations
simultaneously.
Before TLS encrypted system logging over TCP can be enabled, the getfile command must be run
to deploy the rsyslog certificate files and private key file on the HMC.
--force Specify this option to force TLS encrypted system logging over TCP to be disabled when there are
remote system logging destinations configured. All configured remote system logging destinations will be removed.
--help
Linux
Display the help text for this command and exit.
October 2011
7
EXAMPLES
To change the Hardware Management Console host name:
chhmc -c network -s modify -h mynewhost
To set the IP address and network mask for network interface eth0:
chhmc -c network -s modify -i eth0 -a 10.10.10.1
-nm 255.255.255.0
To enable remote access via ssh:
chhmc -c ssh -s enable
To enable remote access via Serial Over LAN:
chhmc -c sol -s enable
To disable remote web browser access from all IP addresses over network interface eth0:
chhmc -c remotewebui -s disable -i eth0
To add a remote system logging destination that will receive syslog messages over UDP:
chhmc -c syslog -s add -a 10.10.10.2
To enable TLS encrypted system logging over TCP:
chhmc -c syslog -s enable -t tls
To add a remote system logging destination that will receive TLS encrypted syslog messages over TCP:
chhmc -c syslog -s add -t tls -h secure.ibm.com
To enable keyboard mapping configuration to occur on the next reboot:
chhmc -c kbdcfg -s enable
To permit a single IP address to use the ssh service over network interface eth0:
chhmc -c ssh -s add -a 10.10.10.3 -nm 255.255.255.255
-i eth0
To enable Network Time Protocol service:
chhmc -c xntp -s enable
To add a Network Time Protocol server to the configuration file:
chhmc -c xntp -s add -h mytimeserver.company.com
Specify the hostname will not change firewall rule settings. It is assumed that the user will use the Customize Network Settings to change firewall settings.
Linux
October 2011
8
To add a Network Time Protocol server to the configuration file, using IP address and at the same time
enable firewall access through network interface eth0:
chhmc -c xntp -s add -a 10.10.10.32 -i eth0
To remove a Network Time Protocol server from the configuration file:
chhmc -c xntp -s remove -h mytimeserver.company.com
To remove the HMC IP address 9.53.182.99 from the SLP service registration IP addresses:
chhmc -c slp -s remove -a 9.53.182.99
To set the current locale to Spanish:
chhmc -c locale -s modify -l es_ES
To set the network as a startup device on the next HMC boot:
chhmc -c netboot -s enable
To set the alternate disk partition on HMC as a startup device on the next HMC boot:
chhmc -c altdiskboot -s enable --mode upgrade
To update the HMC clock to January 25, 2007 14:30:50 (the current year is 2007):
chhmc -c date -s modify --datetime 01251430.50 or
chhmc -c date -s modify --datetime 012514302007.50 or
chhmc -c date -s modify --datetime 0125143007.50
To update the HMC clock to December 8, 2008 09:45, local time:
chhmc -c date -s modify --datetime 120809452008 --clock
local
To update the HMC time zone to United States, Central time:
chhmc -c date -s modify --timezone America/Chicago
To remove the time zone setting from the HMC:
chhmc -c date -s modify --timezone none
To add a Kerberos realm and KDC to the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s add --realm EXAMPLE.COM -a 10.10.0.20
To add a Kerberos realm and KDC and set the clock skew to 140 seconds and ticket lifetime to 1 day:
chhmc -c kerberos -s add --realm EXAMPLE.COM
-h kdc.example.com:88 --clockskew 140
Linux
October 2011
9
--ticketlifetime 1d
To remove a Kerberos realm and KDC from the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s remove --realm EXAMPLE.COM
-h kdc.example.com
To modify the Kerberos default realm on the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s modify --defaultrealm EXAMPLE2.COM
To modify the Kerberos clock skew to 60 seconds on the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s modify --clockskew 60
To modify the Kerberos ticket lifetime to 12 hours on the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s modify --ticketlifetime 12h
To change the IMM network settings:
chhmc -c imm -s modify -a 9.3.99.100 -nm 255.255.255.0 -g 9.3.99.1 chhmc -c imm -s restart (to apply
the new network settings)
To change the IMM user ID and password (the password must be entered when prompted):
chhmc -c imm -s modify -u immusername
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshmc, chpsm, getfile
Linux
October 2011
10
NAME
chhmcencr - change HMC encryption support
SYNOPSIS
chhmcencr -c {passwd | webui} -o {a | r | s} -e encryption [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chhmcencr changes which encryption is used by the Hardware Management Console (HMC) to encrypt
the passwords of locally authenticated HMC users. The new encryption will be used when a locally authenticated HMC user is created, or when the password for a locally authenticated HMC user is changed. The
passwords of existing locally authenticated HMC users will not be affected by the encryption change until
the passwords for those users are changed.
chhmcencr also changes which encryptions can be used by the HMC Web user interface. Only encryptions
supported by Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) version 3 can be used. The HMC must be rebooted for any
changes to HMC Web user interface encryptions to take effect.
OPTIONS
-c
The encryption configuration to change. Valid values are passwd to change which password
encryption is used for locally authenticated HMC users, or webui to change which encryptions can
be used by the HMC Web user interface.
-o
The operation to perform.
Specify a to add an encryption to the encryptions currently supported by the HMC Web user interface.
Specify r to remove an encryption from the encryptions currently supported by the HMC Web user
interface.
Specify s to set the encryption to use to encrypt the passwords of locally authenticated HMC users
for all subsequent user creations and user password modifications.
-e
The encryption to add, remove, or set. When adding or removing HMC Web user interface encryptions, multiple encryptions can be specified and must be comma separated.
For a list of all of the HMC password encryptions available, run the lshmcencr -c passwd -t a
command.
For a list of all of the encryptions available for the HMC Web user interface, run the lshmcencr -c
webui -t a command.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Set the password encryption to be used for all subsequent HMC user creations or password modifications to
SHA-512:
chhmcencr -c passwd -o s -e sha512
Remove SSL_DHE_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA from the encryptions currently supported by the HMC Web user interface:
chhmcencr -c webui -o r -e SSL_DHE_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA
Add SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA and SSL_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA to the
encryptions currently supported by the HMC Web user interface:
chhmcencr -c webui -o a -e
Linux
October 2009
1
--ticketlifetime 1d
To remove a Kerberos realm and KDC from the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s remove --realm EXAMPLE.COM
-h kdc.example.com
To modify the Kerberos default realm on the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s modify --defaultrealm EXAMPLE2.COM
To modify the Kerberos clock skew to 60 seconds on the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s modify --clockskew 60
To modify the Kerberos ticket lifetime to 12 hours on the HMC:
chhmc -c kerberos -s modify --ticketlifetime 12h
To change the IMM network settings:
chhmc -c imm -s modify -a 9.3.99.100 -nm 255.255.255.0 -g 9.3.99.1 chhmc -c imm -s restart (to apply
the new network settings)
To change the IMM user ID and password (the password must be entered when prompted):
chhmc -c imm -s modify -u immusername
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshmc, chpsm, getfile
Linux
October 2011
10
SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA,SSL_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshmcencr
Linux
October 2009
2
NAME
chhmcfs - free up space in HMC file systems
SYNOPSIS
chhmcfs -o f {-d days | -h hours | -s size}
[-f file-system] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chhmcfs frees up space in Hardware Management Console (HMC) file systems. Space is freed by removing temporary HMC files that are used for HMC and managed system firmware problem analysis from the
HMC hard disk.
This command can only free up space in the following file systems: /var, /dump, /extra, and /. The temporary files that can be removed from the /var file system include HMC trace and log files. The temporary
files that can be removed from the /dump file system include managed system dumps, managed frame
dumps, and debug data collected using the HMC pedbg command. The temporary files that can be
removed from the /extra file system include managed system dumps and managed frame dumps. The temporary files that can be removed from the / file system include HMC Java core dump and heap dump files,
and HMC trace files for Power system firmware updates.
This command will not remove temporary HMC trace and log files that are in use.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. The only valid value is f to free up file system disk space by removing
temporary HMC files from the hard disk.
-d
Remove temporary HMC files which have not been modified during the specified number of days
prior to now.
If 0 is specified with this option, all temporary HMC files will be removed.
Specifying -d 1 is equivalent to specifying -h 24.
The -d, -h, and -s options are mutually exclusive.
-h
Remove temporary HMC files which have not been modified during the specified number of hours
prior to now.
If 0 is specified with this option, all temporary HMC files will be removed.
The -d, -h, and -s options are mutually exclusive.
-s
Remove temporary HMC files, starting with the oldest file, to free up to size megabytes in each file
system.
The -d, -h, and -s options are mutually exclusive.
-f
The file system from which to remove files. Valid values are /var, /dump, /extra, and /.
If this option is omitted, files will be removed from all file systems that have temporary HMC files
that can be removed.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove temporary HMC files which have not been modified during the last day (24 hours) from all file
systems:
chhmcfs -o f -d 1
Linux
May 2011
1
Remove all temporary HMC files from all file systems:
chhmcfs -o f -d 0
Remove temporary HMC files which have not been modified during the last 36 hours from the /var file system:
chhmcfs -o f -h 36 -f /var
Remove temporary HMC files from the /dump file system to free up to 100 MB:
chhmcfs -o f -s 100 -f /dump
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshmcfs
Linux
May 2011
2
NAME
chhmcldap - change HMC LDAP configuration
SYNOPSIS
To set HMC LDAP configuration attributes:
chhmcldap -o s [--primary LDAP-server-URI]
[--backup LDAP-server-URI] [--basedn base-DN]
[--binddn bind-DN] [--bindpw bind-password]
[--timelimit time-limit]
[--bindtimelimit bind-time-limit]
[--automanage {0 | 1}]
[--auth {ldap | kerberos}]
[--loginattribute attribute]
[--hmcuserpropsattribute attribute]
[--hmcauthnameattribute attribute]
[--searchfilter LDAP-search-filter]
[--scope {one | sub}]
[--referrals {0 | 1}] [--starttls {0 | 1}]
To remove an LDAP resource or the LDAP configuration from the HMC:
chhmcldap -o r -r {backup | ldap | binddn | bindpw | searchfilter}
DESCRIPTION
chhmcldap changes the Hardware Management Console (HMC) Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) client configuration.
By default, LDAP is not configured on the HMC. The HMC can only be configured as an LDAP client. To
configure the HMC as an LDAP client, issue this command and specify both the primary LDAP server and
the base Distinguished Name (DN) at a minimum.
The getfile command can be used to deploy an LDAP Certificate Authority (CA) certificate file on the
HMC.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are s to set an HMC LDAP configuration attribute, and r to
remove an LDAP resource or the LDAP configuration from the HMC.
-r
The LDAP resource to remove. Valid values are backup to remove the backup LDAP server, ldap
to unconfigure LDAP on the HMC, binddn to remove the bind Distinguished Name (DN),
bindpw to remove the bind password, and searchfilter to remove the LDAP search filter.
This option is required for a remove operation. This option is not valid for a set operation.
--primary
The primary LDAP server. The Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) scheme may be ldap:// for
LDAP over TCP, or ldaps:// for LDAP over SSL. The URI format is ldap://LDAP-server[:portnumber] or ldaps://LDAP-server[:port-number]. LDAP-server can either be the host name or the
IP address of the LDAP server. The port number is optional. If the port number is omitted, port
389 is used for the ldap:// scheme and port 636 is used for the ldaps:// scheme. If Start TLS is
enabled, the URI must use the ldap:// scheme.
If LDAP is not configured on the HMC, both this option and the --basedn option must be specified
to configure LDAP on the HMC.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
Linux
May 2011
1
--backup
The backup LDAP server. The URI scheme may be ldap:// for LDAP over TCP, or ldaps:// for
LDAP over SSL. The URI format is ldap://LDAP-server[:port-number] or ldaps://LDAPserver[:port-number]. LDAP-server can either be the host name or the IP address of the LDAP
server. The port number is optional. If the port number is omitted, port 389 is used for the ldap://
scheme and port 636 is used for the ldaps:// scheme. If Start TLS is enabled, the URI must use
the ldap:// scheme.
This option is only valid for a set operation. Setting a backup LDAP server is optional.
--basedn
The default base DN to use when performing LDAP operations. The base DN must be specified in
LDAP format (e.g. dc=ldapclient,dc=example,dc=com).
If LDAP is not configured on the HMC, both this option and the --primary option must be specified to configure LDAP on the HMC.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--binddn
The DN to use for binding to the LDAP server when the LDAP server is configured to use nonanonymous binding. The bind DN must be specified in LDAP format (e.g.
cn=admin,dc=yourorg,dc=com).
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--bindpw
The password to use when binding to the LDAP server when the LDAP server is configured to use
non-anonymous binding.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--timelimit
The LDAP search time limit in seconds. A value of 0 means there is no time limit. If this option is
not specified when LDAP is configured, the search time limit is set to 30 seconds.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--bindtimelimit
The LDAP server bind time limit in seconds. If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, the bind time limit is set to 30 seconds.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--automanage
Use this option to indicate whether the HMC should automatically manage remotely authenticated
LDAP users. Valid values are 0 to disable automatic management, or 1 to enable automatic management.
When automatic management is enabled, an LDAP user can log in to the HMC. An HMC user
will be automatically created for the LDAP user if the HMC user does not exist when the LDAP
user logs in. If the HMC user already exists, it will be updated with the current user definition
retrieved from the LDAP server when the LDAP user logs in.
If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, automatic management is disabled.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
Linux
May 2011
2
--auth The type of authentication to use for automatically managed LDAP users. Valid values are ldap to
use LDAP authentication, or kerberos to use Kerberos authentication.
If kerberos is specified and Kerberos is not enabled on the HMC, LDAP users will not be able to
log in to the HMC because the HMC will not be able to retrieve the user data from the LDAP
server.
If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, LDAP authentication will be used.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--loginattribute
The login attribute to use to authenticate LDAP users on the HMC. The value of the login attribute
stored on the LDAP server is compared with the HMC user name. If a match is found on the
LDAP server, then authentication with the LDAP server is attempted.
If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, the login attribute is set to uid.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--hmcuserpropsattribute
The attribute to use to retrieve the user roles and properties from the LDAP server. These user
roles and properties are used when the HMC user is created or updated for an automatically managed LDAP user.
If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, this attribute is set to ibm-aixAdminPolicyEntry.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--hmcauthnameattribute
The attribute to use to retrieve the remote user ID used in Kerberos authentication. When the
HMC user is created or updated for an automatically managed LDAP user, the HMC user is
assigned this remote user ID if Kerberos authentication is used.
If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, this attribute is set to userPrincipalName.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--searchfilter
The filter to use for limiting the search of the LDAP server for user information. This is useful
when you have a large number of LDAP users and you want to decrease the amount of time for
retrieving the user information.
If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, then no filter is set.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--scope The search scope starting from base DN. Valid values are one to search one level or sub to search
the subtree. This is useful when you want to search for users in different organizations.
If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, the search scope is set to one level.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
Linux
May 2011
3
--referrals
Specifies whether automatic referral chasing is to be enabled or disabled. Valid values are 0 to disable automatic referral chasing, and 1 to enable it. If this option is not specified when LDAP is
configured, automatic referral chasing is enabled.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--starttls
Specifies whether Start Transport Layer Security (TLS) is to be enabled or disabled. Valid values
are 0 to disable Start TLS, and 1 to enable it. This option can only be enabled if the LDAP server
supports the Start TLS protocol. When Start TLS is enabled, a connection is opened using the
normal LDAP port. Then, when needed (for example when binding), the connection is converted
to a SSL connection using the Start TLS protocol. This functionality exists, for example, in
OpenLDAP. When Start TLS is enabled, the URI scheme ldap:// must be used.
If this option is not specified when LDAP is configured, Start TLS is disabled.
This option is only valid for a set operation.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Configure LDAP on the HMC for the first time and enable Start TLS:
chhmcldap -o s --primary ldap://ldap.example.com --basedn
dc=example,dc=com --starttls 1
Set a backup LDAP server using the ldap:// URI scheme:
chhmcldap -o s --backup ldap://ldap2.example.com
Set the primary LDAP server using the ldaps:// URI scheme and port number 625:
chhmcldap -o s --primary ldaps://ldap.example.com:625
Set the bind DN and bind password:
chhmcldap -o s --binddn cn=admin,dc=yourorg,dc=com --bindpw secret
Enable automatic management of LDAP users and set the authentication type to Kerberos:
chhmcldap -o s --automanage 1 --auth kerberos
Set the LDAP search filter:
chhmcldap -o s --searchfilter "mail=*@yourcompany.com"
Set the LDAP search scope to subtree:
chhmcldap -o s --scope sub
Set the login attribute to notesshortname:
chhmcldap -o s --loginattribute notesshortname
Set both the time limit and bind time limit to 40 seconds and disable referrals:
Linux
May 2011
4
chhmcldap -o s --timelimit 40 --bindtimelimit 40 --referrals 0
Remove the backup LDAP server:
chhmcldap -o r -r backup
Unconfigure LDAP on the HMC:
chhmcldap -o r -r ldap
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshmcldap, getfile, rmfile
Linux
May 2011
5
NAME
chhmcusr - change a Hardware Management Console user
SYNOPSIS
chhmcusr -u user-name
-t {assign | desc | name | passwd | pwage | taskrole |
auth | remoteuser}
[-o {a | r}] [-r {resource | resourcerole}]
[-v new-attribute-value]
[--remoteuser remote-user-name] [--localpasswd password]
[--help]
or
chhmcusr {-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chhmcusr changes attributes of a Hardware Management Console (HMC) user.
OPTIONS
-u
The user name of the HMC user to change.
You can either use this option, or use the name attribute with the -f or -i option, to specify the user
name. The -u, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
-t
The user attribute to change. Valid values are assign for the user’s access control managed
resource object assignment or managed resource role assignment, desc for the user’s description,
name for the user’s user name, passwd for the user’s password, pwage for the number of days
until the user’s password expires, taskrole for the user’s access control task role, auth for the
user’s authentication type, and remoteuser for the user’s remote user ID used for remote Kerberos
authentication.
Only users that have the hmcsuperadmin task role, or that have the ManageAllUserPasswords
task in their task role, are authorized to change other user’s passwords.
You can either use this option, or use the -f or -i option, to specify the user attribute(s) to change.
The -t, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
-o
The managed resource object or role assignment operation to perform. Valid values are a to add a
managed resource object or role to the user and r to remove a managed resource object or role
from the user.
This option is required when changing the user’s managed resource object assignment.
You can either use this option, or use the resourcerole attribute with the -f or -i option, to change
the user’s managed resource role assignment. The -o, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
-r
The type of access control assignment to change. Valid values are resource for managed resource
object assignment and resourcerole for managed resource role assignment.
This option is required when the -o option is used to change the user’s managed resource object
assignment or managed resource role assignment. This option is not valid otherwise.
-v
The new value for the attribute being changed.
When changing the user’s managed resource object assignment, specify the managed resource
object to be added or removed.
Linux
October 2009
1
When changing the user’s managed resource role assignment, specify the managed resource role
to be added or removed.
When changing the user’s description, specify the new description with this option. The new
description can be any string.
When changing the user’s user name, specify the new user name with this option. The new user
name must not be longer than 32 characters, and it must begin with a letter.
When changing the user’s password, you can either specify the new password with this option, or
you can omit this option and you will be prompted to enter the password. The new password must
be at least 7 characters in length.
When changing the number of days until the user’s password expires, specify the new number of
days with this option.
When changing the user’s access control task role, specify the new task role with this option.
Valid values are hmcsuperadmin, hmcoperator, hmcviewer, hmcpe, hmcservicerep, or a userdefined task role.
When changing the user’s authentication type, specify the new authentication type with this
option. Valid values are local, kerberos, or ldap.
When changing the user’s remote user ID used for remote Kerberos authentication, specify the
new remote user ID with this option.
This option is required when the -t option is specified to change any user attribute other than the
user’s password.
You can either use this option, or use the -f or -i option, to specify the new user attribute value(s).
The -v, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
--remoteuser
The remote user ID used for remote Kerberos authentication for this user. This is the user’s Kerberos principal. The format of a typical Kerberos principal is primary/[email protected]
The remote user ID must be specified when changing the user’s authentication type to remote Kerberos authentication.
This option is only valid when the -t option is specified to change the user’s authentication type to
remote Kerberos authentication.
You can either use this option, or use the remote_user_name attribute with the -f or -i option, to
change the remote user ID. The --remoteuser, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
--localpasswd
The password for this user. The password must be at least 7 characters in length.
This option is only valid when the -t option is specified to change the user’s authentication type to
local authentication.
You can either use this option, or use the passwd attribute with the -f or -i option, to specify the
password for this user when changing the user’s authentication type to local authentication. If this
option is omitted or the -f or -i option is specified and the passwd attribute is omitted, you will be
prompted to enter the password. The --localpasswd, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
Linux
October 2009
2
-f
The name of the file containing the input data for this command. The input data consists of
attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format.
The format of the input data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Valid attribute names for this command:
name
[new_name]
[taskrole]
Valid values are hmcsuperadmin, hmcoperator,
hmcviewer, hmcpe, hmcservicerep, or a user-defined
task role
[resourcerole]
[description]
[passwd]
[pwage]
number of days
[min_pwage]
number of days
[authentication_type]
Valid values are:
local - local authentication
kerberos - remote Kerberos authentication
ldap - remote LDAP authentication
[session_timeout]
number of minutes
[verify_timeout]
number of minutes
[idle_timeout]
number of minutes
[inactivity_expiration]
number of days
[remote_webui_access]
Valid values are:
0 - do not allow this user to log in remotely to the
HMC Web user interface
1 - allow this user to log in remotely to the
HMC Web user interface
[remote_ssh_access]
Valid values are:
0 - do not allow this user to log in remotely to the
HMC using SSH
1 - allow this user to log in remotely to the
HMC using SSH
[remote_user_name]
Input data for this command can be specified with this option, the -i option, or any of the other
command options. The -f and the -i options are mutually exclusive, and they cannot be specified if
any of the other command options are specified.
-i
Linux
This option allows you to enter input data on the command line, instead of using a file. Data
entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be enclosed
in double quotes.
October 2009
3
Input data for this command can be specified with this option, the -f option, or any of the other
command options. The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive, and they cannot be specified if
any of the other command options are specified.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Change the password for the user tester (the new password must be entered when prompted):
chhmcusr -u tester -t passwd
Change the password for the user tester without prompting:
chhmcusr -u tester -t passwd -v secretpassword
or
chhmcusr -i "name=tester,passwd=secretpassword"
Change the number of days until the password expires for the user hmcuser1 to be 180:
chhmcusr -u hmcuser1 -t pwage -v 180
or
chhmcusr -i "name=hmcuser1,pwage=180"
Change the task role for the user tester to hmcoperator:
chhmcusr -u tester -t taskrole -v hmcoperator
or
chhmcusr -i "name=tester,taskrole=hmcoperator"
Change the remote user ID for the user krbuser to [email protected]:
chhmcusr -u krbuser -t remoteuser -v [email protected]
or
chhmcusr -i "name=krbuser,[email protected]"
Change the remotely authenticated Kerberos user user1 to a locally authenticated user (the password must
be entered when prompted):
chhmcusr -u user1 -t auth -v local
or
chhmcusr -i "name=user1,authentication_type=local"
Change the locally authenticated user user2 to a remotely authenticated Kerberos user and set the remote
user ID to [email protected]:
chhmcusr -u user2 -t auth -v kerberos --remoteuser
Linux
October 2009
4
[email protected]
or
chhmcusr -i "name=user2,authentication_type=kerberos,
[email protected]"
Change the locally authenticated user user3 to a remotely authenticated LDAP user:
chhmcusr -u user3 -t auth -v ldap
or
chhmcusr -i "name=user3,authentication_type=ldap"
Change the remotely authenticated LDAP user user4 to a locally authenticated user:
chhmcusr -u user4 -t auth -v local --localpasswd jk3ds00b
or
chhmcusr -i "name=user4,authentication_type=local,passwd=jk3ds00b"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshmcusr, mkhmcusr, rmhmcusr, lsaccfg
Linux
October 2009
5
NAME
chhwres - change hardware resources
SYNOPSIS
To add, remove, or move a physical I/O slot:
chhwres -r io -m managed-system -o {a | r | m}
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[{-t target-partition-name |
--tid target-partition-ID}]
-l slot-DRC-index [-a "attributes"]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [--force]
To set physical I/O attributes:
chhwres -r io -m managed-system -o s
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
--rsubtype {iopool | taggedio}
-a "attributes"
To clear a physical I/O slot or bus:
chhwres -r io -m managed-system -o c
[--rsubtype {bus | slot}] [-l slot-DRC-index]
To add or remove a virtual I/O adapter:
chhwres -r virtualio -m managed-system -o {a | r}
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[--rsubtype {eth | fc | scsi | serial}]
[-s virtual-slot-number] [-a "attributes"]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [--force]
To change a virtual ethernet adapter assigned to a running partition:
chhwres -r virtualio -m managed-system -o s --rsubtype eth
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
-s virtual-slot-number -a "attributes"
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [--force]
To set virtual I/O attributes:
chhwres -r virtualio -m managed-system -o s
[{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}]
--rsubtype {eth | hsl | virtualopti}
-a "attributes"
To add or remove a virtual switch:
chhwres -r virtualio -m managed-system -o {a | r}
--rsubtype vswitch --vswitch virtual-switch
To set virtual switch attributes:
chhwres -r virtualio -m managed-system -o s
--rsubtype vswitch --vswitch virtual-switch
[-a "attributes"]
To add, remove, or move memory:
chhwres -r mem -m managed-system -o {a | r | m}
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[{-t target-partition-name |
--tid target-partition-ID}]
Linux
November 2012
1
[-q quantity] [--entitled quantity]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [--force]
To set memory attributes for the managed system:
chhwres -r mem -m managed-system -o s
-a "attributes"
To set memory attributes for a partition:
chhwres -r mem -m managed-system -o s
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
-a "attributes"
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [--force]
To switch over a running shared memory partition to its redundant paging Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partition:
chhwres -r mem -m managed-system -o so
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
To reset I/O entitled memory statistics for a partition:
chhwres -r mem -m managed-system -o rs
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level]
To add or remove a shared memory pool, or set shared memory pool attributes:
chhwres -r mempool -m managed-system -o {a | r | s}
[-a "attributes"]
To add or remove a device in the shared memory pool (on managed systems that support partition suspend
and resume operations, this adds or removes a device in the reserved storage device pool):
chhwres -r mempool -m managed-system -o {a | r}
{-p paging-VIOS-partition-name |
--id paging-VIOS-partition-ID}
--rsubtype pgdev --device device-name
To add or remove a reserved storage device pool, or set reserved storage device pool attributes (only supported on managed systems that support partition suspend and resume operations):
chhwres -r rspool -m managed-system -o {a | r | s}
[-a "attributes"]
To add or remove a device in the reserved storage device pool (only supported on managed systems that
support partition suspend and resume operations):
chhwres -r rspool -m managed-system -o {a | r}
{-p VIOS-partition-name | --id VIOS-partition-ID}
--rsubtype rsdev --device device-name [--manual]
To add, remove, or move processing resources:
chhwres -r proc -m managed-system -o {a | r | m}
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[{-t target-partition-name |
--tid target-partition-ID}]
[--procs quantity] [--procunits quantity]
[--5250cpwpercent percentage]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [--force]
Linux
November 2012
2
To set processing attributes for the managed system:
chhwres -r proc -m managed-system -o s -a "attributes"
To set processing attributes for a partition:
chhwres -r proc -m managed-system -o s
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
-a "attributes"
To set shared processor pool attributes on a managed system that supports multiple shared processor pools:
chhwres -r procpool -m managed-system -o s
{--poolname pool-name | --poolid pool-ID}
-a "attributes"
To set shared processor pool attributes for a partition on a managed system that supports multiple shared
processor pools:
chhwres -r procpool -m managed-system -o s
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
-a "attributes"
To add, remove, or move a Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA) logical port:
chhwres -r hea -m managed-system -o {a | r | m}
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[{-t target-partition-name |
--tid target-partition-ID}]
-l HEA-adapter-ID
[--physport physical-port-ID]
-g port-group --logport logical-port-ID
[-a "attributes"]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [--force]
To set HEA attributes:
chhwres -r hea -m managed-system -o s
-l HEA-adapter-ID
[--physport physical-port-ID]
-g port-group -a "attributes"
DESCRIPTION
chhwres changes the hardware resource configuration of the managed-system. chhwres is used to perform
dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR) operations.
When chhwres is used to add a virtual I/O adapter to a Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partition, chhwres issues
the VIOS cfgdev command to configure the device in the VIOS. When chhwres is used to remove a virtual
I/O adapter from a VIOS partition, chhwres issues the VIOS rmdev command to remove the device from
the VIOS partition.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of hardware resources to change. Valid values are io for physical I/O, virtualio for virtual I/O, mem for memory, mempool for shared memory pool, rspool for reserved storage device
pool, proc for processing resources, procpool for shared processor pool, and hea for Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA) resources.
Shared processor pool operations are only supported on managed systems that support multiple
shared processor pools.
Reserved storage device pool operations are only supported on managed systems that support partition suspend and resume operations.
Linux
November 2012
3
--rsubtype
The subtype of hardware resources to change. Valid physical I/O resource subtypes are slot for
I/O slots, bus for I/O buses, iopool for I/O pools, and taggedio for tagged I/O resources. Valid
virtual I/O resource subtypes are eth for virtual ethernet, fc for virtual fibre channel, scsi for virtual SCSI, serial for virtual serial, hsl for High Speed Link (HSL) OptiConnect, virtualopti for
virtual OptiConnect, and vswitch for virtual switch resources.
The only valid shared memory pool resource subtype is pgdev for paging space devices. The only
valid reserved storage device pool resource subtype is rsdev for reserved storage devices. On a
managed system that supports Active Memory Sharing and partition suspend and resume operations, the command chhwres -m managed-system -r mempool --rsubtype pgdev -o {a | r} -p
VIOS-partition-name --device device-name adds or removes a device in the reserved storage
device pool, and is equivalent to the command chhwres -m managed-system -r rspool --rsubtype
rsdev -o {a | r} -p VIOS-partition-name --device device-name.
This option is required for physical I/O and virtual I/O set operations, for virtual I/O add operations, and for virtual switch operations. This option is not valid for memory, processor, shared
processor pool, or HEA operations.
-m
The name of the managed system for which the hardware resource configuration is to be changed.
The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form ttttmmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number
of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed
systems with the same user-defined name.
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are a to add hardware resources, r to remove hardware
resources, m to move hardware resources from one partition to another, s to set hardware resource
related attributes, rs to reset I/O entitled memory statistics for a partition, so to switch over a running shared memory partition to its redundant paging VIOS partition, or c to clear a physical I/O
slot or bus.
The c operation is useful for clearing stale physical I/O slot or bus information after a physical I/O
adapter or drawer has been concurrently removed but not replaced.
The clear physical I/O slot operation is only supported on POWER6 and later servers.
-p
The name of the partition for which to perform the operation. For a move operation, this is the
source partition (the partition the resources will be moved from) for the operation.
When adding or removing a device in the shared memory pool or the reserved storage device pool,
use this option to specify the name of the VIOS partition which has the device. If the device is
accessed by more than one VIOS partition, then only one of the VIOS partitions must be specified,
and the device name specified with the --device option must be the name of the device on that
VIOS partition.
You can either use this option to specify the name of the partition for which to perform the operation, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and the --id options are mutually
exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to perform the operation. For a move operation, this is the
source partition (the partition the resources will be moved from) for the operation.
When adding or removing a device in the shared memory pool or the reserved storage device pool,
use this option to specify the ID of the VIOS partition which has the device. If the device is
accessed by more than one VIOS partition, then only one of the VIOS partitions must be specified,
and the device name specified with the --device option must be the name of the device on that
VIOS partition.
Linux
November 2012
4
You can either use this option to specify the ID of the partition for which to perform the operation,
or use the -p option to specify the partition’s name. The --id and the -p options are mutually
exclusive.
-t
The name of the target partition for a move operation.
You can either use this option to specify the name of the target partition, or use the --tid option to
specify the ID of the partition. The -t and the --tid options are mutually exclusive.
A target partition is required to be specified with this option or the --tid option for a move operation. This option is not valid for any other operation.
--tid
The ID of the target partition for a move operation.
You can either use this option to specify the ID of the target partition, or use the -t option to specify the name of the target partition. The --tid and the -t options are mutually exclusive.
A target partition is required to be specified with this option or the -t option for a move operation.
This option is not valid for any other operation.
--poolname
The name of the shared processor pool for which to set attributes.
You can either use this option to specify the name of the shared processor pool, or use the --poolid
option to specify the ID of the shared processor pool. The --poolname and the --poolid options
are mutually exclusive.
A shared processor pool is required to be specified with this option or the --poolid option when
setting the attributes for a shared processor pool. This option is not valid for any other operation.
--poolid
The ID of the shared processor pool for which to set attributes.
You can either use this option to specify the ID of the shared processor pool, or use the --poolname option to specify the name of the shared processor pool. The --poolid and the --poolname
options are mutually exclusive.
A shared processor pool is required to be specified with this option or the --poolname option
when setting the attributes for a shared processor pool. This option is not valid for any other operation.
-l
When adding, removing, moving, or clearing a physical I/O slot, use this option to specify the
DRC index of the slot.
When performing an HEA operation, use this option to specify the adapter ID of the HEA for
which the operation is to be performed.
This option is not valid for any other operation.
-s
The virtual slot number of the virtual I/O adapter to add, change, or remove.
When adding a virtual I/O adapter, if this option is not specified then the next available virtual slot
number will be assigned to the virtual I/O adapter.
When changing or removing a virtual I/O adapter, this option is required.
-q
Linux
The quantity of memory to add, remove, or move. The quantity specified must be in megabytes, it
must be a multiple of the memory region size for the managed-system, and it must be greater than
0.
November 2012
5
For a partition using shared memory, this is the quantity of logical memory to add or remove.
Memory move operations are not supported for partitions using shared memory.
--entitled
The quantity of I/O entitled memory to add or remove. The quantity specified must be in
megabytes and must be greater than 0, or quantity can be auto. If quantity is a number, then automatic I/O entitled memory management will no longer be provided for the partition after the quantity of I/O entitled memory is added or removed. If quantity is auto, then the partition will be set
to have automatic I/O entitled memory management, and if necessary, I/O entitled memory will be
added or removed at this time so that the partition has the amount of memory required with automatic I/O entitled memory management.
This option is only valid for partitions using shared memory.
--procs When adding or removing processing resources to or from a partition using dedicated processors,
or when moving processing resources from a partition using dedicated processors to another partition using dedicated processors, use this option to specify the quantity of dedicated processors to
add, remove, or move.
When adding or removing processing resources to or from a partition using shared processors, or
when moving processing resources from a partition using shared processors to another partition
using shared processors, use this option to specify the quantity of virtual processors to add,
remove, or move.
When moving processing resources from a partition using dedicated processors to a partition using
shared processors, use this option to specify the quantity of dedicated processors to be moved from
the source partition and added as shared processors to the target partition.
This option is not valid when moving processing resources from a partition using shared processors to a partition using dedicated processors. The --procunits option must be used instead.
The quantity of processing resources specified with this option must be a whole number greater
than 0.
--procunits
When adding or removing processing resources to or from a partition using shared processors, or
when moving processing resources from a partition using shared processors to another partition
using shared processors, use this option to specify the quantity of processing units to add, remove,
or move.
When moving processing resources from a partition using shared processors to a partition using
dedicated processors, use this option to specify the quantity of shared processors to be moved from
the source partition and added as dedicated processors to the target partition.
This option is not valid when moving processing resources from a partition using dedicated processors to a partition using shared processors. The --procs option must be used instead.
When moving processing resources from a partition using shared processors to a partition using
dedicated processors, the quantity of processing units specified with this option must be a whole
number. Otherwise, the quantity of processing units specified with this option can have up to 2
decimal places. In either case, the quantity specified must be greater than 0.
--5250cpwpercent
The percentage of 5250 Commercial Processing Workload (CPW) to add, remove, or move. The
percentage specified can have up to 2 decimal places, and it must be greater than 0.
This option is only valid for IBM i partitions and can only be used when the managed-system
Linux
November 2012
6
supports the assignment of 5250 CPW percentages to partitions.
--physport
The ID of the HEA physical port. This option is required when adding an HEA logical port to a
partition. This option is also required when setting HEA physical port attributes. This option is
not valid for any other operation.
-g
The HEA port group. This option is required for all HEA operations, and is not valid for any other
operation.
--logport
The ID of the HEA logical port to add, remove, or move.
This option is required for an HEA add, remove, or move operation. This option is not valid for
any other operation.
--vswitch
The virtual switch name.
This option is required for all virtual switch operations. This option is not valid for any other operation.
--device
The name of the device to add or remove.
This option is required when adding or removing a device in the shared memory pool or the
reserved storage device pool. This option is not valid for any other operation.
--manual
When adding a device to the reserved storage device pool, specify this option to indicate that the
device will only be available for manual assignment to partitions by the user. A reserved storage
device that is added to the pool as a manual device cannot be automatically assigned to a partition
by the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
If this option is not specified when adding a device to the reserved storage device pool, the device
will only be available for automatic assignment to partitions by the HMC.
This option is only valid when adding a device to the reserved storage device pool.
-w
The elapsed time, in minutes, after which an operation will be stopped.
wait-time must be a whole number. If wait-time is 0, the operation will not be timed out.
If this option is not specified, a default value of 5 minutes is used.
This option is valid for all add, remove, and move operations for AIX, Linux, and VIOS partitions.
In addition, this option is valid for I/O entitled memory statistics reset operations and memory set
operations for AIX and Linux partitions. This option is also valid for memory add, remove, and
move operations for IBM i partitions, and when changing the additional VLAN IDs for a virtual
ethernet adapter assigned to a VIOS partition.
-d
The level of detail to be displayed upon return of an operation. Valid values are 0 (none) through 5
(highest).
If this option is not specified, a default value of 0 is used.
This option is valid for all add, remove, and move operations for AIX, Linux, and VIOS partitions.
In addition, this option is valid for I/O entitled memory statistics reset operations and memory set
operations for AIX and Linux partitions. This option is also valid when changing the additional
Linux
November 2012
7
VLAN IDs for a virtual ethernet adapter assigned to a VIOS partition.
--force This option allows you to force a remove or move operation to be performed for a physical I/O slot
that is currently in use (varied on) by an IBM i partition.
This option also allows you to force an add, remove, move, or memory set operation to be performed for an AIX, Linux, or VIOS partition that does not have an RMC connection to the HMC.
If this command completes successfully, you will need to restart your operating system for the
change to take affect. You should only use this option if you intentionally configured your LAN to
isolate the HMC from the operating system of your partition.
This option also allows you to force the additional VLAN IDs for a virtual ethernet adapter to be
changed for a VIOS partition that does not have an RMC connection to the HMC.
-a
The configuration data needed to create or change virtual I/O adapters, the shared memory pool,
the reserved storage device pool, or to set hardware resource related attributes. The configuration
data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format.
The configuration data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the configuration data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
If ’+=’ is used in the attribute name/value pair instead of ’=’, then the specified value is added to
the existing value for the attribute if the attribute is numerical. If the attribute is a list, then the
specified value(s) is added to the existing list.
If ’-=’ is used in the attribute name/value pair instead of ’=’, then the specified value is subtracted
from the existing value for the attribute if the attribute is numerical. If the attribute is a list, then
the specified value(s) is deleted from the existing list.
Valid attribute names for attributes that can be set when adding, removing, or moving a physical
I/O slot:
slot_io_pool_id
Valid attribute names for setting I/O pool attributes:
lpar_io_pool_ids
comma separated
Valid attribute names for setting tagged I/O resources (IBM i partitions only):
load_source_slot
DRC index of I/O slot or virtual slot number
alt_restart_device_slot
DRC index of I/O slot, DRC index of HEA logical
port, or virtual slot number
console_slot
DRC index of I/O slot, DRC index of HEA logical
port, virtual slot number, or the value hmc
Linux
November 2012
8
alt_console_slot
DRC index of I/O slot
op_console_slot
DRC index of I/O slot
Valid attribute names for adding a virtual ethernet adapter:
ieee_virtual_eth
Valid values:
0 - not IEEE 802.1Q compatible
1 - IEEE 802.1Q compatible
Required
port_vlan_id
Required
addl_vlan_ids
is_trunk
Valid values:
0 - no
1 - yes
trunk_priority
Valid values are integers between 1
and 15, inclusive
Required for a trunk adapter
vswitch
mac_addr
12 hexadecimal characters
If not specified, a unique MAC address will be
automatically generated for the adapter. It is
highly recommended that you use an automatically
generated MAC address.
allowed_os_mac_addrs
1 to 4 comma separated MAC addresses, each specified
as 12 hexadecimal characters. Other valid values:
all - all OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
none - no OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
qos_priority
Valid values are none and integers between 0 and 7,
inclusive
Valid attribute names for adding a virtual fibre channel adapter:
adapter_type
Valid values are client or server
Required
remote_lpar_id | remote_lpar_name
One of these attributes is required
remote_slot_num
Required
wwpns
Optional for a client adapter, and not valid for
a server adapter. If this attribute is not
specified, WWPNs will be automatically generated for
a client adapter. It is highly recommended that
you do not specify WWPNs so that they will be
automatically generated. If you do specify WWPNs,
you must specify exactly two, and they must be comma
Linux
November 2012
9
separated.
Valid attribute names for adding a virtual SCSI adapter:
adapter_type
Valid values are client or server
Required
remote_lpar_id | remote_lpar_name
One of these attributes is required for a
client adapter
remote_slot_num
Required for a client adapter
Valid attribute names for adding a virtual serial adapter:
adapter_type
Valid values are client or server
Required
remote_lpar_id | remote_lpar_name
One of these attributes is required for a
client adapter
remote_slot_num
Required for a client adapter
supports_hmc
The only valid value is 0 for no.
Valid attribute names for changing a virtual ethernet adapter assigned to a running partition:
ieee_virtual_eth
Valid values:
0 - not IEEE 802.1Q compatible
1 - IEEE 802.1Q compatible
addl_vlan_ids
qos_priority
Valid values are none and integers between 0 and 7,
inclusive
Valid attribute names for setting virtual ethernet attributes for the managed-system:
mac_prefix
Valid attribute names for setting HSL OptiConnect attributes (IBM i partitions only):
hsl_pool_id
Valid values are:
0 - HSL OptiConnect is disabled
1 - HSL OptiConnect is enabled
Valid attribute names for setting virtual OptiConnect attributes (IBM i partitions only):
virtual_opti_pool_id
Valid values are:
0 - virtual OptiConnect is disabled
1 - virtual OptiConnect is enabled
Valid attribute names for setting virtual switch attributes:
new_name
Valid attribute names for setting memory attributes for the managed-system:
requested_num_sys_huge_pages
Linux
November 2012
10
mem_mirroring_mode
Valid values are:
none
- disable memory mirroring
sys_firmware_only - enable memory mirroring for system
firmware memory only
Valid attribute names for setting memory attributes for a partition:
mem_weight
mem_expansion
Valid values are from 1.00 to 10.00
hardware_mem_encryption
Valid values are:
0 - disable hardware-accelerated encryption
1 - enable hardware-accelerated encryption
hardware_mem_expansion
Valid values are:
0 - disable hardware-accelerated Active Memory
Expansion
1 - enable hardware-accelerated Active Memory
Expansion
Valid attribute names for creating the shared memory pool or setting shared memory pool
attributes:
pool_mem
megabytes
max_pool_mem
megabytes
paging_vios_names | paging_vios_ids
specify one or two VIOS partitions
mem_dedup
Valid values are:
0 - disable Active Memory Deduplication
1 - enable Active Memory Deduplication
dedup_table_ratio
Ratio of the deduplication table size to the maximum
memory for the pool. Valid values are displayed
by the lshwres -r mem -m managed-system --level sys
-F possible_dedup_table_ratios command.
Valid attribute names for creating the reserved storage device pool or setting reserved storage
device pool attributes:
vios_names | vios_ids
specify one or two VIOS partitions
Valid attribute names for setting processing attributes for the managed-system:
max_curr_procs_per_lpar
The valid values for the managed-system are returned
by the lshwres -r proc --level sys -m managed-system
-F possible_max_curr_procs_per_lpar command.
Valid attribute names for setting processing attributes for a partition:
sharing_mode
Valid values for partitions using
dedicated processors are:
Linux
November 2012
11
keep_idle_procs - never share
processors
share_idle_procs - share processors only
when partition is inactive
share_idle_procs_active - share
processors only when partition
is active
share_idle_procs_always - always share
processors
Valid values for partitions using shared
processors are:
cap - capped
uncap - uncapped
uncap_weight
Valid attribute names for setting shared processor pool attributes:
new_name
max_pool_proc_units
reserved_pool_proc_units
Valid attribute names for setting shared processor pool attributes for a partition:
shared_proc_pool_name | shared_proc_pool_id
Valid attribute names when adding an HEA logical port:
vlan_id_list
comma separated
lhea_capabilities
Comma separated list of Logical Host
Ethernet adapter (LHEA) capabilities,
with each capability having one of the
following formats:
capability
or
5/ieq/nieq/qp/cq/mr
where ieq (interruptible event queues),
nieq (non-interruptible event queues),
qp (queue pairs), cq (completion
queues), and mr (memory regions) each
specify the resource amount in addition
to the base minimum.
Valid values for capability:
0 - base minimum
1 - low
2 - medium
3 - high
4 - dedicated
For example:
Linux
November 2012
12
5/22/128/1021/1019/63424
allowed_os_mac_addrs
1 to 4 comma separated MAC addresses, each specified
as 12 hexadecimal characters. Other valid values:
all - all OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
none - no OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
Valid attribute names for setting HEA physical port attributes:
conn_speed
Valid values are:
auto - system selects automatically
10 - 10 Mbps
100 - 100 Mbps
1000 - 1 Gbps
10000 - 10 Gbps
duplex
Valid values are:
auto - system selects automatically
full - full duplex
max_recv_packet_size
Valid values are:
1500 - 1500 bytes per frame (non-jumbo)
9000 - 9000 bytes per frame (jumbo)
flow_control
Valid values are:
0 - disable flow control
1 - enable flow control
promisc_lpar_name | promisc_lpar_id
Valid attribute names for setting HEA port group attributes:
pend_port_group_mcs_value
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Add the I/O slot with DRC index 21010001 to partition p1 and set the I/O pool ID for the slot to 3:
chhwres -r io -m sys1 -o a -p p1 -l 21010001
-a "slot_io_pool_id=3"
Add I/O pools 2 and 3 to the I/O pools in which partition p1 is participating:
chhwres -r io --rsubtype iopool -m 9406-520*1234321A -o s
-p p1 -a ""lpar_io_pool_ids+=2,3""
Clear the physical I/O slot with DRC index 21010207 after the physical I/O adapter in that slot was concurrently removed but not replaced:
chhwres -r io -m sys1 -o c -l 21010207
Add a virtual ethernet adapter to the partition with ID 3:
chhwres -r virtualio -m 9406-520*1234321A -o a --id 3
--rsubtype eth -a "ieee_virtual_eth=1,
port_vlan_id=4,"addl_vlan_ids=5,6",is_trunk=1,
Linux
November 2012
13
trunk_priority=1"
Add a virtual fibre channel client adapter to the partition p1:
chhwres -r virtualio -m sys1 -o a -p p1 --rsubtype fc
-a "adapter_type=client,remote_lpar_name=vios,remote_slot_num=16"
Remove the virtual adapter in slot 3 from partition p1:
chhwres -r virtualio -m sys1 -o r -p p1 -s 3
Add an addtional VLAN ID to the virtual ethernet adapter in slot 4 of the partition AIX:
chhwres -r virtualio -m sys1 -o s --rsubtype eth -p AIX -s 4
-a "addl_vlan_ids+=5"
Enable HSL OptiConnect for the IBM i partition i_p1:
chhwres -r virtualio -m sys1 -o s -p i_p1
--rsubtype hsl -a "hsl_pool_id=1"
Add the virtual switch vs1:
chhwres -r virtualio --rsubtype vswitch -m sys1 -o a --vswitch vs1
Add 128 MB of memory to the partition with ID 1, and time out after 10 minutes:
chhwres -r mem -m sys1 -o a --id 1 -q 128 -w 10
Remove 512 MB of memory from the AIX partition aix_p1 and return a detail level of 5:
chhwres -r mem -m 9406-520*1234321A -o r -p aix_p1 -q 512
-d 5
Remove 128 MB of logical memory and 100 MB of I/O entitled memory from the partition smp1:
chhwres -r mem -m sys1 -o r -p smp1 -q 128 --entitled 100
Set the partition smp1 to automatic I/O entitled memory management mode:
chhwres -r mem -m sys1 -o a -p smp1 --entitled auto
Reset I/O entitled memory statistics for partition smp1:
chhwres -r mem -m sys1 -o rs -p smp1
Create the shared memory pool with redundant VIOS partitions (on a managed system that supports partition suspend and resume operations, this command also creates the reserved storage device pool if it does
not already exist):
chhwres -r mempool -m sys1 -o a -a "pool_mem=4096,max_pool_mem=
8192,"paging_vios_names=vios_p1,vios_p2""
Increase the size of the shared memory pool by 256 MB:
Linux
November 2012
14
chhwres -r mempool -m sys1 -o s -a "pool_mem+=256"
Add the device hdisk1 on VIOS partition vios_p1 to the shared memory pool (on a managed system that
supports partition suspend and resume operations, this command adds the device to the reserved storage
device pool):
chhwres -r mempool -m sys1 --rsubtype pgdev -o a -p vios_p1
--device hdisk1
Create the reserved storage device pool with a single VIOS partition:
chhwres -r rspool -m sys1 -o a -a "vios_names=vios_p2"
Add the VIOS partition with ID 1 to the reserved storage device pool:
chhwres -r rspool -m sys1 -o s -a "vios_ids+=1"
Remove the device hdisk1 on VIOS partition vios_p1 from the reserved storage device pool:
chhwres -r rspool -m sys1 --rsubtype rsdev -o r -p vios_p1
--device hdisk1
Switch over the running shared memory partition smp1 to its redundant paging VIOS partition:
chhwres -r mem -m sys1 -p smp1 -o so
Set the number of pages of huge page memory requested for the managed system to 2 (the managed system
must be powered off):
chhwres -r mem -m sys1 -o s -a "requested_num_sys_huge_pages=2"
Move 1 processor from partition p1 to partition p2 (both partitions are using dedicated processors):
chhwres -r proc -m 9406-520*1234321A -o m -p p1 -t p2
--procs 1
Move .5 processing units from the partition with ID 1 to the partition with ID 2 (both partitions are using
shared processors):
chhwres -r proc -m sys1 -o m --id 1 --tid 2 --procunits .5
Add .25 processing units to the IBM i partition i_p1 and add 10 percent 5250 CPW:
chhwres -r proc -m sys1 -o a -p i_p1 --procunits .25
--5250cpwpercent 10
Configure the shared processor pool with ID 1:
chhwres -r procpool -m sys1 -o s --poolid 1 -a "new_name=
pool1,max_pool_proc_units=2,reserved_pool_proc_units=.5"
Move the partition sharedlpar1 to shared processor pool pool1:
chhwres -r procpool -m sys1 -o s -p sharedlpar1
Linux
November 2012
15
-a "shared_proc_pool_name=pool1"
Add logical port 4 for physical port 0 belonging to port group 2 of the HEA with an adapter ID of
23000020 to partition p1. Also set the LHEA capabilty level to low:
chhwres -r hea -m mySystem -o a -p p1 -l 23000020
--physport 0 -g 2 --logport 4 -a "lhea_capabilities=1"
Remove logical port 1 belonging to port group 2 of the HEA with an adapter ID of 23000020 from the partition with ID 8:
chhwres -r hea -m 9117-MMA*123432C -o r --id 8 -l 23000020
-g 2 --logport 1
Set physical port attributes for port group 2 of physical port 1 of the HEA with an adapter ID of 23000020:
chhwres -r hea -m mySystem -o s -l 23000020 -g 2
--physport 1 -a "conn_speed=auto,duplex=auto,
flow_control=1"
Set port group attributes for port group 1 of the HEA with an adapter ID of 23000030:
chhwres -r hea -m sys1 -o s -l 23000030 -g 1
-a "pend_port_group_mcs_value=4"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshwres, rsthwres, chsyscfg, lssyscfg
Linux
November 2012
16
NAME
chipsec - change IPsec configuration
SYNOPSIS
To create and start an IPsec connection to a managed system:
chipsec -m managed-system --left IPv6-address --passkey passphrase
To create and start a user-defined IPsec connection:
chipsec -f connection-file --passkey passphrase
[--cert certificate-file]
To start, stop, or remove an IPsec connection:
chipsec {--up connection-name | --down connection-name |
-r connection-name}
To start or stop the IPsec service on the Hardware Management Console:
chipsec {--start | --stop}
DESCRIPTION
chipsec changes the Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) configuration on the Hardware Management Console (HMC). It can also be used to manage IPsec connections and the IPsec service.
An IPsec connection is automatically started when it is created. The IPsec service is automatically started
when the first IPsec connection is created.
The HMC uses the strongSwan IPsec implementation.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system to which to create an IPsec connection. The name may either be
the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
--left
The HMC IPv6 address to be used for the IPsec connection to the managed-system.
--passkey
The passphrase.
-f
The name of the file that contains the configuration information for the user-defined IPsec connection to be created. The configuration information in the file must be the conn section for the
ipsec.conf file. The file can contain the configuration information for one connection only.
If the file is on removable media, the media must be present in the removable media device and the
device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued. The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
--cert
The name of the file that contains the certificate for the user-defined IPsec connection to be created. The file name must end with the .pem suffix.
If the file is on removable media, the media must be present in the removable media device and the
device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued. The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
--up
Specify this option to start the IPsec connection connection-name. If the IPsec service is not running, it will be started.
An IPsec connection is automatically started when it is created.
Linux
May 2011
1
--down Specify this option to stop the IPsec connection connection-name. If no other IPsec connections
are active, the IPsec service will be stopped.
-r
Specify this option to remove the IPsec connection connection-name.
An active IPsec connection is stopped before it is removed.
--start Specify this option to start the IPsec service on the HMC.
The IPsec service is automatically started when the first IPsec connection is created or started.
--stop
Specify this option to stop the IPsec service on the HMC.
The IPsec service is automatically stopped when the last IPsec connection is removed or stopped.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Create and start an IPsec connection to managed system j21:
chipsec -m j21 --left fe80:0:0:0:221:5eff:fe46:57ce
--passkey hmctest1234!
Create and start a user-defined IPsec connection:
chipsec -f connfile.txt --passkey passphrase1
Create and start a user-defined IPsec connection with certificate. Both files are on a USB flash memory
device (the USB flash memory device must already be connected to the HMC):
lsmediadev (to obtain mount points)
mount /media/sdb1
chipsec -f /media/sdb1/user_file.txt --cert /media/sdb1/user_cert.pem
--passkey hmctest1234!
Start the IPsec connection j21:
chipsec --up j21
Stop the IPsec connection j21:
chipsec --down j21
Remove the IPsec connection j21:
chipsec -r j21
Start the IPsec service on the HMC:
chipsec --start
Stop the IPsec service on the HMC:
chipsec --stop
Linux
May 2011
2
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsipsec, lsmediadev
Linux
May 2011
3
NAME
chkmedia - check media readiness
SYNOPSIS
chkmedia -r {dvd | diskette | usbdiskette | usbflashmem}
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
chkmedia allows a user to test for media readiness on the Hardware Management Console (HMC). The
media devices that can be tested for readiness are the DVD drive (DVD-RAM media only), the internal
diskette drive, a USB diskette drive, and a USB flash memory device. In order to test for media readiness
the media device is mounted, then a small amount of data is written to, read from, then deleted from the
specified media. Finally, the media device is unmounted. No other diagnostic actions are performed on the
media or the media device. The media device cannot already be mounted when this command is run.
OPTIONS
-r
The media device to be tested for readiness. Valid values are dvd for the internal DVD drive,
diskette for the internal diskette drive, usbdiskette for an external diskette drive connected to the
HMC with a USB cable, or usbflashmem for a flash memory device that is connected to a USB
port on the HMC.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Check the DVD drive for media readiness:
chkmedia -r dvd
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
November 2008
1
NAME
chled - change LED
SYNOPSIS
chled -r sa -t {phys | virtuallpar | virtualsys}
-m managed-system -o {on | off}
[{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chled changes the state of an LED on the managed-system.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of LED resource to change. The only valid value is sa for System Attention (SA) LED.
-t
The type of System Attention (SA) LED to change. Valid values are phys for the physical SA
LED for the managed-system, virtuallpar for a virtual partition SA LED, or virtualsys for the virtual SA LED for the managed-system.
-m
The name of the managed system on which to change the LED. The name may either be the userdefined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-o
The operation to perform on the LED. Valid values are on to activate the LED, and off to deactivate the LED.
The value on is not valid when changing the physical SA LED for the managed-system.
-p
The name of the partition for which the virtual partition SA LED is to be changed.
To change a virtual partition SA LED, you must either use this option to specify the name of the
partition for which the LED is to be changed, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID.
The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
This option is not valid when changing the physical SA LED or the virtual SA LED for the managed-system.
--id
The ID of the partition for which the virtual partition SA LED is to be changed.
To change a virtual partition SA LED, you must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition for which the LED is to be changed, or use the -p option to specify the partition’s name.
The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
This option is not valid when changing the physical SA LED or the virtual SA LED for the managed-system.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Deactivate the physical SA LED for the system:
chled -m 9406-570*100103C -r sa -t phys -o off
Activate the virtual partition SA LED for partition lpar3:
chled -m system1 -r sa -t virtuallpar -o on -p lpar3
Deactivate the virtual partition SA LED for the partition with ID 3:
Linux
May 2004
1
chled -m system1 -r sa -t virtuallpar -o off --id 3
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsled
Linux
May 2004
2
NAME
chlparstate - change partition state
SYNOPSIS
To suspend a partition or validate to suspend a partition:
chlparstate -m managed-system -o {suspend | validate} [-t suspend]
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[{-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"}]
[--protectstorage {1 | 2}]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [-v]
To resume a partition or validate to resume a partition:
chlparstate -m managed-system -o {resume | validate} [-t resume]
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[--mpio {1 | 2}] [--vlanbridge {1 | 2}]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [-v]
To cancel a partition suspend or resume operation:
chlparstate -m managed-system -o cancel -t {suspend | resume}
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level]
To recover a partition suspend or resume operation:
chlparstate -m managed-system -o recover -t {suspend | resume}
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [-v]
[--force]
To shut down a suspended partition:
chlparstate -m managed-system -o shutdown
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[--mpio {1 | 2}] [--vlanbridge {1 | 2}]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [-v]
[--immed] [--force]
To shut down or restart a partition that is not suspended:
chlparstate -m managed-system -o shutdown
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[--immed] [--restart] [--force]
DESCRIPTION
chlparstate changes the state of a partition on the managed-system.
chlparstate is used to perform partition suspend and resume operations. Partition suspend and resume
operations can be performed for AIX, Linux, and IBM i partitions.
See the chsysstate command for additional partition state change operations.
chlparstate can also be used to perform partition shutdown operations. Either chlparstate or chsysstate
can be used to shut down a partition that is not suspended.
The recommended procedure for shutting down a suspended partition is to resume the partition first, then
shut it down. However, if you want to shut down a partition while it is suspended, then it is recommended
that chlparstate, not chsysstate, be used to shut down the partition because chlparstate supports additional
options that chsysstate does not.
Linux
May 2012
1
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are suspend to validate then suspend a partition if validation succeeds, resume to validate then resume a suspended partition if validation succeeds, validate to validate a partition suspend or resume operation, cancel to stop a partition suspend or
resume operation, recover to recover from a failed partition suspend or resume operation, and
shutdown to shut down a partition.
-t
To validate, cancel, or recover a partition suspend operation, specify suspend with this option.
To validate, cancel, or recover a partition resume operation, specify resume with this option.
-m
The name of the managed system on which to perform the partition state change operation. The
name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form ttttmmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number
of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed
systems with the same user-defined name.
-p
The name of the partition for which to perform the operation.
You must either use this option to specify the name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to perform the operation.
You must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the
partition’s name. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
-f
The name of the file containing the input data for this command. The data consists of attribute
name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format.
The format of the data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Valid attribute names for this command:
primary_rs_vios_name | primary_rs_vios_id
secondary_rs_vios_name | secondary_rs_vios_id
primary_vios_name | primary_vios_id
These attributes are deprecated. Use the
primary_rs_vios_name | primary_rs_vios_id
attributes instead.
secondary_vios_name | secondary_vios_id
These attributes are deprecated. Use the
secondary_rs_vios_name | secondary_rs_vios_id
attributes instead.
Input data for this command can be specified with this option or the -i option. The -f and the -i
options are mutually exclusive.
Input data can be specified when suspending a partition or validating a partition suspend operation
only.
-i
This option allows you to enter input data on the command line, instead of using a file. Data
entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be enclosed
in double quotes.
Input data for this command can be specified with this option or the -f option. The -i and the -f
options are mutually exclusive.
Linux
May 2012
2
Input data can be specified when suspending a partition or validating a partition suspend operation
only.
--protectstorage
When suspending a partition or validating a partition suspend operation, use this option to specify
whether the partition’s virtual storage devices are required to be protected to prevent accidental
reassignment of the devices while the partition is suspended. To protect a suspended partition’s
virtual storage devices, all Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partitions hosting the devices must be capable of reporting virtual storage device usage of suspended partitions (VIOS version 2.2.1.4 or
later).
Valid values for this option are 1 if the partition’s virtual storage devices are required to be protected while the partition is suspended, or 2 if the partition’s virtual storage devices are not
required to be protected while the partition is suspended, but should be protected if possible. If
this option is not specified, this option defaults to the value 1.
If this option has a value of 1 and not all of the VIOS partitions hosting the partition’s virtual storage devices are capable of reporting virtual storage device usage of suspended partitions, an error
will occur and the operation will fail since not all of the partition’s virtual storage devices can be
protected. The operation can succeed if this option has a value of 2, but you would be responsible
for ensuring the integrity of the partition’s virtual storage devices while the partition is suspended.
This option is valid when suspending a partition or validating a partition suspend operation only.
--mpio When resuming a partition, validating a partition resume operation, or shutting down a suspended
partition, use this option to specify whether the management console is required to maintain an
equivalent multipath I/O (MPIO) configuration of the partition’s virtual SCSI and virtual fibre
channel adapters. Valid values are 1 if the management console is required to maintain an equivalent MPIO configuration, or 2 if the management console is not required to maintain an equivalent MPIO configuration, but should do so if possible. If this option is not specified, then this
option defaults to the value 1.
If this option has a value of 1 and the management console cannot guarantee that an equivalent
MPIO configuration of all of the partition’s virtual SCSI and virtual fibre channel adapters can be
maintained, then an error will occur and the operation will fail.
This option is valid when resuming a partition, validating a partition resume operation, or shutting
down a suspended partition only.
--vlanbridge
When resuming a partition, validating a partition resume operation, or shutting down a suspended
partition, use this option to specify whether each of the partition’s virtual ethernet adapters is
required to be configured so that it is bridged on the same VLAN to an external network. Valid
values are 1 if the partition’s virtual ethernet adapters are required to be bridged, or 2 if the partition’s virtual ethernet adapters are not required to be bridged, but should be bridged if possible. If
this option is not specified, then this option defaults to the value 1.
If this option has a value of 1 and the management console cannot guarantee that all of the partition’s virtual ethernet adapters can be bridged, then an error will occur and the operation will fail.
This option is valid when resuming a partition, validating a partition resume operation, or shutting
down a suspended partition only.
-w
Linux
The maximum time, in minutes, to wait for operating system commands issued by the management console during the partition state change operation to complete. If an operating system command does not complete within the time specified, the partition state change operation will be
stopped.
May 2012
3
wait-time must be a whole number. If wait-time is 0, the partition state change operation will not
be timed out.
If this option is not specified, a default value of 3 minutes is used.
-d
The level of detail requested from operating system commands issued by the management console
during the partition state change operation. Valid values are 0 (none) through 5 (highest).
If this option is not specified, a default value of 1 is used.
-v
Specify this option to enable verbose mode for the partition state change operation. When verbose
mode is enabled, detail messages and warning messages are displayed for a successful partition
state change operation. Detail messages and warning messages are always displayed for a partition state change operation that fails, regardless of whether this option is specified.
This option can be specified for a partition suspend, resume, or recover operation. This option can
also be specified when shutting down a suspended partition.
--immed
Specify this option on a partition shutdown or restart operation to perform an immediate shutdown
or restart.
If this option is specified, but the --restart option is not, then an immediate shutdown (operator
panel function 8) is performed. If both the --immed and the --restart options are specified, an
immediate restart (operator panel function 3) is performed. If neither the --immed nor the
--restart option is specified, a delayed shutdown is performed.
When shutting down a suspended partition, this option is ignored.
--restart
Specify this option on a partition shutdown operation to restart the partition.
If this option is specified, but the --immed option is not, a dump restart operation (operator panel
function 22) is performed. If both the --immed and the --restart options are specified, an immediate restart (operator panel function 3) is performed.
This option is not valid when shutting down a suspended partition.
--force When performing a recover operation, use this option to force the recover operation to proceed
when errors are encountered.
When performing a shutdown operation for a suspended partition, use this option to immediately
power off the partition without restoring the configuration of its virtual I/O. You will not be able
to restart the partition without manually restoring the virtual I/O configuration.
You can also use this option to force a migrating partition to be shut down. Use this option carefully as manual intervention may be required to recover the failed migration after the partition is
shut down.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Suspend partition aix1:
chlparstate -m sys1 -o suspend -p aix1
Resume partition aix1:
chlparstate -m sys1 -o resume -p aix1
Linux
May 2012
4
Resume partition aix1, and do not fail if an equivalent MPIO configuration of all of the partition’s virtual
SCSI and virtual fibre channel adapters cannot be maintained:
chlparstate -m sys1 -o resume -p aix1 --mpio 2
Validate the operation to suspend the partition with ID 8:
chlparstate -m 8233-E8B*7654321 -o validate -t suspend --id 8
Stop the partition suspend opertion that is just starting for partition mylpar:
chlparstate -m systemP -o cancel -t suspend -p mylpar
Recover the failed partition resume operation for partition mylpar:
chlparstate -m systemP -o recover -t resume -p mylpar
Shut down the partition with ID 1:
chlparstate -m 9406-570*1234567 -o shutdown --id 1
Immediately restart the partition p1:
chlparstate -m sys1 -o shutdown -p p1 --immed --restart
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsysstate, lssyscfg
Linux
May 2012
5
NAME
chlparutil - change utilization data collection settings
SYNOPSIS
chlparutil -r config [-m managed-system] -s sample-rate
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
chlparutil changes the Hardware Management Console (HMC) settings for utilization data collection for
managed systems.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of utilization data collection resources to change. The only valid value is config for configuration settings.
-m
The name of the managed system for which the settings for utilization data collection are to be
changed. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the
form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the
serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name, or if the HMC does not currently have a
connection to the managed system.
If this option is not specified, then the HMC settings for utilization data collection for all of the
systems currently managed by this HMC, and for all of the systems for which utilization data has
been previously collected by this HMC will be changed. Even though utilization data collection is
enabled for a managed system, the HMC will only collect utilization data for that managed system
if the HMC currently has a connection to that managed system.
This command only changes the settings for utilization data collection for this HMC. Utilization
data collection by other HMCs for the same managed systems is not affected.
-s
The rate, in seconds, at which to sample the utilization data. Sample rates of 0, 30 (30 seconds),
60 (60 seconds), 300 (5 minutes), 1800 (30 minutes), and 3600 (1 hour) are supported. A sample
rate of 0 disables utilization data collection.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Enable the collection of utilization data with a sample rate of 1 hour for all managed systems:
chlparutil -r config -s 3600
Enable the collection of utilization data with a sample rate of 60 seconds for the managed system mySystem:
chlparutil -r config -s 60 -m mySystem
Disable the collection of utilization data for the managed system with the type, model, and serial number
9406-520*98765432:
chlparutil -r config -s 0 -m 9406-520*98765432
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
Linux
April 2008
1
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lslparutil, rmlparutil
Linux
April 2008
2
NAME
chnportlogin - N_Port log in and log out
SYNOPSIS
chnportlogin -o {login | logout} -m managed-system
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID} [-n profile-name]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [-v] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chnportlogin performs N_Port login and logout operations for virtual Fibre Channel client adapters that
are configured in a partition or a partition profile.
When performing a login operation, all inactive WWPNs will be activated, including the second WWPN in
the pair assigned to each virtual Fibre Channel client adapter. When performing a logout operation, all
WWPNs not in use will be deactivated.
To successfully log in a virtual Fibre Channel client adapter, the corresponding virtual Fibre Channel server
adapter must exist and it must be mapped.
The primary intent of the login operation is to allow the system administrator to allocate, log in and zone
WWPNs before the client partition is activated. With best practices, the WWPNs should be logged out
after they are zoned on the Storage Area Network (SAN) and before the partition is activated. If a partition
is activated with WWPNs still logged in, the WWPNs used for client access are automatically logged out so
they can be logged in by the client.
The login operation can also be used to zone the inactive WWPNs in preparation for a partition mobility
operation. If the login operation is performed when a partition is already active, only the inactive WWPNs
are activated to the "constant login" state similar to physical Fibre Channel adapters. The WWPNs that are
already in use by the virtual Fibre Channel client adapters remain in control of the virtual Fibre Channel
clients and are not under the control of this command. This means that active client virtual Fibre Channel
WWPNs do not achieve a "constant login" state similar to physical Fibre Channel adapters.
The login operation can interfere with partition mobility operations. Best practice is to perform a logout
operation for a partition before attempting to migrate the partition to another server. If a mobility operation
is attempted with WWPNs still logged in, the firmware will attempt to automatically log out the WWPNs.
However, in some cases, the logouts may not complete in time and may therefore cause the mobility operation to fail.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are login to log in the WWPNs assigned to the virtual
Fibre Channel client adapters, or logout to log out the WWPNs assigned to the virtual Fibre Channel adapters.
-m
The name of the managed system on which to perform the operation. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-p
The name of the partition for which to perform the operation.
You must either use this option to specify the name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to perform the operation.
You must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the
partition’s name. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
Linux
August 2011
1
-n
The name of the partition profile for which to perform the operation. The operation will be performed for all of the virtual Fibre Channel client adapters configured in the partition profile. If
this option is not specified, then the operation will be performed for all of the virtual Fibre Channel client adapters in the current configuration of the partition.
-w
The maximum time, in minutes, to wait for each Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) command issued by
the HMC to complete. If a VIOS command does not complete within the time specified, the login
or logout operation for the virtual Fibre Channel client adapter will be stopped.
wait-time must be a whole number. If wait-time is 0, the operation will not be timed out.
If this option is not specified, a default value of 3 minutes is used.
-d
The level of detail requested from VIOS commands issued by the HMC. Valid values are 0 (none)
through 5 (highest).
If this option is not specified, a default value of 1 is used.
-v
Specify this option to enable verbose mode. When verbose mode is enabled and this command
succeeds, all warning messages are displayed. When this command partially succeeds or fails, all
warning and error messages are displayed regardless of whether this option is specified.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXIT STATUS
This command has the following return codes:
0
Success
100
Partial success
Any other value means the command failed.
EXAMPLES
Log in all of the inactive WWPNs assigned to the virtual Fibre Channel client adapters in a partition’s current configuration:
chnportlogin -m 9117-MMB*1234567 -o login -p clientPartition
Log in all of the WWPNs assigned to the virtual Fibre Channel client adapters in a partition profile:
chnportlogin -m sys1 -o login -p clientPartition -n defaultProf
Log out all of the WWPNs assigned to the virtual Fibre Channel client adapters in a partition profile:
chnportlogin -m sys1 -o logout -p clientPartition -n defaultProf
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsnportlogin
Linux
August 2011
2
NAME
chpsm - change Power systems management console configuration
SYNOPSIS
chpsm -o s -a "attributes" [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chpsm changes Power systems management console configuration settings.
You must reboot the management console for the changes to take effect.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. The only valid value is s for a set operation.
-a
The configuration data to set. The configuration data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which
are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The configuration data must be enclosed in double
quotes.
The format of the configuration data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Valid attribute names:
lpar_rmc_comm_ifs
Comma separated list of management console network
interfaces, in priority order, to enable for partition
communication. The following special values are also
allowed:
all - enable all management console network
interfaces for partition communication
(default value)
none - disable all management console network
interfaces for partition communication
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Enable only the eth0 interface for partition communication:
chpsm -o s -a "lpar_rmc_comm_ifs=eth0"
Enable the eth0 and eth1 interfaces for partition communication, giving priority to eth0:
chpsm -o s -a ""lpar_rmc_comm_ifs=eth0,eth1""
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
Linux
May 2011
1
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lspsm
Linux
May 2011
2
NAME
chpwdpolicy - change password policies
SYNOPSIS
To activate a password policy:
chpwdpolicy -o a [-n policy-name]
To disable password policies:
chpwdpolicy -o d
To modify a password policy:
chpwdpolicy -o m {-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"}
DESCRIPTION
chpwdpolicy activates and disables password policies on the Hardware Management Console (HMC). chpwdpolicy also modifies password policies.
Password policies are enforced for locally authenticated HMC users only. All HMC user passwords that
are created or changed after a password policy is activated must conform to the activated policy.
After password policies are disabled, the only password rules that are enforced are the minimum and maximum password ages that are configured for each user.
Only user-defined password policies can be modified. The active password policy cannot be modified.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are a to activate a password policy, d to disable password
policies, and m to modify a password policy.
-n
The name of the password policy to activate. If this option is omitted, the pre-defined HMC
Medium Security Password Policy password policy will be activated.
-f
The name of the file containing the data to modify a password policy. The data consists of
attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format.
The format of the data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Valid attribute names for this command:
name
The name of the password policy to modify.
[new_name]
The new name of the password policy.
[description]
[min_pwage]
The number of days that must elapse before a password
can be changed.
[pwage]
The number of days that can elapse before a password
expires and must be changed. A value of 99999
indicates no password expiration.
[warn_pwage]
The number of days prior to password expiration when a
warning message will begin to be displayed.
[min_length]
The minimum password length.
Linux
September 2010
1
[hist_size]
The number of times a password must be changed before
a password can be reused. This value cannot exceed
50.
[min_digits]
The minimum number of digits that a password must
contain.
[min_uppercase_chars]
The minimum number of uppercase characters that a
password must contain.
[min_lowercase_chars]
The minimum number of lowercase characters that a
password must contain.
[min_special_chars]
The minimum number of special characters that a
password must contain. Special characters include
symbols, punctuation, and white space characters.
Brackets around an attribute name indicate that the attribute is optional.
Comments are allowed in the input file. Comments must begin with the ’#’ character.
The data to modify a password policy is required to be specified with this option or the -i option.
The -f and the -i options are mutually exclusive.
-i
This option allows you to enter the data to modify a password policy on the command line, instead
of using a file. Data entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file,
and must be enclosed in double quotes.
The data to modify a password policy is required to be specified with this option or the -f option.
The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Activate the password policy xyzPolicy:
chpwdpolicy -o a -n xyzPolicy
Disable password policies:
chpwdpolicy -o d
Modify the password policy xyzPolicy:
chpwdpolicy -o m -i "name=xyzPolicy,min_pwage=5,pwage=90"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lspwdpolicy, mkpwdpolicy, rmpwdpolicy
Linux
September 2010
2
NAME
chpwrmgmt - change power management settings
SYNOPSIS
chpwrmgmt -m managed-system -r sys -o {enable | disable}
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
chpwrmgmt configures the power management settings for the managed-system. Power management settings can only be configured for managed systems that are capable of POWER6 Power Management.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to configure power management settings. The name
may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-r
The type of resource for which to configure power management settings. The only valid value is
sys for managed system.
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are enable to enable the power saver mode and disable to
disable the power saver mode on the managed-system. When the power saver mode on a managed
system is enabled, the processor voltage and clock frequency are lowered to reduce the power consumption of the processors in the managed system.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Enable the power saver mode on managed system system1:
chpwrmgmt -m system1 -r sys -o enable
Disable the power saver mode on managed system 9117-MMA*1234567:
chpwrmgmt -m 9117-MMA*1234567 -r sys -o disable
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lspwrmgmt
Linux
November 2007
1
NAME
chsacfg - change Service Agent configuration
SYNOPSIS
To change customer email notification settings:
chsacfg -t email
-o {enable | disable | setsmtp | add |
remove | test}
[-a {email-address | all}]
[--events {all | callhome}]
[-h host-name [-p port-number]]
To change FTP firewall settings:
chsacfg -t ftpfirewall
[-o {add | remove}]
[-h host-name] [-p port-number]
[-u user-ID] [--passwd password]
[--passive passive-mode]
[--fwtype firewall-type] [-n name]
To change FTP offload server settings:
chsacfg -t ftpoffload
[-o {enable | disable}]
[-h host-name] [-p port-number]
[-u user-ID] [--passwd password]
[--passive passive-mode] [-d directory]
To change SNMP trap configuration:
chsacfg -t snmp
-o {add | remove}
-a {SNMP-address | all}
[--events SNMP-trap-list]
DESCRIPTION
chsacfg changes the Service Agent configuration.
OPTIONS
Linux
-t
The type of Service Agent configuration information to change. Valid values are email for customer email notification settings, ftpfirewall for FTP firewall settings, ftpoffload for FTP offload
server settings, and snmp for SNMP trap configuration.
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are:
enable - enable customer email notification
or FTP offload of service information
disable - disable customer email notification
or FTP offload of service information
setsmtp - set the SMTP server information for
customer notification email
add - add a notification email address,
add a name to the exclusion list for
the FTP firewall server, or add an
address for SNMP trap notifications
remove - remove a notification email address,
remove a name from the exclusion list
list for the FTP firewall server, or
remove an address from the SNMP trap
notification list
November 2006
1
test
-a
- send a test email to a notification
email address
The email address to add, remove, or test for customer notification email or the SNMP address to
add or remove for SNMP trap notifications. SNMP addresses are specified in the form [email protected]
When performing a remove or test operation for a customer notification email address, all can be
specified with this option instead of a specific email address. If all is specified, then the remove or
test operation will be performed for all notification email addresses.
When performing a remove operation for an SNMP address, all can be specified with this option
instead of a specific SNMP address. If all is specified, then the remove operation will be performed for all SNMP trap notification addresses.
This option is required when adding, removing, or testing a customer notification email address or
when adding or removing an SNMP trap notification address. This option is not valid for any
other operation.
--events
When adding a customer email notification address, specify the type of problem events for which
the email address is to be notified. Valid values are all for all problem events, and callhome for
only call home problem events. If this option is not specified, then the email address will be notified for all problem events.
When adding an address for SNMP trap notifications, specify the list of SNMP traps for which the
SNMP address is to be notified. If there is more than one SNMP trap, the SNMP traps must be
separated by blanks. The defined SNMP traps can be listed by issuing the command lssacfg -t
snmptrapnames.
This option is only valid when adding a customer email notification address or when adding an
SNMP address for SNMP trap notifications.
-h
When enabling customer email notification or setting the SMTP server information for customer
notification email, use this option to specify the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
When changing the FTP firewall settings, use this option to specify the host name or IP address of
the firewall server.
When changing the FTP offload server settings, use this option to specify the host name or IP
address of the FTP offload server.
This option is required when setting the SMTP server information for customer notification email.
-p
When setting the SMTP server information for customer notification email, use this option to
specify the port number to use on the SMTP server. The default port number for an SMTP server
is 25.
When changing the FTP firewall settings, use this option to specify the port number to use on the
firewall server.
When changing the FTP offload server settings, use this option to specify the port number to use
on the FTP offload server.
The default port number for an FTP offload server or firewall server is 21.
Linux
November 2006
2
-u
When changing the FTP firewall settings, use this option to specify the user ID to use to log in to
the firewall server.
When changing the FTP offload server settings, use this option to specify the user ID to use to log
in to the FTP offload server.
--passwd
When changing the FTP firewall settings, use this option to specify the password to use to log in to
the firewall server. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to enter the password.
When changing the FTP offload server settings, use this option to specify the password to use to
log in to the FTP offload server. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to enter the password.
-d
The directory to use on the FTP offload server.
--passive
When changing the FTP firewall settings, use this option to specify the passive mode to use. Valid
values are on for always use PASV, off for always use PORT, and optional for try PASV then
PORT.
When changing the FTP offload server settings, use this option to specify the passive mode to use.
Valid values are on for always use PASV and off for always use PORT.
--fwtype
The FTP firewall type to use when offloading service information. Valid values are:
0 - do not use a firewall
1 - connect to firewall server, but send
"USER [email protected]"
2 - connect to firewall server, log in with
"USER fwuser" and "PASS fwpassword", and
then "USER [email protected]"
3 - connect to and log in to firewall server,
and then use "SITE real.host.name" followed
by "USER user" and "PASS password"
4 - connect to and log in to firewall server,
and then use "OPEN real.host.name" followed
by "USER user" and "PASS password"
5 - connect to firewall server, but send
"USER [email protected]@real.host.name" and
"PASS [email protected]" to log in
6 - connect to firewall server, but send
"USER [email protected]" and "PASS
fwpass" followed by "USER user" and
"PASS password" to complete the login
7 - connect to firewall server, but send
"USER [email protected] fwuser" and
"PASS pass" followed by "ACCT fwpass" to
complete the login
This option is only valid when changing the FTP firewall settings.
-n
The host name or domain name to add to or remove from the exclusion list for the firewall server.
The exclusion list is a list of domains or hosts where the firewall should not be used.
This option is required when adding or removing a name in the exclusion list for the FTP firewall
server. This option is not valid for any other operation.
Linux
November 2006
3
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Enable customer email notification for problem events:
chsacfg -t email -o enable
Set the SMTP server information for customer notification email:
chsacfg -t email -o setsmtp -h mycompany.com -p 30
Add an email address to be notified when call home problem events occur:
chsacfg -t email -o add -a [email protected]
--events callhome
Send a test email to all customer notification email addresses:
chsacfg -t email -o test -a all
Enable the use of FTP to offload service information and set the FTP server information:
chsacfg -t ftpoffload -o enable -h ftphost -u ftpuser
--passwd userpwd
Set the FTP firewall server information to be used when offloading service information:
chsacfg -t ftpfirewall --fwtype 1 -h ftpfirewall
-u ftpuser --passwd userpwd
Add a name to the exclusion list for the FTP firewall server:
chsacfg -t ftpfirewall -o add -n excludedhost
Disable the use of an FTP firewall when offloading service information:
chsacfg -t ftpfirewall --fwtype 0
Add an SNMP notification to community mySNMP at IP address target.com for SNMP traps 1, 2 and 7:
chsacfg -t snmp -o add -a [email protected]
--events Trap1 Trap2 Trap7
Remove all SNMP trap notification addresses:
chsacfg -t snmp -o remove -a all
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
November 2006
4
SEE ALSO
lssacfg
Linux
November 2006
5
NAME
chstat - change statistics collection settings
SYNOPSIS
chstat -r vlan [-m managed-system] -s sample-rate [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chstat changes the Hardware Management Console (HMC) settings for statistics collection for managed
systems.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of resources for which to change the settings for statistics collection. The only valid
value is vlan for Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) statistics.
-m
The name of the managed system for which to change the settings for statistics collection. The
name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form ttttmmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number
of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed
systems with the same user-defined name.
If this option is not specified, then the settings for statistics collection for all of the systems that
support statistics collection and are currently managed by this HMC will be changed.
This command only changes the settings for statistics collection for this HMC. Statistics collection by other HMCs for the same managed systems is not affected.
-s
The rate, in seconds, at which to sample the statistics. Sample rates of 0, 60 (1 minute), and 120
(2 minutes) are supported. A sample rate of 0 disables statistics collection.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Enable VLAN statistics collection with a sample rate of 1 minute for all managed systems that support
VLAN statistics collection:
chstat -r vlan -s 60
Enable VLAN statistics collection with a sample rate of 2 minutes for managed system mySystem:
chstat -r vlan -s 120 -m mySystem
Disable VLAN statistics collection for the managed system with the type, model, and serial number
8233-E8B*7654321:
chstat -r vlan -s 0 -m 8233-E8B*7654321
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsvc, lsstat
Linux
September 2010
1
NAME
chsvc - change a service
SYNOPSIS
To start or stop monitoring managed systems using SNMP:
chsvc -s snmp -o {start | stop} [-m managed-system] [--help]
To add or remove a network management system to or from the SNMP trap notification list:
chsvc -s snmp -o {add | remove} --ip IP-address
[--traps trap-list] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chsvc changes the configuration of a service, such as SNMP, on the Hardware Managment Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-s
The service for which to change the configuration. The only valid value is snmp for Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3.
-o
The operation to perform.
Specify start to start monitoring managed systems on the HMC using SNMP. If the SNMPv3
agent is not already running on the HMC, it will be started. In addition, Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) statistics collection for the managed systems will be enabled, and the sample rate
will be set to 1 minute. The chstat command can be used to change the sample rate.
Specify stop to stop monitoring managed systems on the HMC using SNMP. Also, VLAN statistics collection for the managed systems will be disabled. In addition, if there are no remaining
managed systems on the HMC that are being monitored, the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC will be
stopped.
Specify add to add a network management system to the SNMP trap notification list.
Specify remove to remove a network management system from the SNMP trap notification list.
-m
The name of the managed system to start or stop being monitored by the SNMPv3 agent on the
HMC. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form
tttt-mmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
If this option is not specified for a start operation, then a maximum of five of the systems currently
managed by the HMC will be monitored. If this option is not specified for a stop operation, then
monitoring for all managed systems will be stopped.
--ip
The IP address or host name of the network management system to add to or remove from the
SNMP trap notification list.
--traps A list of traps to send to the network management system. If multiple traps are specified, they
must be comma separated.
For a list of all of the traps supported by the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC, run the lssvc -s snmp -r
trapnames command.
This option is required when adding a network management system to the SNMP trap notification
list. This option is not valid otherwise.
--help
Linux
Display the help text for this command and exit.
September 2010
1
EXAMPLES
Start the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC if it is not already running, and start monitoring managed system
sys1:
chsvc -s snmp -o start -m sys1
Stop monitoring managed system sys1 and stop the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC if no other managed systems are being monitored:
chsvc -s snmp -o stop -m sys1
Stop monitoring all managed systems and stop the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC:
chsvc -s snmp -o stop
Add notification of the network management system with IP address 9.3.99.100 of the linkUp and
linkDown traps:
chsvc -s snmp -o add --ip 9.3.99.100 --traps linkUp,linkDown
Remove notification of the network management system with IP address 9.3.99.100:
chsvc -s snmp -o remove --ip 9.3.99.100
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chstat, lsstat, lssvc
Linux
September 2010
2
NAME
chsvcevent - updates serviceable events on the HMC
SYNOPSIS
chsvcevent -o {close | closeall}
[-p problem-number -h analyzing-HMC] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chsvcevent closes serviceable events on the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are close to close the serviceable event specified using the
-p and -h options, and closeall to close all serviceable events on this HMC.
-p
The problem number of the serviceable event to close. This option is required when closing a single serviceable event. This option is not allowed when closing all serviceable events.
The problem number can be obtained using the lssvcevents command.
-h
The analyzing HMC for the serviceable event to close. This option is required when closing a single serviceable event. This option is not allowed when closing all serviceable events.
The analyzing HMC can be obtained using the lssvcevents command.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
To close the serviceable event with problem number 1048 and analyzing HMC 7315-C02/KLRMT0L:
chsvcevent -p 1048 -h 7315-C02/KLRMT0L -o close
To close all serviceable events on this HMC:
chsvcevent -o closeall
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lssvcevents
Linux
June 2007
1
NAME
chsyscfg - change system resources
SYNOPSIS
chsyscfg -r {lpar | prof | sys | sysprof | frame}
{-m managed-system | -e managed-frame}
{-f configuration-file | -i "configuration-data"}
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
chsyscfg changes the attributes of partitions, partition profiles, or system profiles for the managed-system.
It can also change the attributes of the managed-system.
chsyscfg can also change the attributes of the managed-frame.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of resources to change. Valid values are lpar for partitions, prof for partition profiles,
sys for the managed system, sysprof for system profiles, and frame for the managed frame.
-m
The name of either the managed system to be changed, or the managed system which has the system resources to be changed. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and
ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if
there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
This option is required when changing the attributes of partitions, partition profiles, system profiles, or the managed system. This option is not valid otherwise.
-e
The name of the managed frame to be changed. The name may either be the user-defined name
for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the type, mmm is the
model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must
be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined name.
This option is required when changing the attributes of the managed frame. This option is not
valid otherwise.
-f
The name of the file containing the configuration data needed to change the resources. The configuration data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. These attribute name/value pairs form a configuration record. A line feed marks the end of a
configuration record. The file must contain one configuration record for each resource to be
changed, and each configuration record must be for the same resource type. If the resource type is
the managed system or the managed frame, then the file must contain only one configuration
record.
The format of a configuration record is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...<LF>
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...<LF>
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
If ’+=’ is used in the attribute name/value pair instead of ’=’, then the specified value is added to
the existing value for the attribute if the attribute is numerical. If the attribute is a list, then the
Linux
November 2012
1
specified value(s) is added to the existing list.
If ’-=’ is used in the attribute name/value pair instead of ’=’, then the specified value is subtracted
from the existing value for the attribute if the attribute is numerical. If the attribute is a list, then
the specified value(s) is deleted from the existing list.
Attribute names for partitions:
name | lpar_id
name or ID of the partition to
change (required)
new_name
default_profile
ipl_source
IBM i only
Valid values are a, b, c, or d
allow_perf_collection
Valid values are:
0 - do not allow
1 - allow
This attribute replaces the
shared_proc_pool_util_auth attribute.
Setting this attribute also sets the
shared_proc_pool_util_auth attribute
to the same value.
shared_proc_pool_util_auth
Valid values are:
0 - do not allow authority
1 - allow authority
This attribute has been deprecated. Use
the allow_perf_collection attribute
instead. Setting this attribute also
sets the allow_perf_collection
attribute to the same value.
work_group_id
Specify none if you are not using
Enterprise Workload Manager (EWLM)
lpar_avail_priority
Valid values are 0 - 255.
electronic_err_reporting
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - disable
1 - enable
msp
Virtual I/O server only
Valid values are:
0 - the partition is not a mover service
partition
1 - the partition is a mover service
partition
time_ref
Valid values are:
0 - the partition is not a time reference
partition
Linux
November 2012
2
1 - the partition is a time reference
partition
suspend_capable
AIX, Linux, and IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - the partition cannot be suspended
1 - the partition can be suspended
primary_rs_vios_name | primary_rs_vios_id
Remote restart capable partitions only
secondary_rs_vios_name | secondary_rs_vios_id
Remote restart capable partitions only
To set no secondary reserved storage VIOS specify
none for secondary_rs_vios_id
rs_device_name
Remote restart capable partitions only
Name of the device on the primary reserved storage
VIOS partition
vtpm_enabled
AIX, Linux, and VIOS only
Valid values are:
0 - virtual Trusted Platform Module (vTPM) is not
enabled for this partition
1 - vTPM is enabled for this partition
os400_restricted_io_mode
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - disable IBM i restricted I/O mode
1 - enable IBM i restricted I/O mode
Attribute names for partition profiles:
name
name of the partition profile to
change (required)
lpar_name | lpar_id
name or ID of the partition for
which the profile to change is
defined (required)
new_name
min_mem
megabytes
desired_mem
megabytes
max_mem
megabytes
min_num_huge_pages
AIX and Linux only
desired_num_huge_pages
AIX and Linux only
max_num_huge_pages
AIX and Linux only
mem_mode
Valid values are:
ded - dedicated memory
shared - shared memory
Linux
November 2012
3
desired_io_entitled_mem
Specify the number of megabytes or specify auto for
automatic I/O entitled memory management mode
mem_weight
primary_paging_vios_name | primary_paging_vios_id
secondary_paging_vios_name | secondary_paging_vios_id
To set no secondary paging VIOS specify none for
secondary_paging_vios_id
mem_expansion
Valid values are:
0
- disable Active Memory Expansion
1.00-10.00 - expansion factor
hpt_ratio
Ratio of hardware page table size to the maximum
memory for the partition. Valid values are displayed
by the lshwres -r mem -m managed-system
--level sys -F possible_hpt_ratios command.
bsr_arrays
proc_mode
Valid values are:
ded - dedicated processors
shared - shared processors
min_procs
desired_procs
max_procs
min_proc_units
desired_proc_units
max_proc_units
min_5250_cpw_percent
Only valid for IBM i partitions in
managed systems that support the
assignment of 5250 CPW percentages
desired_5250_cpw_percent
Only valid for IBM i partitions in
managed systems that support the
assignment of 5250 CPW percentages
max_5250_cpw_percent
Only valid for IBM i partitions in
managed systems that support the
assignment of 5250 CPW percentages
sharing_mode
Valid values for partitions using
dedicated processors are:
keep_idle_procs - never share
processors
share_idle_procs - share processors only
when partition is inactive
share_idle_procs_active - share
processors only when partition
is active
share_idle_procs_always - always share
processors
Valid values for partitions using shared
processors are:
Linux
November 2012
4
cap - capped
uncap - uncapped
uncap_weight
shared_proc_pool_name | shared_proc_pool_id
affinity_group_id
Memory and processor affinity group in which the
partition will participate. Valid values are
none and 1 - 255.
io_slots
Comma separated list of I/O slots, with
each I/O slot having the following
format:
slot-DRC-index/[slot-IO-pool-ID]/
is-required
Both ’/’ characters must be present, but
optional values may be omitted. Optional
values are slot-IO-pool-ID.
Valid values for is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
For example:
21010003/3/1 specifies an I/O slot with a
DRC index of 21010003, it is assigned to
I/O pool 3, and it is a required slot.
lpar_io_pool_ids
comma separated
load_source_slot
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot or virtual slot number
alt_restart_device_slot
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot, DRC index of HEA logical
port, or virtual slot number
console_slot
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot, DRC index of HEA logical
port, virtual slot number, or the value hmc
alt_console_slot
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot
op_console_slot
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot
auto_start
Valid values are:
0 - off
1 - on
boot_mode
AIX, Linux, and virtual I/O server only
Valid values are:
Linux
November 2012
5
norm - normal
dd - diagnostic with default boot list
ds - diagnostic with stored boot list
of - Open Firmware OK prompt
sms - System Management Services
power_ctrl_lpar_ids | power_ctrl_lpar_names
comma separated
conn_monitoring
Valid values are:
0 - off
1 - on
hsl_pool_id
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - HSL OptiConnect is disabled
1 - HSL OptiConnect is enabled
virtual_opti_pool_id
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - virtual OptiConnect is disabled
1 - virtual OptiConnect is enabled
max_virtual_slots
virtual_eth_adapters
Comma separated list of virtual ethernet adapters,
with each adapter having the following format:
virtual-slot-number/is-IEEE/port-vlan-ID/
[additional-vlan-IDs]/[trunk-priority]/
is-required[/[virtual-switch][/[MAC-address]/
[allowed-OS-MAC-addresses]/[QoS-priority]]]
The first 5 ’/’ characters must be present. The 6th
’/’ character is optional, but it must be present if
virtual-switch or any of the values following
virtual-switch are specified. The last 3 ’/’
characters are optional, but all 3 must be present if
MAC-address, allowed-OS-MAC-addresses, or QoS-priority
is specified.
Optional values may be omitted. Optional values are
additional-vlan-IDs, trunk-priority, virtual-switch,
MAC-address, allowed-OS-MAC-addresses, and
QoS-priority.
Valid values for is-IEEE and is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
If values are specified for additional-vlan-IDs, they
must be comma separated.
Valid values for trunk-priority:
0
- this adapter is not a trunk adapter (default
value)
Linux
November 2012
6
1 - 15 - this adapter is a trunk adapter with the
specified priority
If MAC-address is not specified, a unique MAC address
will be automatically generated for the adapter. If
it is specified, it must be specified as 12
hexadecimal characters. It is highly recommended that
you do not specify MAC-address so that the MAC address
will be automatically generated.
allowed-OS-MAC-addresses can be a comma separated list
of 1 to 4 MAC addresses, where each MAC address is
specified as 12 hexadecimal characters, or it can be
one of the following values:
all - all OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
(default value)
none - no OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
Valid values for QoS-priority:
none - do not use Quality of Service (QoS) (default
value)
0 - 7 - the QoS priority level to use
For example:
13/1/5/6,7/2/1
specifies a virtual ethernet adapter with a virtual
slot number of 13, it is IEEE 802.1Q compatible, it
has a port virtual LAN ID of 5, additional virtual LAN
IDs of 6 and 7, it is a trunk adapter with a trunk
priority of 2, and it is required. It also
uses the default virtual switch, it uses an
automatically generated MAC address, it allows all OS
defined MAC addresses, and it does not use QoS.
4/1/3//0/1///fecd537a910b,fecd537a910c/2
specifies a virtual ethernet adapter with a virtual
slot number of 4, it is IEEE 802.1Q compatible, it
has a port virtual LAN ID of 3, no additional virtual
LAN IDs, it is not a trunk adapter, it is required, it
uses the default virtual switch, it uses an
automatically generated MAC address, it allows the OS
defined MAC addresses FE:CD:53:7A:91:0B and
FE:CD:53:7A:91:0C, and it uses a QoS priority level
of 2.
virtual_fc_adapters
Comma separated list of virtual fibre channel
adapters, with each adapter having the following
format:
virtual-slot-number/client-or-server/
[remote-lpar-ID]/[remote-lpar-name]/
remote-slot-number/[wwpns]/is-required
All 6 ’/’ characters must be present, but optional
Linux
November 2012
7
values may be omitted. Optional values are
remote-lpar-ID or remote-lpar-name (one of those
values is required, but not both).
wwpns is optional for a client adapter, and is not
allowed for a server adapter. If wwpns is not
specified, WWPNs will be automatically generated for a
client adapter. It is highly recommended that you do
not specify wwpns so that WWPNs will be automatically
generated, unless you are changing an existing virtual
fibre channel adapter and you want to retain its
existing WWPNs. If you do specify wwpns, you must
specify exactly two WWPNs, and they must be comma
separated.
Valid values for client-or-server:
client
server
Valid values for is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
For example:
4/client//vios_p1/16//1
specifies a virtual fibre channel client adapter
with a virtual slot number of 4, a remote (server)
partition name of vios_p1, a remote (server) slot
number of 16, and it is required. WWPNs will be
automatically generated for this client adapter.
virtual_scsi_adapters
Comma separated list of virtual SCSI
adapters, with each adapter having the
following format:
virtual-slot-number/client-or-server/
[remote-lpar-ID]/[remote-lpar-name]/
[remote-slot-number]/is-required
All 5 ’/’ characters must be present, but
optional values may be omitted. Optional
values for server adapters are
remote-lpar-ID, remote-lpar-name,
and remote-slot-number. Optional values
for client adapters are remote-lpar-ID or
remote-lpar-name (one of those values
is required, but not both).
Valid values for client-or-server:
client
server
Valid values for is-required:
0 - no
Linux
November 2012
8
1 - yes
For example:
14/client/2//13/0
specifies a virtual SCSI client adapter
with a virtual slot number of 14, a
remote (server) partition ID of 2, a
remote (server) slot number of 13, and
it is not required.
virtual_serial_adapters
Comma separated list of virtual serial
adapters, with each adapter having the
following format:
virtual-slot-number/client-or-server/
[supports-HMC]/[remote-lpar-ID]/
[remote-lpar-name]/[remote-slot-number]/
is-required
All 6 ’/’ characters must be present, but
optional values may be omitted. Optional
values for server adapters are
supports-HMC, remote-lpar-ID,
remote-lpar-name, and remote-slot-number.
Optional values for client adapters are
remote-lpar-ID or remote-lpar-name (one
of those values is required, but not
both), and the supports-HMC value is
not allowed.
Valid values for client-or-server:
client
server
Valid values for supports-HMC:
0 - no
Valid values for is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
For example:
14/server/0////0
specifies a virtual serial server adapter
with a virtual slot number of 14, it does
not support an HMC connection, any client
adapter is allowed to connect to it, and
it is not required.
hca_adapters
AIX, Linux, and virtual I/O server only
Comma separated list of Host Channel
adapters (HCA), with each adapter having
the following format:
Linux
November 2012
9
adapter-ID/GUID/capability
All 3 values must be specified for each
adapter.
Valid values for capability:
1 - low
2 - medium
3 - high
4 - dedicated
For example:
23000cff/2550000000609/3 specifies
an HCA with an adapter ID of 23000cff,
a Globally Unique ID (GUID) of
2:55:00:00:00:06:09, and a capability
setting of high.
lhea_logical_ports
Comma separated list of Logical Host Ethernet adapter
(LHEA) logical ports, with each logical port having
the following format:
adapter-ID/port-group/physical-port-ID/
logical-port-ID/[allowed-VLAN-IDs][/
allowed-OS-MAC-addresses]
The first 4 ’/’ characters must be present. The
last ’/’ character is optional, but it must be
present if allowed-OS-MAC-addresses is specified.
Optional values may be omitted. Optional values are
allowed-VLAN-IDs and allowed-OS-MAC-addresses.
If values are specified for allowed-VLAN-IDs, they
must be comma separated, or one of the following
values can be specified:
all - allowed to participate in all VLANs
none - not allowed to participate in any VLAN
(default value)
allowed-OS-MAC-addresses can be a comma separated list
of 1 to 4 MAC addresses, where each MAC address is
specified as 12 hexadecimal characters, or it can be
one of the following values:
all - all OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
(default value)
none - no OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
For example:
23000000/2/0/1/3 specifies logical port 1 for
physical port 0 belonging to port group 2 of the
Host Ethernet adapter (HEA) with an adapter ID of
23000000. This logical port is allowed to
participate in the VLAN with an ID of 3 only.
It also allows all OS defined MAC addresses.
Linux
November 2012
10
23000000/2/1/5/all/fecd537a910b,fecd537a910c
specifies logical port 5 for physical port 1
belonging to port group 2 of the HEA with an adapter
ID of 23000000. This logical port is allowed to
participate in all VLANs, and it allows the OS defined
MAC addresses FE:CD:53:7A:91:0B and FE:CD:53:7A:91:0C.
lhea_capabilities
Comma separated list of LHEA
capabilities, with each capability
having one of the following formats:
adapter-ID/capability
or
adapter-ID/5/ieq/nieq/qp/cq/mr
where ieq (interruptible event queues),
nieq (non-interruptible event queues),
qp (queue pairs), cq (completion
queues), and mr (memory regions) each
specify the resource amount in addition
to the base minimum.
Valid values for capability:
0 - base minimum
1 - low
2 - medium
3 - high
4 - dedicated
For example:
23000000/3 sets the LHEA
capability for the HEA with an adapter ID
of 23000000 to high.
sni_device_ids
AIX, Linux, and virtual I/O server only
Comma separated list of Switch Network
Interface (SNI) adapter device IDs
work_group_id
Specify none if you are not using
Enterprise Workload Manager (EWLM)
redundant_err_path_reporting
Valid values are:
0 - disable
1 - enable
electronic_err_reporting
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - disable
1 - enable
lpar_proc_compat_mode
The valid values for the managed-system are
displayed by the lssyscfg -r sys -m managed-system
Linux
November 2012
11
-F lpar_proc_compat_modes command.
Attribute names for a managed system:
new_name
power_off_policy
Valid values are:
0 - power off after all partitions are
shut down
1 - do not power off after all partitions
are shut down
service_lpar_id
Specify none to remove the service
partition assignment
service_lpar_name
power_on_lpar_start_policy
Valid values are autostart, userinit, or autorecovery.
This attribute replaces the power_on_option attribute.
Setting this attribute also sets the power_on_option
attribute to the equivalent value.
power_on_option
Valid values are autostart or standby.
This attribute has been deprecated. Use the
power_on_lpar_start_policy attribute instead. Setting
this attribute also sets the
power_on_lpar_start_policy attribute to the equivalent
value.
power_on_side
Valid values are perm or temp
power_on_speed
Valid values are slow or fast.
This attribute can be set for POWER5, POWER6, and
POWER7 (firmware level 710 only) servers only.
power_on_speed_override
Valid values are none, slow, or fast.
This attribute can be set for POWER5, POWER6, and
POWER7 (firmware level 710 only) servers only.
sp_failover_enabled
Valid values are:
0 - disable service processor failover
1 - enable service processor failover
addr_broadcast_perf_policy
Valid values are:
chip_affinity
no_affinity
node_affinity
max_lpars_per_hca
The managed system must be restarted for
this change to take effect.
hca_bandwidth_capabilities
Host Channel adapter (HCA) bandwidth capability
settings. Specify high/medium/low, where high, medium,
and low are each expressed as a percentage of the
Linux
November 2012
12
total bandwidth, or specify default to set all 3
settings to their default values.
If high/medium/low is specified, both ’/’ characters
must be present, but any setting may be omitted. A
setting that is omitted is not changed.
The default value for each setting is:
high - 25%
medium - 12.5%
low - 6.25%
New HCA bandwidth capability settings are applied
only when partitions are activated.
For example:
50/25.5/10.25 specifies a high setting of 50%, a
medium setting of 25.5%, and a low setting of 10.25%.
33.3// specifies a high setting of 33.3%, and does
not change the medium and low settings.
turbocore
Valid values are:
0 - disable TurboCore mode
1 - enable TurboCore mode
The managed system must be restarted for this change
to take effect.
sys_time
Managed system date and time in the following format:
MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss
where MM is the month, DD is the day, YYYY is the
year, hh is the hour in 24 hour format, mm is the
minute, and ss is the seconds.
This attribute can be set only when the managed system
is powered off.
Attribute names for system profiles:
name
name of the system profile to
change (required)
new_name
lpar_names | lpar_ids
comma separated
profile_names
comma separated
Attribute names for a managed frame:
new_name
frame_num
Linux
November 2012
13
The -f and the -i options are mutually exclusive.
-i
This option allows you to enter configuration data on the command line, instead of using a file.
Data entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be
enclosed in double quotes.
When this option is used, only a single resource can be changed.
The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Change the managed system’s user-defined name and power off policy:
chsyscfg -r sys -m 9406-570*89320051 -i "new_name=sys1,
power_off_policy=1"
Change partitions using the configuration data in the file /tmp/lparfile:
chsyscfg -r lpar -m sys1 -f /tmp/lparfile
Change a partition profile’s memory amounts (reduce the profile’s current memory amounts each by 256
MB), and number of desired processors:
chsyscfg -r prof -m sys1 -i "name=profile1,
lpar_name=partition3,min_mem-=256,desired_mem-=256,
max_mem-=256,desired_procs=2"
Change a system profile (add 2 new partition profiles):
chsyscfg -r sysprof -m sys1 -i "name=sysprof1,
"lpar_names+=partition3,partition4",
"profile_names+=3_prof1,4_defaultProf""
Change the managed frame’s user-defined name and frame number:
chsyscfg -r frame -e 9119-59*1234567 -i "new_name=frame1,
frame_num=1"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lssyscfg, mksyscfg, rmsyscfg, chhwres
Linux
November 2012
14
NAME
chsyspwd - change system password
SYNOPSIS
chsyspwd -t {access | admin | general}
{-m managed-system | -e managed-frame}
[--passwd current-password] [--newpasswd new-password]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
chsyspwd changes a password for the managed-system or the managed-frame.
chsyspwd can also be used to enter the current password for the managed-system or the managed-frame
when it is in Failed Authentication state.
OPTIONS
-t
The password to change. Valid values are access for the Hardware Management Console (HMC)
Access password, admin for the Advanced System Management (ASM) Administrator password,
and general for the ASM General password.
-m
The name of the managed system for which to change the password. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
The -m and the -e options are mutually exclusive.
-e
The name of the managed frame for which to change the password. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The ttttmmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined
name.
The -e and the -m options are mutually exclusive.
--passwd
The current password. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to enter the current password.
--newpasswd
The new password. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to enter the new password.
The new password must be at least 4 characters in length, and cannot be longer than 63 characters.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Change the HMC Access password for the managed system system1:
chsyspwd -m system1 -t access --passwd sys1pw --newpasswd
sys1newpw
Change the ASM Administrator password (the current and new passwords must be entered when prompted)
for the managed system 9406-520*10013CA:
chsyspwd -m 9406-520*10013CA -t admin
Change the HMC Access password for the managed frame frame1:
Linux
October 2004
1
chsyspwd -e frame1 -t access --passwd frame1pw --newpasswd
frame1newpw
Enter the current password for the managed system system1, which is in Failed Authentication state:
chsyspwd -m system1 -t access --newpasswd sys1pw
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
October 2004
2
NAME
chsysstate - change partition state or system state
SYNOPSIS
To power on a managed system:
chsysstate {-m managed-systems | --all} -r sys
-o {on | onstandby | onstartpolicy | onsysprof |
onhwdisc}
[-f system-profile-name] [-k keylock-position]
To power off a managed system:
chsysstate {-m managed-systems | --all} -r sys
-o off [--immed]
To restart a managed system:
chsysstate {-m managed-systems | --all} -r sys
-o off --immed --restart
To rebuild a managed system or a managed frame:
chsysstate {-m managed-systems | -e managed-frame | --all}
-r {sys | frame} -o rebuild
To recover partition data for a managed system:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r sys -o recover
To initiate service processor failover for a managed system:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r sys -o spfailover
To set the keylock position for a managed system or a partition:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r {sys | lpar}
-o chkey -k keylock-position
[{-n partition-name | --id partition-ID}]
To activate a partition with a profile:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r lpar -o on
{-n partition-name | --id partition-ID}
-f partition-profile-name
[-k keylock-position]
[-b boot-mode] [-i IPL-source] [--force]
To activate a partition with its current configuration:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r lpar -o on
{-n partition-names | --id partition-IDs | --all}
[-b boot-mode]
To activate and perform a network install of an IBM i partition:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r lpar -o on
{-n partition-name | --id partition-ID}
-f partition-profile-name
[-k keylock-position] [-i IPL-source]
--ip IP-address --netmask network-mask
--gateway gateway-IP-address
--serverip server-IP-address
--serverdir server-directory
[--speed {auto | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000}]
Linux
May 2012
1
[--duplex {auto | half | full}]
[--mtu {1500 | 9000}]
To shut down or restart a partition:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r lpar
-o {shutdown | osshutdown | dumprestart |
retrydump}
{-n partition-name | --id partition-ID | --all}
[--immed] [--restart]
To perform an operator panel service function on a partition:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r lpar
-o {dston | remotedstoff | remotedston |
consoleservice | iopreset | iopdump}
{-n partition-name | --id partition-ID}
To validate or activate a system profile:
chsysstate -m managed-system -r sysprof
-n system-profile-name
[-o on] [--continue] [--test]
To power off all of the unowned I/O units in a managed frame:
chsysstate -e managed-frame -r frame -o unownediooff
DESCRIPTION
chsysstate changes the state of a partition, the managed-system, or the managed-frame.
See the chlparstate command for additional partition state change operations.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system on which to perform the operation. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
When powering on managed systems (-o on or -o onstandby), powering off or restarting managed
systems (-o off), or rebuilding managed systems (-o rebuild), multiple managed system names can
be specified with this option, or the --all option can be specified to perform the operation on all
managed systems. Multiple managed system names must be comma separated.
This option is required when performing a partition or a system profile operation. When performing a managed system operation, either this option or the --all option is required. This option is
not valid for any other operations.
The -m and --all options are mutually exclusive for managed system operations.
-e
The name of the managed frame on which to perform the operation. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The ttttmmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined
name.
This option is required when performing a managed frame operation. This option is not valid otherwise.
Linux
May 2012
2
Linux
-r
The type of resource on which to perform the operation. Valid values are lpar for partition, sys for
managed system, sysprof for system profile, and frame for managed frame.
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are:
on - activates a partition or a system profile, or powers
on the managed-system. When powering on the
managed-system, partitions that are marked as auto
start are activated.
onstandby - powers on the managed-system to Standby
state.
onstartpolicy - powers on the managed-system as defined
by the next partition start policy.
onsysprof - powers on the managed-system
then activates a system profile. Only
those partitions in the system profile
are activated.
onhwdisc - powers on the managed-system and
runs the hardware discovery process. When
the hardware discovery process completes,
the managed-system will be in Operating
state, but no partitions will be
automatically started.
off - powers off the managed-system. If
the --immed option is specified, a fast
power off (operator panel function 8) is
performed, otherwise a normal power off is
performed. If both the --immed and the
--restart options are specified, a
restart (operator panel function 3) of the
managed-system is performed.
rebuild - rebuilds the managed-system or the
managed-frame.
recover - recovers partition data for the
managed-system by restoring the data
from the backup file on the HMC.
spfailover - initiates service processor
failover for the managed-system.
chkey - sets the keylock position for a
partition or the managed-system.
shutdown - shuts down a partition. If the
--immed option but not the --restart
option is specified, an immediate shutdown
(operator panel function 8) is performed.
If the --restart option but not the
--immed option is specified, a dumprestart
operation (operator panel function 22)
is performed. If both the --immed and
the --restart options are specified,
an immediate restart (operator panel
function 3) of the partition is performed.
If neither the --immed nor the --restart
option is specified, a delayed shutdown
is performed.
osshutdown - issues the operating system
"shutdown" command to shut down an AIX,
May 2012
3
Linux, or Virtual I/O Server partition.
If the --immed option is specified, the
operating system "shutdown -F" command is
issued to immediately shut down the
partition. If the --restart option
is specified, the "r" option is included
on the operating system "shutdown" command
to restart the partition.
dumprestart - initiates a dump on the partition
and restarts the partition when the dump
is complete (operator panel function 22).
retrydump - retries the dump on the partition
and restarts the partition when the dump
is complete (operator panel function 34).
This operation is valid for IBM i
partitions only.
dston - activates dedicated service tools for
the partition (operator panel function
21). This operation is valid for IBM i
partitions only.
remotedstoff - disables a remote service session
for the partition (operator panel function
65). This operation is valid for IBM i
partitions only.
remotedston - enables a remote service session
for the partition (operator panel function
66). This operation is valid for IBM i
partitions only.
consoleservice - enables console service
functions for the partition (operator
panel function 65 followed by 21). This
operation is valid for IBM i partitions
only.
iopreset - resets or reloads the failed IOP
(operator panel function 67). This
operation is valid for IBM i partitions
only.
iopdump - allows use of the IOP control storage
dump (operator panel function 70). This
operation is valid for IBM i partitions
only.
unownediooff - powers off all of the unowned
I/O units in a managed frame.
-f
When activating a partition with a profile, use this option to specify the name of the partition profile to use.
If the managed-system is in the manufacturing default configuration and this option is not specified, the partition will be activated with no configuration changes and the managed-system will
remain in the manufacturing default configuration. If the managed-system is in the manufacturing
default configuration and this option is specified, the partition will be activated with the configuration specified by partition-profile-name and the manufacturing default configuration will be permanently exited.
When powering on a managed system with a system profile, use this option to specify the name of
Linux
May 2012
4
the system profile to use. This option is required.
-k
The keylock position to set. Valid values are manual and norm for normal.
This option is required when setting the keylock position for a partition or a managed system.
This option is optional when powering on a managed system or activating a partition.
--immed
If this option is specified when powering off a managed system, a fast power off is performed.
This option must be specified when restarting a managed system.
If this option is specified when shutting down or restarting a partition, an immediate shutdown or
restart is performed.
--restart
If this option is specified, the partition or managed system will be restarted.
-n
When performing a system profile operation, use this option to specify the name of the system
profile on which to perform the operation.
When performing a partition operation, use this option to specify the name of the partition on
which to perform the operation, the --id option to specify the partition’s ID, or the --all option to
perform the operation on all partitions. The --all option is only allowed when activating partitions
with their current configurations (-o on ), or when shutting down or restarting partitions (-o shutdown, -o osshutdown, and -o dumprestart).
When activating partitions with their current configurations, multiple partition names can be specified with this option. The partition names must be comma separated.
The -n, --id, and --all options are mutually exclusive for partition operations.
--id
When performing a partition operation, use this option to specify the ID of the partition on which
to perform the operation, the -n option to specify the partition’s name, or the --all option to perform the operation on all partitions. The --all option is only allowed when activating partitions
with their current configurations (-o on ), or when shutting down or restarting partitions (-o shutdown, -o osshutdown, and -o dumprestart).
When activating partitions with their current configurations, multiple partition IDs can be specified
with this option. The partition IDs must be comma separated.
The --id, -n, and --all options are mutually exclusive for partition operations.
--all
When performing a managed system operation, specify this option to perform the operation on all
of the systems currently managed by this HMC. This option is only allowed for the following
managed system operations: power on (-o on or -o onstandby), power off or restart (-o off), or
rebuild (-o rebuild).
When performing a partition operation, specify this option to perform the operation on all of the
partitions in the managed-system. This option is only allowed for the following partition operations: activate with current configuration (-o on ), or shut down or restart (-o shutdown, -o osshutdown, and -o dumprestart).
Linux
-b
The boot mode to use when activating an AIX, Linux, or Virtual I/O Server partition. Valid values
are norm for normal, dd for diagnostic with default boot list, ds for diagnostic with stored boot
list, of for Open Firmware OK prompt, or sms for System Management Services.
-i
The IPL source to use when activating an IBM i partition. Valid values are a, b, c, or d.
May 2012
5
--ip
The IPv4 address of the Ethernet adapter or HEA logical port assigned as the alternate restart
device of the IBM i partition for which to perform the network install operation.
--netmask
The network mask associated with the IP address specified with the --ip option.
--gateway
The IPv4 address of the gateway to use when performing a network install of an IBM i partition.
--serverip
The IPv4 address of the server that contains the network install images for an IBM i partition.
--serverdir
The directory on the server that contains the network install images for an IBM i partition.
--speed The speed setting to use when performing a network install of an IBM i partition. Valid values
are:
auto - automatically detect and set speed
1 - 1 Mbps
10 - 10 Mbps
100 - 100 Mbps
1000 - 1000 Mbps
If this option is not specified, it defaults to auto.
--duplex
The duplex setting to use when performing a network install of an IBM i partition. Valid values
are:
auto - automatically detect and set duplex
half - half duplex
full - full duplex
If this option is not specified, it defaults to auto.
--mtu
The maximum transmission unit, in bytes, to use when performing a network install of an IBM i
partition. Valid values are 1500 or 9000 bytes. If this option is not specified, it defaults to 1500
bytes.
--force When activating a partition that uses shared memory, use this option to allow the partition to be
activated under any of the following conditions:
- the partition is configured to use redundant paging Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partitions, but only
one paging VIOS partition is currently available and that paging VIOS partition has access to an
available paging space device in the shared memory pool,
- the partition is configured to use redundant paging VIOS partitions, but there is no available paging space device in the shared memory pool that can be accessed by both paging VIOS partitions.
However, there is an available paging space device in the shared memory pool that can be accessed
by one of the paging VIOS partitions,
- the partition is configured to use a single paging VIOS partition which is not currently available
or does not have access to an available paging space device in the shared memory pool, but there is
another paging VIOS partition in the shared memory pool that is available and that has access to
an available paging space device in the shared memory pool.
--test
Linux
If this option is specified when performing a system profile operation, the system profile is validated.
May 2012
6
--continue
If this option is specified when activating a system profile, remaining partitions will continue to be
activated after a partition activation failure occurs.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXIT STATUS
This command has the following return codes:
0
Success
100
Partial success
This value is returned when performing an operation on multiple managed systems or multiple
partitions and at least one operation succeeded, and at least one failed.
Any other value means the command failed.
EXAMPLES
Power on a managed system and auto start partitions:
chsysstate -m 9406-520*10110CA -r sys -o on
Power on a managed system with a system profile:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r sys -o onsysprof -f mySysProf
Power off a managed system normally:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r sys -o off
Power off a managed system fast:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r sys -o off --immed
Restart a managed system:
chsysstate -m 9406-570*12345678 -r sys -o off --immed
--restart
Rebuild a managed system:
chsysstate -m 9406-570*12345678 -r sys -o rebuild
Recover partition data for a managed system:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r sys -o recover
Initiate service processor failover for a managed system:
chsysstate -m myServer -r sys -o spfailover
Set the keylock position for a managed system:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r sys -o chkey -k manual
Activate IBM i partition p1 using partition profile p1_prof1 and IPL source b:
Linux
May 2012
7
chsysstate -m sys1 -r lpar -o on -n p1 -f p1_prof1 -i b
Activate partitions p1, p2, and p3 with their current configurations:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r lpar -o on -n p1,p2,p3
Activate and perform a network install of the IBM i partition iLpar:
chsysstate -m mySys -r lpar -o on -n iLpar -f iProf -i d --ip 9.1.2.33
--netmask 255.255.255.0 --gateway 9.1.0.1 --serverip 9.5.12.34
--serverdir /IBMi/611
Shut down the partition with ID 1:
chsysstate -m 9406-570*12345678 -r lpar -o shutdown --id 1
Issue the AIX shutdown command to immediately shut down the AIX partition aix_p1:
chsysstate -m 9406-570*12345678 -r lpar -o osshutdown
-n p1 --immed
Immediately restart the partition with ID 1:
chsysstate -m 9406-570*12345678 -r lpar -o shutdown --id 1
--immed --restart
Enable a remote service session for the IBM i partition mylpar:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r lpar -o remotedston -n mylpar
Validate system profile sp1:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r sysprof -n sp1 --test
Validate then activate system profile sp1:
chsysstate -m sys1 -r sysprof -n sp1 -o on --test
Activate system profile mySysProf and continue activating remaining partitions if a partition activation
failure occurs:
chsysstate -m 9406-570*12345678 -r sysprof -n mySysProf
-o on --continue
Rebuild a managed frame:
chsysstate -e myFrame -r frame -o rebuild
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
Linux
May 2012
8
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chlparstate, lssyscfg
Linux
May 2012
9
NAME
chtskey - change trusted system key
SYNOPSIS
chtskey -m managed-system -o {change | restore}
--newkey file [--oldkey file] [--force] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chtskey changes the trusted system key for the managed-system. The trusted system key is used for virtual
Trusted Platform Module (vTPM) data encryption.
If the trusted system key for a managed system is not set, the managed system automatically generates the
default trusted system key when the first partition that uses vTPM is activated.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to set the trusted system key. The name may either be
the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are change to set the trusted system key and re-encrypt
vTPM data, and restore to set the trusted system key without re-encrypting vTPM data.
The restore operation is only allowed when all of the partitions that are using vTPM are shut
down.
Re-encryption of vTPM data may take a long time to complete.
--newkey
The name of the binary file that contains the new key.
If the file is on removable media, the media must be present in the removable media device and the
device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued. The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
--oldkey
The name of the binary file that contains the current key. This option is not required the first time
a user sets the trusted system key for the managed-system. After the first time, this option is
required.
If the file is on removable media, the media must be present in the removable media device and the
device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued. The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
--force Specify this option to force the trusted system key to be changed when vTPM data is still being reencrypted due to a previous trusted system key change operation. vTPM data loss may occur.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Set the trusted system key for the first time. The key file exists in the user’s home directory on the HMC:
chtskey -m sys1 -o change --newkey keyfile
Set the trusted system key after it has been set at least once. The key files are on a USB flash memory
device which is connected to the HMC:
lsmediadev (to obtain mount points)
Linux
October 2011
1
mount /media/sdb1
chtskey -m 8233-E8B*1000ABC -o change --newkey /media/sdb1/newkeyfile
--oldkey /media/sdb1/oldkeyfile
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lstskey
Linux
October 2011
2
NAME
chusrtca - displays welcome text at local console login or displays text when remotely login using SSH.
SYNOPSIS
chusrtca [-o { a | r | ab | rb}]
[-f welcome-file] [-b banner-file]
[-c] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chusrtca provides a method to deploy text file(s) containing welcome or warning message and present to
all users who login locally on the Hardware Management Console (HMC). The text file must be named
WelcomeFile.txt. A banner file can also be specified, to have its contents displayed prior to login with
SSH. The banner file must first be copied to the HMC, then it will be copied to a location accessible by
SSH daemon. The banner file must be named BannerFile.txt.
OPTIONS
-o
Adds (a) or removes (r) the text file containing the welcome text. Add banner (ab) and remove
banner (rb) can only be specified when deploying a banner file.
-f
The text file whose contents will be used as welcome, when login locally on the HMC, must be
named WelcomeFile.txt.
-b
The text file whose contents will be used as banner, when remotely login using SSH, must be
named BannerFile.txt.
-c
Removes the welcome or the banner file from the HMC filesystem. This option requires the -f or
-b flags.
--help
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Adds welcome text. The file is on floppy:
mount /mnt/floppy
chusrtca -o a -f /mnt/floppy/WelcomeFile.txt
Use scp to copy the WelcomeFile.txt file to /tmp on the HMC, then adds welcome text then removes it:
scp [email protected]:/tmp/WelcomeFile.txt /tmp
chusrtca -o a -f /tmp/WelcomeFile.txt -c
Removes welcome text from the HMC. The welcome text will no longer be displayed:
chusrtca -o r
Removes banner text from the HMC. The banner text will no longer be displayed:
chusrtca -o rb
Use scp to copy the banner file to /tmp on the HMC, then deploy it:
scp [email protected]:/tmp/BannerFile.txt /tmp
chusrtca -o ab -b /tmp/BannerFile.txt -c
Removes banner text file from the HMC:
Linux
April 2007
1
chusrtca -c -b /tmp/BannerFile.txt
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
April 2007
2
NAME
chvet - activate Capacity on Demand advanced functions
SYNOPSIS
chvet -o e -m managed-system -k activation-code [--help]
DESCRIPTION
chvet performs activation of Capacity on Demand (CoD) advanced functions on the managed-system. CoD
advanced functions include PowerVM and Enterprise Enablement.
CoD advanced functions are sometimes referred to as Virtualization Engine systems technologies.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. The only valid value is e to enter an activation code.
-m
The name of the managed system on which to enter the activation code. The name may either be
the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is
the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same
user-defined name.
-k
The activation code (key) to enter. Letters may be entered in either upper case or lower case.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Enter an activation code:
chvet -m mySystem -o e -k AlphaNumericString12345
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsvet, lssyscfg
Linux
June 2007
1
NAME
cpdump - copy dumps
SYNOPSIS
cpdump -r {dvd | ftp} -f "file1 file2 ...fileN"
[-h host-name] [-u user-ID] [--passwd password]
[-d directory] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
cpdump copies managed system dumps and managed frame dumps from the Hardware Management Console (HMC) to DVD or a remote FTP site.
Use the lsdump command to list the managed system dumps and managed frame dumps that reside on the
HMC.
OPTIONS
-r
The storage location to where the dumps will be copied. Valid values are dvd for the DVD drive
on the HMC and ftp for a remote FTP site.
-f
The file name of the dump to be copied. If multiple dumps are to be copied, the file names must
be separated by blanks and enclosed in double quotes.
-h
The host name or IP address of the remote FTP site.
This option is required when copying a dump to a remote FTP site. Otherwise, this option is not
valid.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the remote FTP site.
This option is required when copying a dump to a remote FTP site. Otherwise, this option is not
valid.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the remote FTP site. If this option is omitted, you will be
prompted to enter the password.
This option is only valid when copying a dump to a remote FTP site.
-d
The directory on the FTP server to where the dumps will be copied. If this option is omitted, the
dumps will be copied to the home directory of the user.
This option is only valid when copying a dump to a remote FTP site.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Copy dump files to the DVD drive on the HMC:
cpdump -r dvd -f "FSPDUMP.100072A.01000019.20040629205455
SYSDUMP.100072A.01000019.20040630183112"
Copy a dump file to a remote FTP site:
cpdump -r ftp -f "FSPDUMP.100072A.01000019.20040629205455"
-h ftpserver -u ftpuser --passwd ftppassword
-d /tmp/dumpfiles/
ENVIRONMENT
None
Linux
October 2004
1
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsdump, rmdump
Linux
October 2004
2
NAME
cpfile - copy file
SYNOPSIS
cpfile -t modelmap -l {l | r} -f file-name -o {import | export}
[-h host-name -u user-ID [--passwd password]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
cpfile copies a file to or from the Hardware Management Console (HMC) and the local HMC file system,
removable media, or a remote system using secure File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
This command allows a user to copy a file to or from a directory on the HMC to which the user does not
have write access. The type of file specified determines the directory.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of file to copy. The only valid value is modelmap for an XML file which indicates the
HMC is managing an IBM Smart Analytics Solution. This file describes an appliance model ID
and its associated server model ID and is used during a call-home event to associate the failing
server model to the appliance model.
-l
The location of the file. For an import operation, this is the source location of the file. For an
export operation, this is the destination location of the file. Valid values are l for the local HMC
file system or removable media, or r for a remote secure FTP server.
When copying a file to or from removable media, the media must be present in the removable
media device and the device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is
issued. The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on
the HMC.
-f
The fully qualified name of the file to copy. If the file already exists in the destination location, it
will be overwritten.
-o
The direction of the copy. Valid values are import to copy the file from the specified location to
the destination location on the HMC, or export to copy the file from the source location on the
HMC to the specified location.
-h
The host name or IP address of the secure FTP server.
This option is required when copying a file to or from a secure FTP server. Otherwise, this option
is not valid.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the secure FTP server.
This option is required when copying a file to or from a secure FTP server. Otherwise, this option
is not valid.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the secure FTP server. If this option is omitted, you will be
prompted to enter the password.
This option is only valid when copying a file to or from a secure FTP server.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Copy the model mapping file called hmcModelMap.xml on a USB flash memory device (the USB flash
memory device must already be connected to the HMC) to the HMC:
lsmediadev (to obtain mount points)
mount /media/sdb1
Linux
May 2012
1
cpfile -t modelmap -l l -o import -f /media/sdb1/hmcModelMap.xml
Use scp to copy the model mapping file called myfile.xml to the user’s home directory on the HMC. Then
use cpfile to copy the file into the model mapping file directory on the HMC:
scp [email protected]:/directory/myfile.xml /home/user
cpfile -t modelmap -l l -o import -f /home/user/myfile.xml
Copy the model mapping file on the HMC to the file /home/maps/map.xml on a remote SFTP server (you
will be prompted to enter your password):
cpfile -t modelmap -l r -o export -f /home/maps/map.xml
-h sftpserver -u sftpuser
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsmediadev
Linux
May 2012
2
NAME
cpsysplan - copy system plan
SYNOPSIS
cpsysplan -r {ftp | media | homedir} -f file-name
-o {import | export}
[-h host-name] [-p ftp-port-number] [-u user-ID]
[--passwd password] [-d directory]
[--check] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
cpsysplan copies a system plan file between the system plan file directory on the Hardware Management
Console (HMC) and a remote host, removable media, or the user’s home directory on the HMC.
OPTIONS
-r
The location where the system plan file will be copied to or from. Valid values are ftp for a remote
FTP site, media for removable media, and homedir for the user’s home directory on the HMC.
If media is specified, the media must be present in the removable media device and the device
must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued. The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
-f
Specifies the name of the system plan file that is to be copied. The file name is restricted to the
alphanumerics (upper and lower) as well as a set of special characters (comma, period, hyphen,
underscore, and space). The file name cannot begin with a period or hyphen and must end with
the .sysplan suffix.
cpsysplan performs a raw file copy. It does not parse or validate the system plan file content.
When copying from the HMC, the file will be searched for in the system plan file directory on the
HMC. When copying to the HMC, the file will be written to this directory. If the file already
exists, it will be overwritten unless the --check option is specified.
-o
Specifies if the file is to be copied to or from the system plan file directory on the HMC. Valid values are export to copy the file from the HMC to the resource location specified or import to copy
the file from the resource location specified to the system plan file directory on the HMC.
-h
The host name or IP address of the remote FTP site.
This option is required when copying a file to or from a remote FTP site. Otherwise, this option is
not valid.
-p
The port number to use for the remote FTP site. If this option is omitted, the default FTP port 21
will be used.
This option is only valid when copying a file to or from a remote FTP site.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the remote FTP site.
This option is required when copying a file to or from a remote FTP site. Otherwise, this option is
not valid.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the remote FTP site. If this option is omitted, you will be
prompted to enter the password.
This option is only valid when copying a file to or from a remote FTP site.
-d
Linux
The optional directory to use when copying a file to or from a remote FTP site.
August 2006
1
This option is required when copying a system plan file to or from media. The directory is the
name of the mounted removable media where the file is read from when -o import is specified or
written to when -o export is specified.
--check
Specifies that when importing a file, this command should check the system plan directory and fail
with an error if the file with the name specified with the -f option already exists.
This option is only valid when -o import is specified.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Copy the system plan file sysplan.sysplan to a remote FTP site:
cpsysplan -r ftp -f sysplan.sysplan -o export -h ftpserver -u ftpuser --passwd ftppassword
Copy the system plan file sysplan.sysplan to a remote FTP site:
cpsysplan -r ftp -f sysplan.sysplan -o export -h 9.3.145.52 -d /home/user/systemplans
Copy the system plan file sysplan.sysplan from a remote FTP site:
cpsysplan -r ftp -f sysplan.sysplan -o import -h ftpserver -p 9922 -u ftpuser --passwd ftppassword
Copy the system plan file sysplan.sysplan from CD-ROM (the CD must be present in the drive). Don’t
overwrite sysplan.sysplan if the file already exists in the system plan directory:
mount /media/cdrom
cpsysplan -r media -f sysplan.sysplan -o import -d /media/cdrom --check
Copy the system plan file sysplan.sysplan to a USB flash memory device (the USB flash memory device
must already be connected to the HMC):
mount /media/sda1
cpsysplan -r media -f sysplan.sysplan -o export -d /media/sda1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
deploysysplan, lssysplan, mksysplan, rmsysplan, lsmediadev
Linux
August 2006
2
NAME
deploysysplan - deploy system plan
SYNOPSIS
deploysysplan -f file-name -o {dv | v | d}
[-m managed-system] [--force]
[--plan plan-number] [-v]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
deploysysplan deploys a managed system’s partition plan from a system plan file.
OPTIONS
-f
Specifies the name of the file that contains the system plan that is to be deployed. The file must
exist in the system plan file directory on the Hardware Management Console (HMC). This file
will not be changed by the deploysysplan command.
The file name must end with the .sysplan suffix.
-o
Specifies the deployment option to be used when deploying the system plan.
Use the dv option to validate the system plan on the managed system, and if it is valid, to deploy
it.
Use the v option to validate the system plan on the managed system but not deploy it.
Use the d option to skip validation of the system plan against the managed system, and just deploy
the plan-specified partitions and profiles on the managed system.
-m
Specifies the managed system’s name where the plan should be deployed. The system plan optionally specifies the managed system’s name where that system plan was intended to be deployed. If a
managed system name is specified with this option, that name would override the plan-provided
name. If no managed system name was specified in the system plan file then this option is
required.
The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form ttttmmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number
of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed
systems with the same user-defined name.
--force If the managed system has existing partitions that the system plan contains that are in an active
state, this option allows this command to proceed. Otherwise, if active partitions are found, this
command will fail with an error message.
--plan
System plan files can contain more than one system plan. If the file contains more than one plan,
this option specifies the name of the system plan to deploy. If this name is not specified, then the
first system plan in the file is deployed. If there is only one system plan in the file, this option is
ignored.
-v
When -o v is specified, this option specifies that a list of identifiers that identify the steps of the
validated system plan should be written to stdout. These steps are part of the plan but not yet
implemented on the managed system. Otherwise, this list will not be written out.
When -o dv or -o d is specified, this option specifies that a list of log entries that record the steps
performed as part of deploying the system plan should be written to stdout. Otherwise, this list will
not be written out.
--help
Linux
Display the help text for this command and exit.
February 2010
1
EXAMPLES
Deploy a system plan from the file mysysplan.sysplan onto the managed system configured in the file. Validate the plan against the managed system before deploying it:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o dv
Deploy a system plan from the file mysysplan.sysplan onto managed system mySystem. Validate the plan
against the managed system before deploying it. Deploy the plan, if valid, even though there might be
active partitions on the managed system:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o dv -m mySystem --force
Deploy a system plan from the file mysysplan.sysplan onto the managed system identified by the machine
type, model, and serial number 9406-570*34134888. Validate the plan against the managed system before
deploying it. Write any errors found in validation or deployment to stdout:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o dv -m 9406-570*34134888 -v
Validate the ability to deploy a system plan from the file multisysplan.sysplan onto managed system
mySystem. Use the third system plan that appears in this file (the system plan file has at least three system
plans). Validate the plan specified against the managed system to determine if that plan can be deployed
there but do not actually deploy the plan:
deploysysplan -f multisysplan.sysplan -o v -m mySystem --plan 3
Validate the ability to deploy a system plan from the file mysysplan.sysplan onto managed system mySystem. Validate the plan against the managed system to determine if that plan can be deployed there but do
not actually deploy the plan. Write out the steps in the system plan that are part of the plan but not yet
implemented to stdout. Write any errors found in validation or deployment to stdout:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o v -m mySystem -v
Deploy a system plan from the file mysysplan.sysplan onto managed system mySystem. Do not validate
the plan against the managed system to determine if that plan can be deployed there. Write information
about the steps performed in deployment to stdout. Write any errors found in validation or deployment to
stdout. Deploy the plan, if valid, even though there might be active partitions on the managed system:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o d -m mySystem -v --force
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
cpsysplan, lssysplan, mksysplan, rmsysplan
Linux
February 2010
2
NAME
dump - perform dump operation
SYNOPSIS
dump -m managed-system -t sys -o set -a "attributes"
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
dump sets the system dump parameters for the managed-system. This operation is only supported for
POWER6 and later servers.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to set the system dump parameters. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-t
The type of dump for which to set the dump parameters. Valid values are sys for system dump.
-o
The dump operation to perform. Valid values are set to set the system dump parameters.
-a
The configuration data needed to set the system dump parameters. The configuration data consists
of attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The configuration data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the configuration data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Valid attribute names:
as_needed
Specifies when to collect system dumps.
Valid values:
0 - do not collect system dumps
1 - collect system dumps as necessary
Setting as_needed to 0 will remove the
ability of service personnel to diagnose
server errors. Do not set as_needed to 0
unless directed to do so by your hardware
service representative.
sys_hardware
Specifies how much hardware data to
collect when a system dump occurs.
Valid values:
auto - collect hardware data based on the
system dump event that occurred
max - collect as much hardware data as
possible
Setting sys_hardware to max will cause
system dumps to take longer to complete.
Do not set sys_hardware to max unless
directed to do so by your hardware
service representative.
Linux
June 2007
1
sys_firmware
Specifies how much system firmware data
to collect when a system dump occurs.
Valid values:
auto - collect the primary data in
memory owned by system
firmware
max
- collect the primary data in
memory owned by system
firmware plus all TCEs
io
- collect the primary data in
memory owned by system
firmware plus all PCI TCEs
virtualio - collect the primary data in
memory owned by system
firmware plus all virtual I/O
TCEs
hps
- collect the primary data in
memory owned by system
firmware plus all High
Performance Switch (HPS) TCEs
hcaio - collect the primary data in
memory owned by system
firmware plus all Host
Channel Adapter (HCA) TCEs
Setting sys_firware to max, io,
virtualio, hps, or hcaio will cause
system dumps to take longer to complete.
Do not set sys_firware to one of these
values unless directed to do so by your
hardware service representative.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Set the system dump parameters for managed system sys1:
dump -m sys1 -t sys -o set -a "sys_hardware=auto,
sys_firmware=auto"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsdump
Linux
June 2007
2
NAME
expdata - export data
SYNOPSIS
expdata -f file [--force] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
expdata exports Hardware Management Console (HMC) configuration data to a file. The exported data
includes HMC user ID data, HMC task role and managed resource role data, call-home data, and managed
system IP addresses.
OPTIONS
-f
The name of the file where the HMC configuration data is to be written. If file is not fully qualified, file will be written to the /dump/expdata directory on the HMC.
If file already exists, this command will fail unless the --force option is specified.
To export the data to removable media, the media must be present in the removable media device
and the device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued. The
lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
--force This option allows the specified file to be overwritten if it already exists.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Export HMC configuration data to a file called cfgdata on a USB flash memory device (the USB flash
memory device must already be connected to the HMC):
mount /media/sdb1
expdata -f /media/sdb1/cfgdata
Export HMC configuration data to a file called hmcdata (the file will be written to the /dump/expdata
directory on the HMC). The file hmcdata will be overwritten if it already exists:
expdata -f hmcdata --force
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsmediadev
Linux
September 2010
1
NAME
getdump - get dump
SYNOPSIS
getdump {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame}
-t {pss | sp | sys | resource} [-s {a | b | p | s}] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
getdump offloads a dump from the managed-system or the managed-frame to the Hardware Management
Console (HMC). The dump is written to a file in the /dump or /extra directory on the HMC.
The lsdump command can be used to list the dumps that are available on the managed-system or the managed-frame.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system from which to offload the dump. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
This option is required when offloading a service processor dump, a system dump, or a resource
dump. This option is not valid otherwise.
-e
The name of the managed frame from which to offload the dump. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The ttttmmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined
name.
This option is required when offloading a power subsystem dump. This option is not valid otherwise.
-t
The dump to offload. Valid values are pss for a power subsystem dump, sp for a service processor
dump, sys for a system dump, or resource for a resource dump.
-s
When offloading a power subsystem dump, use this option to specify the side of the managed
frame’s bulk power assembly (BPA) from which to offload the dump. Valid values are a for side A
and b for side B.
When offloading a service processor dump, use this option to specify the service processor from
which to offload the dump. Valid values are p for the primary service processor and s for the secondary service processor. If this option is not specified, the service processor dump will be
offloaded from the primary service processor.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Offload the system dump from managed system sys1:
getdump -m sys1 -t sys
Offload the service processor dump from the secondary service processor on managed system
9117-570*12345678:
getdump -m 9117-570*12345678 -t sp -s s
Offload the power subsystem dump from side B of the BPA for the managed frame 9119-59*000012C:
Linux
May 2011
1
getdump -e 9119-59*000012C -t pss -s b
Offload the resource dump from managed system sys1:
getdump -m sys1 -t resource
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsdump, rmdump, startdump
Linux
May 2011
2
NAME
getfile - get file
SYNOPSIS
getfile -t {krbkeyfile | ldapcacert | rsyslogcacert | rsysloghmccert |
rsysloghmckey}
-l {l | s} -f file [-h host-name -u user-ID [--passwd password]]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
getfile obtains and deploys a file of the specified type on the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-t
The type of file to get and deploy. Valid values are krbkeyfile for the Kerberos service key
(keytab) file, ldapcacert for the LDAP Certificate Authority (CA) certificate file, rsyslogcacert
for the rsyslog CA certificate file, rsysloghmccert for the rsyslog HMC certificate file, and rsysloghmckey for the rsyslog HMC private key file.
The Kerberos service key file is generated on a Key Distribution Center (KDC) server. The service key file contains the host principal that identifies the HMC to the KDC server. When this
command is run, the file obtained will become the /etc/krb5.keytab file on the HMC. This file
will be used to verify the identity of the KDC and the HMC during remote Kerberos authentication
of HMC users. Kerberos must be configured on the HMC before this command is run, and the
HMC must be rebooted after the successful completion of this command for the change to take
effect.
The LDAP CA certificate file contains the certificate for the Certificate Authority the HMC recognizes. This file will be used to provide a secure connection between the HMC and the LDAP
server during remote LDAP authentication of HMC users. LDAP must be configured on the HMC
before this command is run.
The rsyslog CA certificate file, rsyslog HMC certificate file, and rsyslog HMC private key file
must be deployed on the HMC before TLS encrypted system logging over TCP can be enabled.
These 3 files will automatically be removed from the HMC when TLS encrypted system logging
over TCP is disabled.
-l
The location where the file to get resides.
Specify l with this option if the file has already been copied to the HMC or resides on removable
media. If the file resides on removable media, the media must be present in the removable media
device and the device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued.
The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
Specify s with this option if the file resides on a remote site. Secure FTP over SSH will be used to
obtain the file from the remote site, therefore the remote site must have SSH installed and running.
-f
The fully qualified name of the file on the HMC, removable media, or remote site.
-h
The host name or IP address of the secure FTP server from which to get the file.
This option is required when file resides on a remote site. Otherwise, this option is not valid.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the remote site.
This option is required when file resides on a remote site. Otherwise, this option is not valid.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the remote site. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to
enter the password.
Linux
October 2011
1
This option is only valid when file resides on a remote site.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Get the Kerberos service key file from the remote site ftpserver using secure FTP, then deploy the file as
/etc/krb5.keytab on the HMC:
getfile -t krbkeyfile -l s -h ftpserver -u ftpuser
-f /home/ftpuser/krb5.keytab
Get the LDAP CA certificate file locally from the user’s home directory, then deploy the file on the HMC:
getfile -t ldapcacert -l l -f /home/user/certs
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmc, chhmcldap, lsmediadev, rmfile
Linux
October 2011
2
NAME
getupgfiles - get upgrade files
SYNOPSIS
getupgfiles -h host-name -u user-ID [--passwd password]
-d remote-directory [-s] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
getupgfiles obtains required files for a Hardware Management Console (HMC) upgrade from a directory on
a remote site. Either FTP or secure FTP (SFTP) is used to transfer the files. The files are transferred onto a
special partition on the HMC hard drive. After the files have been transferred, the chhmc command can be
used to allow the HMC to boot from this partition and perform the upgrade.
OPTIONS
-h
The host name or IP address of the remote FTP or SFTP server from which to get the upgrade
files.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the remote site.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the remote site. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to
enter the password.
-d
The directory on the remote site that contains the upgrade files. If all of the required files are not
present in this directory, this command will fail.
-s
Use secure FTP to transfer the upgrade files. The remote site must have SSH installed and running.
If this option is omitted, normal FTP will be used to transfer the upgrade files.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Get HMC upgrade files from the remote site ftpserver. Use normal FTP:
getupgfiles -h ftpserver -u ftpuser
-d /home/ftpuser/images
Get HMC upgrade files from the remote site sftpserver. Use secure FTP:
getupgfiles -h sftpserver -u sftpuser
-d /home/sftpuser/images -s
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmc
Linux
November 2007
1
NAME
hmcshutdown - shut down the Hardware Management Console
SYNOPSIS
hmcshutdown -t {now | number-of-minutes} [-r] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
hmcshutdown shuts down the Hardware Management Console (HMC). If requested, the HMC will be
rebooted after the shutdown completes.
OPTIONS
-t
The number of minutes to wait before starting the shutdown. If now is specified, the shutdown
will be started immediately.
-r
Reboot the HMC after the shutdown. If this option is omitted, the HMC will be halted after the
shutdown.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Reboot the HMC after 3 minutes:
hmcshutdown -t 3 -r
Halt the HMC immediately:
hmcshutdown -t now
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
May 2004
1
NAME
hmcwin - Provides screen capture on HMC
SYNOPSIS
hmcwin { -o c | v |r } -f file-name [--help]
DESCRIPTION
hmcwin Provide screen capture on HMC.
OPTIONS
-o
c captures the screen and save it in file-name. The file will be saved under the user’s
$HOME/.screen_capture/ directory. v displays the image stored in file file-name from the user’s
$HOME/.screen_capture/ directory. When using the v option, left mouse click on the displayed
window or enter ctrl-c to dismiss it. r removes the file file-name under the user’s
$HOME/.screen_capture directory.
-f
The file name to be used to create or remove the screen captured file under the user’s
$HOME/.screen_capture directory.
--help
Prints the help message and exits.
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
October 2004
1
NAME
installios - Network install a Virtual I/O Server Logical Partition
SYNOPSIS
installios [-p partition-name -i ipaddr-or-hostname
-S subnet-mask -g gateway -d path -s system-name
[-m mac-address] -r profile [-n] [-P speed] [-D duplex]
[-l language] [-A net_interface] [-E bosinst_pvid]
[-T destination_dir] [-V vlan_tag] [-Y vlan_priority]] | -u
DESCRIPTION
installios installs the Virtual I/O Server. It must be run from the Hardware Managment Console (HMC). All
of the flags are optional. If no flags are provided, the installios wizard will be invoked and the user will be
prompted to interactively enter the information contained in the flags.
OPTIONS
Linux
-s
Specifies the managed system. The name of the managed system maintained by the HMC. This
name must match the name shown on the HMC, not a host name.
-p
Specifies the partition name. The name of the LPAR that will be installed with Virtual I/O Server
operating system. This partition must be of type Virtual I/O Server and the name given for it must
match the name shown on the HMC, not a host name.
-r
Specifies the profile name. The name of the profile that contains the hardware resources being
installed to.
-d
Specifies the path to installation images. Either /dev/cdrom or the path to a system backup of the
Virtual I/O Server created by the backupios command. The path may also specify a remote location mountable by NFS such as hostname:/path_to_backup
-i
Specifies the client IP address. The IP address with which the client’s network interface will be
configured for network installation of the Virtual I/O Server operating system.
-S
Specifies the client subnet mask. The subnet mask with which the client’s network interface will
be configured for network installation of the Virtual I/O Server operating system.
-g
Specifies the client gateway. The default gateway that the client will use during network installation of the Virtual I/O Server operating system.
-m
Specifies the client MAC address. The MAC address of the client network interface through which
the network installation of the Virtual I/O Server will take place.
-P
Specifies speed (optional) The communication speed with which to configure the client’s network
interface. This value can be 10, 100, 1000, or auto, and is 100 by default if this flag is not specified.
-D
Specifies duplex (optional). The duplex setting with which to configure the client’s network interface. This value can be full, half or auto and is set to full by default if this flag is not specified.
-n
Specifies not to configure the client’s network interface (optional): If this flag is specified, then the
client’s network interface will not be configured with the IP settings specified in the flags given to
this command after the installation has completed.
-l
Specifies language (optional): The language in which the license agreement will be displayed
before the installation. Upon viewing the license, a prompt will be shown asking if the license is to
be accepted. If the prompt is answered with y, then the installation will proceed and the Virtual I/O
Server license will be automatically accepted after the installation. If the prompt is answered with
n, then the installios command will exit and the installation will not proceed. If this flag is not
specified, then the installation will proceed, but the Virtual I/O Server will not be usable until the
license is manually accepted after the installation.
-A
Specifies net_interface (optional): The specified net_interface will be used to network install the
partition. The network interface specified must be connected to a network in which the partition’s
October 2012
1
IP address is reachable. If no interface is specified, a default public interface will be chosen automatically, based on the HMC’s current hostname.
-E
Specifies bosinst_pvid (optional): The specified bosinst_pvid value signifies the physical volume
identity for a disk targeted for installation. The bosinst_pvid value can be obtained by running the
lspv command on the machine being installed.
-T
Specifies destination_dir (optional): The specified destination_dir points to a path were the source
will be copied to on the HMC. The default destination path is the /extra filesystem.
-V
Specifies the VLAN tag identifier to use for tagging Ethernet frames during network install for virtual network communication. Valid value is from 0 to 4094.
-Y
Specifies the VLAN tag priority to use for tagging Ethernet frames during network install for virtual network communication. Valid value is from 0 to 7.
-u
Unconfigure installios (optional). Will manually unconfigure the installios installation resources.
This flag is only needed if a problem occurs during the installation and installios does not automatically unconfigure itself.
EXAMPLES
To use the installios wizard which will prompt the user for partition and network information to install a
partition, type:
installios
To create resources from the CDROM media for installing a partition with the following information:
Managed System : wampeter
Partition Name : shire02
Partition Profile : default
Partition IP
: 9.3.6.234
Partition Subnet : 255.255.255.0
Partition Gateway : 9.3.6.1
installios -d /dev/cdrom -i 9.3.6.234 -g 9.3.6.1 -S 255.255.255.0 -s wampeter -p shire02 -r default
To create resources from a directory at /mnt for installing a partition with the following information:
Managed System : bokonon
Partition Name : mordor02
Partition Profile : full_resource
Partition IP
: 9.3.6.134
Partition Subnet : 255.255.255.0
Partition Gateway : 9.3.6.1
MAC address
: f2:d4:60:00:d0:03
installios -d /mnt -i 9.3.6.134 -g 9.3.6.1 -S 255.255.255.0 -m f2d46000d003 -s bokonon -p mordor02 -r
full_resource
To clean up tasks from a previous installios execution, type:
installios -u
ENVIRONMENT
INSTALLIOS_DEBUG
This variable is use to print debug messages from lpar_netboot when installios executes the
lpar_netboot command. This variable is set with INSTALLIOS_DEBUG=yes. When executing
the installios command in the wizard mode, this variable must not be set as the debug output from
Linux
October 2012
2
lpar_netboot will interfere with the MAC address discovery resulting in a failed execution. This
variable must only be set when executing installios on the command line with flags.
INSTALLIOS_PRIVATE_IF
This variable is used by installios to enable DHCP service when responding to BOOTP request
from an installing partition. This variable must only be use in situation where the FSP (Flexible
Service Processor) and the installing partition communicate with the HMC through a private network. If the private network the HMC is using is eth0, then this variable is set with INSTALLIOS_PRIVATE_IF=eth0.
INSTALLIOS_DESTINATION_DIRECTORY
This variable is used by installios to specify the destination directory to copy the source to. This
variable is set with INSTALLIOS_DESTINATION_DIRECTORY=/info. This variable is overridden by the -T destination_dir flag. In certain situation where calling installios fails due to space
limitation when copying over the source image, setting this variable or the -T flag to an alternate
location with space capable of storing the content of the source location will resolve the situation.
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsysstate, lssyscfg, mkvterm, rmvterm, lpar_netboot
Linux
October 2012
3
NAME
logssh - log ssh command usage
SYNOPSIS
logssh
DESCRIPTION
logssh is a script that can be added to a user’s authorized_keys2 file to restrict a user from being able to
open a pseudo-tty using ssh. Furthermore, it will log all commands executed by the user in syslog. This
command is not intended to be run interactively.
Note: The logssh ${SSH_ORIGINAL_COMMAND} argument has been deprecated and will be ignored
if passed to the script.
EXAMPLES
Use the command mkauthkeys to update a user’s authorized_keys2 file:
mkauthkeys -a -u john ´command="logssh"
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzxTNjoX
AvyZBw390oJ27uj90PxZNtUWhYVN1/kaAfilSIr3z5Hhm7BdaaarU
ru94qhiM0xds6cgQpNUQUy6GByoWDrNhdEIdAzXj3uaPscY6wKkNi
a0llTJPUoBDBsadaa4oEc0/4poNG/X3uYrsdnbbMNkt/jmnEilSXI
gOEmWk= [email protected]´
The above command updates user john’s authorized_keys2 file on the HMC, so that all commands
executed by john will be logged in syslog.
ssh [email protected] lshmc -V
The above command will result in the following entries being logged in /var/log/messages:
Nov 28 15:08:14 somehmc hmc_ssh: john login on Tue Nov 28
15:08:14 CST 2006 from 192.168.128.125
Nov 28 15:08:14 somehmc hmc_ssh: john runs lshmc -V on
Tue Nov 28 15:08:14 CST 2006 from 192.168.128.125
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
February 2007
1
NAME
lpar_netboot - retrieve MAC address and physical location code from network adapters for a partition or
instruct a partition to network boot
SYNOPSIS
To retrieve MAC address and physical location code:
lpar_netboot -M -n [-v] [-x] [-f] [-i] [-E environment [-E ...]]
[-A] -t ent [-T {on|off}] [-D -s speed -d duplex
-S server -G gateway -C client [-K subnetmask]
[-V vlan_tag] [-Y vlan_priority]]
partition-name partition-profile managed-system
To perform network boot:
lpar_netboot [-v] [-x] [-f] [-i] [-E environment [-E ...]]
[-g args] [{-A -D | [-D] -l physical-location-code |
[-D] -m MAC-address}] -t ent [-T {on|off}]
-s speed -d duplex -S server -G gateway -C client
[-K subnetmask] [-V vlan_tag] [-Y vlan_priority]
[[-a -B tftp_image_filename] |
-B bootp_image_filename]
partition-name partition-profile managed-system
To retrieve MAC address and physical location code on a system supporting a full system partition:
lpar_netboot -M -n [-v] [-x] [-f] [-i] [-E environment [-E ...]]
[-A] -t ent [-T {on|off}] [-D -s speed -d duplex
-S server -G gateway -C client [-K subnetmask]
[-V vlan_tag] [-Y vlan_priority]]
managed-system managed-system
To perform network boot on a system supporting a full system partition:
lpar_netboot [-v] [-x] [-f] [-i] [-E environment [-E ...]]
[-g args] [{-A -D | [-D] -l physical-location-code |
[-D] -m MAC-address}] -t ent [-T {on|off}]
-s speed -d duplex -S server -G gateway -C client
[-K subnetmask] [-V vlan_tag] [-Y vlan_priority]
[[-a -B tftp_image_filename] |
-B bootp_image_filename]
managed-system managed-system
DESCRIPTION
lpar_netboot instructs a logical partition to network boot by having it send out a bootp request to a server
specified with the -S option. The server can be an AIX NIM server serving SPOT resources or any server
serving network boot images. If specified with the -M and -n options, lpar_netboot will return the Media
Access Control (MAC) address and the physical location code for a network adapter of the type specified
with the -t option. When the -m option is specified, lpar_netboot will boot a partition using the network
adapter which has the specified MAC address. When the -l option is specified, lpar_netboot will boot a
partition using the network adapter which has the specified physical location code. The MAC address and
physical location code of a network adapter is dependent upon the hardware resource allocation in the partition profile the partition was booted with. The lpar_netboot command requires arguments for partition
name, partition profile, and the name of the managed system which has the partition.
OPTIONS
Linux
-A
Return all adapters of the type specified with the -t option.
-B
Network boot image filename, required option if IPv6 addresses.
October 2012
1
-C
The IP address of the partition to network boot.
-D
Perform a ping test and use the adapter that successfully pings the server specified with the -S
option.
-E
Set environment variable setting. The -E LPAR_NETBOOT_DEBUG=1 is the same as export
LPAR_NETBOOT_DEBUG=1. See ENVIRONMENT.
-G
The gateway IP address of the partition specified with the -C option.
-K
Subnetmask IP address.
-M
Discover network adapter MAC address and physical location code.
-S
The IP address of the machine from which to retrieve the network boot image during network
boot.
-T
Enable or disble firmware spanning tree discovery. Valid values are on, off.
-V
Specifies the VLAN tag identifier to use for tagging Ethernet frames during network install for virtual network communication. Valid value is from 0 to 4094.
-Y
Specifies the VLAN tag priority to use for tagging Ethernet frames during network install for virtual network communication. Valid value is from 0 to 7.
-a
Network ip addresses for server, client and gateway are IPv6.
-d
The duplex setting of the partition specified with the -C option. Valid values are full, half, and
auto.
-f
Force close the virtual terminal session for the partition.
-g
Specify generic arguments for booting the partition.
-i
Force immediate shutdown of the partition. If this option is not specified, a delayed shutdown will
be performed.
-l
The physical location code of the network adapter to use for network boot.
-m
The MAC address of the network adapter to use for network boot.
-n
Instruct the partition to not network boot.
-s
The speed setting of the partition specified with the -C option. Valid values are 10, 100, 1000, and
auto.
-t
The type of adapter for MAC address or physical location code discovery or for network boot.
The only valid value is ent for ethernet.
-v
Display additional information during command execution.
-x
Display debug output during command execution.
partition-name
The name of the partition.
partition-profile
The name of the partition profile.
managed-system
The name of the managed system which has the partition.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
To retrieve the MAC address and physical location code for partition machA with partition profile
machA_prof on managed system test_sys:
lpar_netboot -M -n -t ent "machA" "machA_prof" "test_sys"
Linux
October 2012
2
To network boot the partition machA with partition profile machA_prof on managed system test_sys:
lpar_netboot -t ent -s auto -d auto -S 9.3.6.49 -G 9.3.6.1 -C 9.3.6.234 "machA" "machA_prof"
"test_sys"
To network boot the partition machA using the network adapter with a MAC address of 00:09:6b:dd:02:e8
with partition profile machA_prof on managed system test_sys:
lpar_netboot -t ent -m 00096bdd02e8 -s auto -d auto -S 9.3.6.49 -G 9.3.6.1 -C 9.3.6.234 "machA"
"machA_prof" "test_sys"
To network boot the partition machA using the network adapter with a physical location code of
U1234.121.A123456-P1-T6 with partition profile machA_prof on managed system test_sys:
lpar_netboot -t ent -l U1234.121.A123456-P1-T6 -s auto -d auto -S 9.3.6.49 -G 9.3.6.1 -C 9.3.6.234
"machA" "machA_prof" "test_sys"
To perform a ping test along with a network boot of the partition machA with partition profile
machA_prof on managed system test_sys:
lpar_netboot -t ent -D -s auto -d auto -S 9.3.6.49 -G 9.3.6.1 -C 9.3.6.234 "machA" "machA_prof"
"test_sys"
To perform ping test along with a network boot of the partition machA with partition profile machA_prof
on managed system test_sys and disable firmware spanning tree discovery:
lpar_netboot -t ent -T off -D -s auto -d auto -S 9.3.6.49 -G 9.3.6.1 -C 9.3.6.234 "machA"
"machA_prof" "test_sys"
ENVIRONMENT
INSTALLIOS_DEBUG
The installios command used this environment variable to print out lpar_netboot debug.
LPAR_NETBOOT_3EXEC
Executing OF "dev /" and "ls" returns nothing, retry reboot and "ls".
LPAR_NETBOOT_DEBUG
Setting this variable will enable lpar_netboot debug. Similar to -x flag.
LPAR_NETBOOT_DEBUG_BOOT
Setting this variable will initate the firmware boot command with -s trap.
LPAR_NETBOOT_ADD_TIMEOUT
Extend timeout value by 5. Ex. LPAR_NETBOOT_ADD_TIMEOUT=5
LPAR_NETBOOT_SUB_TIMEOUT
Lower timeout value by 8. Ex. LPAR_NETBOOT_SUB_TIMEOUT=8
LPAR_NETBOOT_SPANNING_TREE
LPAR_NETBOOT_SPANNING_TREE=on enable spanning tree, LPAR_NETBOOT_SPANNING_TREE=off disable spanning tree. Similar to the -T flag.
OPEN_DEV_DEBUG
Show firmware OPEN_DEV debug by setting value to yes.
FIRMWARE_DUMP
Show firmware dump for firmware debugging by setting value to yes.
Linux
October 2012
3
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsysstate, lssyscfg, mkvterm, rmvterm
Linux
October 2012
4
NAME
lpcfgop - perform a partition configuration image operation
SYNOPSIS
lpcfgop -m managed-system -o {clear | dump} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lpcfgop clears or dumps partition configuration data on the managed-system.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system on which to perform the operation. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are clear or dump.
The clear operation clears all partition configuration data on the managed-system and sets the configuration back to its original state. This operation can only be performed when the managed-system is in the Standby state.
The dump operation dumps all partition configuration data on the managed-system to a file. The
file is written to the /tmp directory on the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Clear the partition configuration data (confirmation will be required):
lpcfgop -m sys1 -o clear
Dump the partition configuration data to a file in /tmp:
lpcfgop -m 9406-520*100132A -o dump
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
May 2004
1
NAME
lsaccfg - list access control configuration information
SYNOPSIS
lsaccfg -t {resource | resourcerole | taskrole}
[--script] [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsaccfg lists managed resource objects, managed resource roles, or task roles.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of access control objects to list. Valid values are resource for managed resource objects,
resourcerole for managed resource roles, and taskrole for task roles.
--script
List managed resource objects in a format that can be used as input to the chaccfg, chhmcusr, and
mkaccfg commands.
This option is only valid when listing managed resource objects.
--filter The filter to apply to the access control objects to be listed. A filter is used to select which access
control objects of the specified type are to be listed. If a filter is not used, then all of the access
control objects of the specified type will be listed. For example, specific task roles can be listed by
using a filter to specify the names of the task roles to list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then all of
the task roles on this Hardware Management Console (HMC) will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for managed resource objects:
resource_type
Specify resource type(s):
cec - managed system objects
lpar - partition objects
Valid filter names for managed resource roles:
resourceroles
Specify managed resource role name(s)
Valid filter names for task roles:
taskroles
Specify task role name(s)
Linux
May 2004
1
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each access control object. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes
for each access control object will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all managed resource objects on this HMC:
lsaccfg -t resource
List only managed partition objects on this HMC:
lsaccfg -t resource --filter "resource_type=lpar"
List all managed resource roles on this HMC:
lsaccfg -t resourcerole
List the managed resource role lpar_role:
lsaccfg -t resourcerole --filter "resourceroles=lpar_role"
List only the names and parents of the task roles on this HMC, and separate the output values with a colon:
lsaccfg -t taskrole -F name:parent
List the task roles tr1 and tr2:
lsaccfg -t taskrole --filter ""taskroles=tr1,tr2""
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chaccfg, mkaccfg, rmaccfg, chhmcusr, lshmcusr
Linux
May 2004
2
NAME
lscod - list Capacity on Demand information
SYNOPSIS
lscod -t {bill | cap | code | hist | util}
-m managed-system
[-c {cuod | mobile | onoff | reserve | trial | trialexc |
trialstd | utility | utilityen | utilityunl}]
[-r {mem | proc}]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lscod lists Capacity on Demand (CoD) information for the managed-system.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of CoD information to list. Valid values are bill for On/Off CoD billing information, cap
for CoD capacity information, code for information used to generate CoD codes, hist for the CoD
history log, and util for shared processor pool utilization information.
-m
The name of the managed system for which CoD information is to be listed. The name may either
be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where tttt is
the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-c
The CoD type. Valid values are cuod for CUoD (permanent), mobile for Mobile CoD, onoff for
On/Off CoD, reserve for Reserve CoD, trial for Trial CoD, utility for Utility CoD or Utility CoD
reporting codes, utilityen for Utility CoD enablement codes, utilityunl for Utility CoD unlimited
codes, trialexc for Trial CoD exception request codes, and trialstd for Trial CoD standard request
codes.
This option is required when listing CoD capacity information or CoD code generation information. If this option is not specified when listing shared processor pool utilization information, this
option defaults to Reserve CoD. This option is not valid when listing the CoD history log.
To list Trial CoD capacity information, specify trial with this option. To list Trial CoD code generation information, specify trialexc or trialstd with this option.
To list Utility CoD capacity information, specify utility with this option. To list Utility CoD code
generation information, specify utility for Utility CoD reporting codes, utilityen for Utility CoD
enablement codes, or utilityunl for Utility CoD unlimited codes.
mobile can only be specified when listing CoD code generation information.
-r
The CoD resource type. Valid values are mem for memory and proc for processors.
This option is required when listing On/Off CoD billing information, CoD capacity information,
CoD code generation information, or shared processor pool utilization information. This option is
not valid when listing the CoD history log.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names representing the desired CoD attribute values to display. If this option is specified without any attribute names, then all of the CoD attributes for the
type of CoD listing specified will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
Linux
November 2012
1
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display On/Off CoD processor billing information:
lscod -m sys1 -t bill -r proc -c onoff
Display CUoD processor capacity information:
lscod -m 9406-570*98127634 -t cap -r proc -c cuod
Display Trial CoD memory capacity information:
lscod -m 9406-570*98127634 -t cap -r mem -c trial
Display the current number of unreturned On/Off CoD processors:
lscod -m sys1 -t cap -r proc -c onoff -F
unreturned_onoff_procs
Display Utility CoD capacity information:
lscod -m sys1 -t cap -r proc -c utility
Display CUoD processor activation code generation information:
lscod -m sys1 -t code -r proc -c cuod
Display Utility CoD reporting code generation information:
lscod -m 9117-MMA*1234321 -t code -r proc -c utility
Display the CoD history log:
lscod -m 9406-570*98127634 -t hist
Display shared processor pool utilization information for Utility CoD:
lscod -m sys1 -t util -r proc -c utility
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chcod, lshwres
Linux
November 2012
2
NAME
lsdump - list dump information
SYNOPSIS
To list the dumps that are available on a managed system or managed frame:
lsdump {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame}
[-r avail] [-s {a | b | p | s}]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]]
To list the managed system dumps and managed frame dumps that are available on the HMC:
lsdump -h [-r avail] [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]]
To list the system dump parameters (POWER6 and later servers only):
lsdump -m managed-system -r parm
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]]
DESCRIPTION
lsdump lists the dumps that are available on the managed-system or the managed-frame. lsdump can also
list the managed system dumps and the managed frame dumps that are available on the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
lsdump also lists the system dump parameters for the managed-system. This is only supported for
POWER6 and later servers.
The getdump command can be used to offload an available dump from the managed-system or the managed-frame to the HMC.
The cpdump command can be used to copy a dump from the HMC to DVD or a remote FTP site.
The rmdump command can be used to remove a dump from the HMC.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which available dumps or system dump parameters are to be
listed. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form
tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial
number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple
managed systems with the same user-defined name.
Either this option, the -e option, or the -h option is required. The -m, -e, and the -h options are
mutually exclusive.
-e
The name of the managed frame for which available dumps are to be listed. The name may either
be the user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is
the type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The ttttmmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined
name.
Either this option, the -m option, or the -h option is required. The -e, -m, and the -h options are
mutually exclusive.
-h
List the managed system dumps and managed frame dumps that are available on the HMC.
Either this option, the -m option, or the -e option is required. The -h, -m, and the -e options are
mutually exclusive.
-r
Linux
The type of dump resources to list. Valid values are avail for available dumps, and parm for system dump parameters. If this option is not specified, available dumps will be listed.
October 2009
1
-s
When listing dumps that are available on a managed frame, use this option to specify the side of
the managed frame’s bulk power assembly (BPA) for which available dumps are to be listed.
Valid values are a for side A and b for side B.
When listing dumps that are available on a managed system, use this option to specify the service
processor for which available dumps are to be listed. Valid values are p for the primary service
processor and s for the secondary service processor. If this option is not specified, available
dumps on the primary service processor will be listed. System dumps and resource dumps are
only available from the primary service processor.
This option is not valid when listing the managed system dumps and managed frame dumps that
are available on the HMC.
--filter The filter to apply to the available dumps to be listed. The filter is used to select the type of dump
that is to be listed. If no filter is specified, then all of the available dumps will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Valid filter names for this command:
dump_type
Only one value may be specified.
Valid values are:
pss
- power subsystem dumps
sp
- service processor dumps
sys
- system dumps
resource - resource dumps
This option is not valid when listing the dumps that are available on a managed system or managed frame, or when listing the system dump parameters.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names representing the desired dump attribute values to display. If this option is specified without any attribute names, then all of the dump attributes will be
displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the dumps that are currently available from the primary service processor on the managed system
9406-520*100128A:
Linux
October 2009
2
lsdump -m 9406-520*100128A
List the dumps that are currently available from the secondary service processor on the managed system
sys1:
lsdump -m sys1 -s s
List the dumps that are currently available on side A of the BPA for the managed frame frame1:
lsdump -e frame1 -s a
List the managed system dumps and managed frame dumps that are currently available on the HMC:
lsdump -h
List only the managed system system dumps that are currently available on the HMC:
lsdump -h --filter "dump_type=sys"
List the system dump parameters for the managed system sys1:
lsdump -m sys1 -r parm
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
cpdump, dump, getdump, rmdump, startdump
Linux
October 2009
3
NAME
lsfru - list FRU information
SYNOPSIS
lsfru -t {nsp | sp} -m managed-system
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsfru lists selected service processor field-replaceable unit (FRU) information for the managed-system.
This command is only supported for POWER6 and later servers.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of FRUs to list. Valid values are nsp for node service processors, and sp for primary and
secondary service processors.
-m
The name of the managed system for which to list FRU information. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each FRU. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each FRU
will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the node service processor FRU information for managed system system1:
lsfru -t nsp -m system1
List the primary and secondary service processor FRU information for managed system
9117-MMA*1234321:
lsfru -t sp -m 9117-MMA*1234321
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
April 2008
1
NAME
lshmc - list Hardware Management Console configuration information
SYNOPSIS
lshmc {-b | -i | -l | -L | -n | -r | -v | -V}
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lshmc lists Hardware Management Console (HMC) configuration information. This command can be used
to list the BIOS level, Integrated Management Module (IMM) settings, current locale, supported locales,
network settings, remote access settings, Vital Product Data (VPD) information, and version information
for the HMC.
OPTIONS
-b
List the BIOS level of the HMC.
This option cannot be specified with the -i, -l, -L, -n, -r, -v, or -V options.
-i
List the Integrated Management Module (IMM) settings for the HMC.
This option cannot be specified with the -b, -l, -L, -n, -r, -v, or -V options.
-l
List the current locale for the HMC.
This option cannot be specified with the -b, -i, -L, -n, -r, -v, or -V options.
-L
List all of the locales supported for the HMC.
This option cannot be specified with the -b, -i, -l, -n, -r, -v, or -V options.
-n
List the network settings for the HMC.
The lshmcldap command can be used to display information about LDAP configuration settings.
This option cannot be specified with the -b, -i, -l, -L, -r, -v, or -V options.
-r
List the remote access settings for the HMC.
This option cannot be specified with the -b, -i, -l, -L, -n, -v, or -V options.
-v
List the VPD information for the HMC.
This option cannot be specified with the -b, -i, -l, -L, -n, -r, or -V options.
-V
List the version information for the HMC.
This option cannot be specified with the -b, -i, -l, -L, -n, -r, or -v options.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names representing the desired attribute values to display. If
this option is specified without any attribute names, then all of the attributes for the type of HMC
configuration information specified will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
Linux
October 2011
1
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display the HMC’s BIOS level:
lshmc -b
Display the HMC’s IMM settings:
lshmc -i
Display the HMC’s current locale:
lshmc -l
Display all locales supported by the HMC:
lshmc -L
Display the HMC’s network settings:
lshmc -n
Display the HMC’s host name and IP address, and separate the output values with a colon:
lshmc -n -F hostname:ipaddr
Display the HMC’s remote access settings:
lshmc -r
Display the HMC’s VPD information:
lshmc -v
Display the HMC’s version information:
lshmc -V
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmc
Linux
October 2011
2
NAME
lshmcencr - list HMC encryptions
SYNOPSIS
lshmcencr -c {passwd | webui} -t {c | a}
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lshmcencr lists the encryptions which are available and the one which is currently used by the Hardware
Management Console (HMC) to encrypt the passwords of locally authenticated HMC users. The current
encryption is used when a new locally authenticated HMC user is created, or when the password for a
locally authenticated HMC user is changed.
lshmcencr also lists the encryptions which are available and those which can currently be used by the
HMC Web user interface. Those encryption names are defined by Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) version 3.
OPTIONS
-c
The encryption configuration to list. Valid values are passwd to list password encryptions for
locally authenticated HMC users, or webui to list encryptions for the HMC Web user interface.
-t
The type of encryptions to list. Valid values are c for currently supported encryption(s), or a for all
available encryptions.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the encryption which is currently used by the HMC to encrypt user passwords when locally authenticated HMC users are created, or when the passwords for locally authenticated HMC users are changed:
lshmcencr -c passwd -t c
List all available HMC password encryptions:
lshmcencr -c passwd -t a
List the encryptions which can currently be used by the HMC Web user interface:
lshmcencr -c webui -t c
List all available encryptions for the HMC Web user interface:
lshmcencr -c webui -t a
Linux
October 2009
1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmcencr
Linux
October 2009
2
NAME
lshmcfs - list HMC file system information
SYNOPSIS
lshmcfs [-o c {-d days | -h hours | -s size}]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lshmcfs lists Hardware Management Console (HMC) file system disk space usage information. Disk space
usage information is listed for the HMC file systems that can contain temporary HMC files used for HMC
and managed system firmware problem analysis.
This command lists information for the following file systems: /var, /dump, /extra, and /. The temporary
files in the /var file system include HMC trace and log files. The temporary files in the /dump file system
include managed system dumps, managed frame dumps, and debug data collected using the HMC pedbg
command. The temporary files in the /extra file system include managed system dumps and managed
frame dumps. The temporary files in the / file system include HMC Java core dump and heap dump files,
and HMC trace files for Power system firmware updates.
All size and free space values displayed by this command are in megabytes.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. The only valid value is c to calculate and list the amount of disk space
that can be freed in each file system by removing temporary HMC files from the hard disk.
This command will not remove any files. The chhmcfs command can be used to remove the files.
If this option is omitted, current disk space usage information is listed.
-d
List the amount of space that can be freed if files, which have not been modified during the specified number of days prior to now, were removed.
To list the amount of space that can be freed if all temporary HMC files, other than the trace and
log files that are in use, were removed, specify 0 with this option.
Specifying -d 1 is equivalent to specifying -h 24.
When -o c is specified to calculate and list the amount of disk space that can be freed, this option,
the -h option, or the -s option must be specified to indicate which files should be considered for
removal. The -d, -h, and -s options are mutually exclusive.
-h
List the amount of space that can be freed if files, which have not been modified during the specified number of hours prior to now, were removed.
To list the amount of space that can be freed if all temporary HMC files, other than the trace and
log files that are in use, were removed, specify 0 with this option.
When -o c is specified to calculate and list the amount of disk space that can be freed, this option,
the -d option, or the -s option must be specified to indicate which files should be considered for
removal. The -d, -h, and -s options are mutually exclusive.
-s
List the amount of space that can be freed if files, starting with the oldest file, were removed from
each file system to free up to size megabytes in each file system. The trace and log files that are in
use would not be included.
When -o c is specified to calculate and list the amount of disk space that can be freed, this option,
the -d option, or the -h option must be specified to indicate which files should be considered for
removal. The -d, -h, and -s options are mutually exclusive.
Linux
May 2011
1
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each file system. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the file system attributes
will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List current HMC file system disk space usage information:
lshmcfs
List HMC file system disk space usage information if temporary HMC files which have not been modified
during the last 2 days (48 hours) were removed:
lshmcfs -o c -d 2
List HMC file system disk space usage information if all temporary HMC files, except the trace and log
files that are in use, were removed:
lshmcfs -o c -d 0
List HMC file system disk space usage information if temporary HMC files were removed to free up to 100
MB in each file system:
lshmcfs -o c -s 100
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmcfs
Linux
May 2011
2
NAME
lshmcldap - list LDAP information
SYNOPSIS
lshmcldap -r {config | user} [-v] [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lshmcldap lists Hardware Management Console (HMC) Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
configuration information. lshmcldap can also list LDAP user information from the LDAP server.
OPTIONS
-r
The LDAP resources to list. Valid values are config to list HMC LDAP configuration information,
and user to list LDAP user information from the LDAP server.
-v
When this option is specified, command execution details are output to stderr.
--filter The filter to apply to the LDAP users to be listed. The filter is used to select which LDAP users to
list. If no filter is used, then all LDAP users will be listed.
The filter data consists of a filter name/value pair, which is in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Valid filter names:
names
Specify one or more user names.
LDAP users whose login attribute values match the names specified will be listed. Which login
attribute to use can be configured using the chhmcldap command.
This option is only valid when listing LDAP user information.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the HMC LDAP configuration:
Linux
April 2008
1
lshmcldap -r config
List all LDAP users on the LDAP server:
lshmcldap -r user
List LDAP users uname1 and uname2 and output command execution details to stderr:
lshmcldap -r user --filter ""names=uname1,uname2"" -v
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmcldap, lshmcusr
Linux
April 2008
2
NAME
lshmcusr - list Hardware Management Console user information
SYNOPSIS
lshmcusr [--script] [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lshmcusr lists Hardware Management Console (HMC) user information.
OPTIONS
--script
List managed resource objects in a format that can be used as input to the chhmcusr, chaccfg, and
mkaccfg commands.
--filter The filter to apply to the HMC users to be listed. A filter is used to select which HMC users are to
be listed. If a filter is not used, then all HMC users will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for this command:
names
Specify user name(s)
resources
Specify managed resource object(s)
resourceroles
Specify managed resource role name(s)
taskroles
Specify task role name(s)
password_encryptions
Specify password encryption(s)
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each HMC user. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each
HMC user will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Linux
October 2009
1
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all HMC users:
lshmcusr
List only the user names and managed resource roles for all HMC users, and separate the output values
with a colon:
lshmcusr -F name:resourcerole
List the HMC users hscroot and user1:
lshmcusr --filter ""names=hscroot,user1""
List the HMC users with the task role hmcviewer and the managed resource role mr1:
lshmcusr --filter "taskroles=hmcviewer,resourceroles=mr1"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmcusr, mkhmcusr, rmhmcusr, lsaccfg
Linux
October 2009
2
NAME
lshwinfo - list environmental information
SYNOPSIS
lshwinfo -r {frame | sys} -e managed-frame [-s {a | b }]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lshwinfo lists environmental information, such as input power levels, for the managed-frame. The lshwinfo
command also lists environmental information, such as ambient air temperatures, for systems contained in
the managed-frame.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of resource for which to list environmental information. Valid values are frame for managed frame and sys for systems contained in a managed frame.
-e
The name of the managed frame for which to list environmental information. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where
tttt is the type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same userdefined name.
-s
Use this option to specify the side of the managed frame’s bulk power assembly (BPA) for which
to list environmental information. Valid values are a for side A and b for side B. If this option is
omitted, environmental information for side A will be listed.
This option is only valid when listing environmental information for a managed frame.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display environmental information for side A of the BPA for the managed frame myFrame:
lshwinfo -r frame -e myFrame
Display environmental information for side B of the BPA for the managed frame myFrame:
lshwinfo -r frame -e myFrame -s b
Display environmental information for the systems contained in the managed frame 9119-595*020000A:
lshwinfo -r sys -e 9119-595*020000A
Linux
April 2008
1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
April 2008
2
NAME
lshwres - list hardware resources
SYNOPSIS
To list physical I/O resources:
lshwres -r io --rsubtype {unit | bus | slot |
iopool | taggedio | slotchildren}
-m managed-system
[--level {pool | sys}] [-R]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list virtual I/O resources:
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype {eth | fc | hsl |
virtualopti | scsi | serial | slot | vswitch}
-m managed-system
[--level {lpar | slot | sys}]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list memory resources:
lshwres -r mem -m managed-system
--level {lpar | sys} [-R]
[--maxmem quantity [--hptratio ratio]]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list I/O entitled memory statistics for a partition:
lshwres -r mem -m managed-system --level lpar
--filter "filter-data" --stat
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list shared memory pool resources:
lshwres -r mempool -m managed-system [--rsubtype pgdev]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list reserved storage device pool resources (only supported on managed systems that support partition
suspend and resume operations):
lshwres -r rspool -m managed-system [--rsubtype rsdev]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list processing resources:
lshwres -r proc -m managed-system
--level {lpar | pool | sys} [-R]
[--procunits quantity]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list shared processor pool resources on a managed system that supports multiple shared processor pools:
lshwres -r procpool -m managed-system
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
Linux
May 2011
1
To list Host Channel adapter (HCA) resources:
lshwres -r hca -m managed-system
--level {lpar | sys}
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list Host Ethernet adapter (HEA) resources:
lshwres -r hea -m managed-system
--rsubtype {logical | phys}
--level {port | port_group | sys}
[-R] [--stat]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list Switch Network Interface (SNI) adapter resources:
lshwres -r sni -m managed-system
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lshwres lists the hardware resources of the managed-system, including physical I/O, virtual I/O, memory,
shared memory pool, processing, shared processor pool, Host Channel adapter (HCA), Host Ethernet
adapter (HEA), and Switch Network Interface (SNI) adapter resources.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of hardware resources to list. Valid values are io for physical I/O, virtualio for virtual
I/O, mem for memory, mempool for shared memory pool, rspool for reserved storage device
pool, proc for processing, procpool for shared processor pool, hca for HCA, hea for HEA, and
sni for SNI adapter resources.
The procpool resource type is only supported for managed systems that support multiple shared
processor pools.
The rspool resource type is only supported for managed systems that support partition suspend
and resume operations.
--rsubtype
The subtype of hardware resources to list. Valid physical I/O resource subtypes are unit for I/O
units, bus for I/O buses, slot for I/O slots, iopool for I/O pools, taggedio for tagged I/O, and
slotchildren for I/O slot children resources. Valid virtual I/O resource subtypes are eth for virtual
ethernet, fc for virtual fibre channel, hsl for High Speed Link (HSL) OptiConnect, virtualopti for
virtual OptiConnect, scsi for virtual SCSI, serial for virtual serial, slot for virtual slot, and vswitch
for virtual switch resources. Valid HEA resource subtypes are logical for logical HEA resources,
and phys for physical HEA resources.
The only valid shared memory pool resource subtype is pgdev for paging space devices. The only
valid reserved storage device pool subtype is rsdev for reserved storage devices. On a managed
system that supports Active Memory Sharing and partition suspend and resume operations, the
command lshwres -m managed-system -r mempool --rsubtype pgdev lists the devices in the
reserved storage device pool, and is equivalent to the command lshwres -m managed-system -r
rspool --rsubtype rsdev.
This option is required when listing physical I/O, virtual I/O, or HEA resources. This option is not
valid when listing memory, processing, shared processor pool, HCA, or SNI adapter resources.
-m
Linux
The name of the managed system which has the hardware resources to list. The name may either
be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt
May 2011
2
is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same
user-defined name.
--level
The level of information to list. Valid values are lpar for partition, pool for pool, port for port,
port_group for port group, slot for slot, and sys for system.
This option is required when listing I/O pool resources, virtual ethernet, fibre channel, serial, or
slot resources, or memory, processing, HCA, or HEA resources.
Valid levels for I/O pool resources are pool or sys. Valid levels for virtual ethernet resources are
lpar or sys. Valid levels for virtual fibre channel resources are lpar or sys. Valid levels for virtual
serial resources are lpar. Valid levels for virtual slot resources are lpar, slot, or sys. Valid levels
for memory resources are lpar or sys. Valid levels for processing resources are lpar, pool, or sys.
Valid levels for HCA resources are lpar or sys. Valid levels for physical HEA resources are port,
port_group, or sys. Valid levels for logical HEA resources are port or sys.
-R
Only list information for partitions with hardware resources that can be restored due to a dynamic
logical partitioning (DLPAR) operation failure.
The rsthwres command can be used to restore those hardware resources.
This option is only valid for listing physical I/O slots, partition level memory or processing
resources, or logical HEA resources.
--maxmem
When this option is specified, the required minimum memory amount needed for partitions to support the maximum memory quantity and Hardware Page Table ratio specified is listed. All memory quantities are in megabytes, and are a multiple of the memory region size for the managed-system.
This information is useful for specifying memory amounts in partition profiles.
The required minimum memory amount listed is the minimum memory amount required for a partition by the managed system’s system firmware. An operating system installed on the partition
may require more memory than the amount listed.
This option is only valid when listing system level memory resources.
--hptratio
The ratio of the Hardware Page Table (HPT) size to the maximum memory for a partition. Valid
values for the managed-system are displayed by the lshwres -r mem -m managed-system --level
sys -F possible_hpt_ratios command.
If this option is not used to specify an HPT ratio, the default HPT ratio for the managed-system is
used.
This option is only valid when used with the --maxmem option.
--procunits
When this option is specified, the range of optimal 5250 CPW percentages for partitions assigned
the quantity of processing units specified is listed. The quantity of processing units specified can
have up to 2 decimal places.
This information is useful when specifying the 5250 CPW percentages for partitions or partition
profiles.
Linux
May 2011
3
This option is only valid when listing system level processing resources. Also, this option is only
valid when the managed-system supports the assignment of 5250 CPW percentages to partitions.
--stat
When this option is specified when listing HEA physical port resources, port counter statistics for
HEA physical ports are listed.
When this option is specified when listing partition level memory resources, I/O entitled memory
statistics are listed.
This option is only valid when listing HEA physical port resources or partition level memory
resources.
--filter The filter(s) to apply to the hardware resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which hardware resources of the specified type are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of the hardware
resources of the specified type will be listed. For example, all of the physical I/O slots on a specific I/O unit and bus can be listed by using a filter to specify the I/O unit and the bus which has
the slots to list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then all of the physical I/O slots in the managed
system will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Unless otherwise indicated, multiple values can be specified for each filter.
When listing I/O entitled memory statistics for a partition, this parameter is required, and exactly
one partition name or ID must be specified with the lpar_names or lpar_ids filter.
Valid filter names for this command:
adapter_ids
Specify HCA or HEA adapter ID(s)
buses
Specify I/O bus ID(s)
lpar_ids
Specify partition ID(s)
lpar_names
Specify partition user-defined name(s)
pool_names
Specify pool name(s)
pools
Specify pool ID(s)
port_groups
Specify HEA port group(s)
slots
Specify physical I/O slot DRC index(ices)
Linux
May 2011
4
or virtual I/O slot number(s)
sni_device_ids
Specify SNI adapter device ID(s)
units
Specify I/O unit physical location
code(s)
vlans
Specify virtual LAN ID(s)
vswitches
Specify virtual switch name(s)
Valid filters with -r io --rsubtype unit:
units
Valid filters with -r io --rsubtype bus:
buses, units
Valid filters with -r io --rsubtype slot:
buses, lpar_ids | lpar_names, pools, slots,
units
Valid filters with -r io --rsubtype iopool --level pool:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, pools
Valid filters with -r io --rsubtype taggedio:
lpar_ids | lpar_names
Valid filters with -r io --rsubtype slotchildren:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, slots
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level lpar:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, slots, vlans, vswitches
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype fc --level lpar:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, slots
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype hsl:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, pools
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype virtualopti:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, pools
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype scsi:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, slots
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype serial --level lpar:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, slots
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level lpar:
lpar_ids | lpar_names
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level slot:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, slots
Linux
May 2011
5
Valid filters with -r virtualio --rsubtype vswitch:
vlans, vswitches
Valid filters with -r mem --level lpar:
lpar_ids | lpar_names
Valid filters with -r mempool --rsubtype pgdev:
lpar_ids | lpar_names
Specify none for lpar_ids to list all
devices that are not assigned to a partition
Valid filters with -r rspool --rsubtype rsdev:
lpar_ids | lpar_names
Specify none for lpar_ids to list all
devices that are not assigned to a partition
Valid filters with -r proc --level lpar:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, pools | pool_names
Valid filters with -r procpool:
pools | pool_names
Valid filters with -r hca --level sys:
adapter_ids
Valid filters with -r hca --level lpar:
adapter_ids, lpar_ids | lpar_names
Valid filters with -r hea --rsubtype logical --level sys:
adapter_ids, lpar_ids | lpar_names
Valid filters with -r hea --rsubtype logical --level port:
adapter_ids, lpar_ids | lpar_names,
port_groups
Valid filters with -r hea --rsubtype phys --level sys:
adapter_ids
Valid filters with -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port:
adapter_ids, port_groups
Valid filters with -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port_group:
adapter_ids, port_groups
Valid filters with -r sni:
lpar_ids | lpar_names, sni_device_ids
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each hardware resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for
each hardware resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
Linux
May 2011
6
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Descriptions of selected command attributes:
topology
A comma separated list of the end-to-end device
mappings for each virtual device. This is displayed
for virtual SCSI and virtual fibre channel adapters
when specified with the -F option.
For virtual SCSI, each device mapping has the
following format:
virtual-device/state/virtual-SCSI-client-device/
virtual-SCSI-server-adapter/storage-pool/
backing-device
where virtual-device is the name of the virtual device
on the client operating system (will be an empty
string for virtual SCSI server adapters), state is the
state of the virtual device on the client operating
system (will be an empty string for virtual SCSI
server adapters), virtual-SCSI-client-device is the
name of the virtual SCSI client device on the client
operating system (will be an empty string for virtual
SCSI server adapters), virtual-SCSI-server-adapter is
the name of the virtual SCSI server adapter on the
Virtual I/O Server (VIOS), storage-pool is the name of
the storage pool containing the backing device on the
VIOS (will be an empty string if the backing device is
not in a storage pool), and backing-device is the name
of the backing device on the VIOS.
For virtual fibre channel, each device mapping has the
following format:
virtual-device/state/virtual-FC-client-device/
virtual-FC-server-adapter/physical-port
where virtual-device is the name of the virtual device
on the client operating system (will be an empty
string for virtual fibre channel server adapters),
state is the state of the virtual device on the client
operating system (will be an empty string for virtual
fibre channel server adapters), virtual-FC-clientdevice is the name of the virtual fibre channel client
device on the client operating system (will be an
empty string for virtual fibre channel server
adapters), virtual-FC-server-adapter is the name of
the virtual fibre channel server adapter on the VIOS,
and physical-port is the name of the physical fibre
channel port to which this device is backed.
Linux
May 2011
7
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all I/O units on the managed system:
lshwres -r io --rsubtype unit -m system1
List all buses on I/O unit U787A.001.0395036:
lshwres -r io --rsubtype bus -m 9406-570*12345678
--filter "units=U787A.001.0395036"
List only the DRC index, description, and the owning partition for each physical I/O slot on buses 2 and 3
of I/O unit U787A.001.0395036:
lshwres -r io --rsubtype slot -m system1 --filter
"units=U787A.001.0395036,"buses=2,3"" -F drc_index,
description,lpar_name
List all I/O pools and the partitions and slots assigned to each I/O pool:
lshwres -r io --rsubtype iopool -m system1 --level pool
List the tagged I/O devices for the IBM i partition that has an ID of 1:
lshwres -r io --rsubtype taggedio -m 9406-520*100103A
--filter "lpar_ids=1"
List the I/O slot children for the I/O slot with DRC index 21010207:
lshwres -r io --rsubtype slotchildren -m 9117-MMA*107791F
--filter "slots=21010207"
List all virtual ethernet adapters on the managed system:
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level lpar -m
system1
List all virtual SCSI adapters on the managed system, and only display attribute values for each adapter,
following a header of attribute names:
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype scsi -m system1 -F
--header
List all virtual slots for partition lpar1:
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype slot -m system1 --level
slot --filter "lpar_names=lpar1"
List all virtual switches on the managed system:
Linux
May 2011
8
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype vswitch -m system1
List system level memory information:
lshwres -r mem -m 9406-570*98765432 --level sys
List recoverable memory information:
lshwres -r mem -m 9406-570*98765432 --level lpar -R
List memory information for partitions lpar1 and lpar2:
lshwres -r mem -m system1 --level lpar --filter
""lpar_names=lpar_1,lpar_2""
List only the installed and configurable processors on the system, and separate the output values with a
colon:
lshwres -r proc -m 9406-570*98765432 --level sys -F
installed_sys_proc_units:configurable_sys_proc_units
List I/O entitled memory statistics for partition lpar1:
lshwres -r mem -m system1 --level lpar --filter "lpar_names=lpar_1"
--stat
List the shared memory pool:
lshwres -r mempool -m system1
List all of the devices in the shared memory pool (on managed systems that support partition suspend and
resume operations, this lists all of the devices in the reserved storage device pool):
lshwres -r mempool -m system1 --rsubtype pgdev
List the reserved storage device pool:
lshwres -r rspool -m 8233-E8B*1234321
List all of the devices in the reserved storage device pool:
lshwres -r rspool -m system1 --rsubtype rsdev
List processing resources for all partitions:
lshwres -r proc -m system1 --level lpar
List the physical processor pool:
lshwres -r proc -m system1 --level pool
List all configured shared processor pools in the managed system:
lshwres -r procpool -m system1
Linux
May 2011
9
List all HCAs on the managed system:
lshwres -r hca -m 9117-570*12345678 --level sys
List all HCAs assigned to partition AIX1:
lshwres -r hca -m 9117-570*12345678 --level lpar
--filter "lpar_names=AIX1"
List all physical HEAs on the managed system:
lshwres -r hea -m mySys --rsubtype phys --level sys
List all port groups for all HEAs on the managed system:
lshwres -r hea -m mySys --rsubtype phys --level port_group
List all physical ports belonging to port group 2 for the HEA with adapter ID 23000010:
lshwres -r hea -m 9117-MMA*1234ABC --rsubtype phys
--level port --filter "adapter_ids=23000010,
port_groups=2"
List all Logical Host Ethernet adapters (LHEA) on the managed system:
lshwres -r hea -m mySys --rsubtype logical --level sys
List all HEA logical ports assigned to partition p1:
lshwres -r hea -m mySys --rsubtype logical --level port
--filter "lpar_names=p1"
List all SNI adapters on the managed system:
lshwres -r sni -m system1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhwres, rsthwres, lssyscfg
Linux
May 2011
10
NAME
lsiotopo - list I/O topology
SYNOPSIS
lsiotopo -m managed-system [-r {slot | hea}] [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsiotopo lists the physical I/O slot and logical Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA) topology of the managed-system.
lsiotopo is useful for displaying the I/O topology of multi-node managed systems.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to list the I/O topology. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-r
The type of I/O resources to list. Valid values are slot to list physical I/O slot topology only, and
hea to list logical HEA topology only. If this option is omitted, both the physical I/O slot and logical HEA topology will be listed.
--filter The filters to apply to the I/O resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which I/O resources
are to be listed. For example, to list only the physical I/O slots in a specific system enclosure and
fabric bus, use the sys_enclosures and fabric_bus_ids filters.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for this command:
sys_enclosures
Specify system enclosure location codes
slot_enclosures
Specify I/O resource enclosure location codes
fabric_bus_ids
Specify fabric bus IDs
owner_lpar_names
Specify I/O resource owner partition user-defined
names
owner_lpar_ids
Specify I/O resource owner partition IDs
Linux
August 2011
1
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each I/O resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each
I/O resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which is specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the physical I/O slot topology of the managed system:
lsiotopo -m system1 -r slot
List the physical I/O slot and logical HEA topology of the managed system:
lsiotopo -m system1
List only the system enclosure, slot enclosure, owner partition ID, and description, separated by a space, for
each physical I/O slot on fabric buses 1920 and 1672 of system enclosure U78A2.001.992002Y-P9:
lsiotopo -m system1 -r slot -F sys_enclosure slot_enclosure
owner_lpar_id description --filter "sys_enclosures=
U78A2.001.992002Y-P9,"fabric_bus_ids=1920,1672""
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshwres
Linux
August 2011
2
NAME
lsipsec - list IPsec connection information
SYNOPSIS
lsipsec {-l | -c connection-name | --status connection-name |
--statusall}
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsipsec lists Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) connection information for the Hardware Management Console.
OPTIONS
-l
Specify this option to list all existing IPsec connection names.
This option cannot be specified with the -c, --status, or --statusall options.
-c
Specify this option to list connection configuration details for connection-name.
This option cannot be specified with the -l, --status, or --statusall options.
--status
Specify this option to list connection status for connection-name.
This option cannot be specified with the -l, -c, or --statusall options.
--statusall
Specify this option to list IPsec daemon status and detailed connection status for all IPsec connections.
This option cannot be specified with the -l, -c, or --status options.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all existing IPsec connection names:
lsipsec -l
List the configuration of IPsec connection sys1:
lsipsec -c sys1
List the status of IPsec connection j21:
Linux
May 2011
1
lsipsec --status j21
List detailed status information for the IPsec daemon and all IPsec connections:
lsipsec --statusall
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chipsec
Linux
May 2011
2
NAME
lsled - list LEDs
SYNOPSIS
lsled -r sa -t {phys | virtuallpar | virtualsys}
-m managed-system [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsled lists LED information for the managed-system.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of LED resources to list. The only valid value is sa for System Attention (SA) LEDs.
-t
The type of System Attention (SA) LEDs to list. Valid values are phys for the physical SA LED
for the managed-system, virtuallpar for virtual partition SA LEDs, or virtualsys for the virtual
SA LED for the managed-system.
-m
The name of the managed system which has the LEDs to list. The name may either be the userdefined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
--filter The filter to apply to the virtual partition SA LEDs to be listed. A filter is used to select which virtual partition SA LEDs are to be listed. If no filter is used, then all of the virtual partition SA
LEDs for the managed-system will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Valid filter names for this command are lpar_names or lpar_ids. Only one of these filters may be
specified. Multiple partitions can be specified with the filter.
This option is not valid when listing the physical SA LED or the virtual SA LED for the managedsystem.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each LED. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each LED
will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Linux
May 2004
1
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display the physical SA LED for the system:
lsled -m 9406-579*100103C -r sa -t phys
Display all of the virtual partition SA LEDs:
lsled -m system1 -r sa -t virtuallpar
Display the virtual partition SA LEDs for partitions lpar1 and lpar2:
lsled -m system1 -r sa -t virtuallpar --filter
""lpar_names=lpar1,lpar2""
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chled
Linux
May 2004
2
NAME
lslic - list Licensed Internal Code levels
SYNOPSIS
lslic {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] | -w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower | powerfru}]
[-r {ibmwebsite | ftp | dvd | disk | mountpoint | usb}
[-h host-name] [-u user-ID] [--passwd password]
[-d directory]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lslic lists Licensed Internal Code (LIC) levels installed, activated, and accepted. The LIC levels that are
available to be retrieved from a repository can also be listed.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which LIC levels are to be listed. The name may either be
the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is
the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same
user-defined name.
-e
The name of the managed frame for which LIC levels are to be listed. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The ttttmmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined
name.
-w
List Licensed Internal Code levels for all managed frames which contain High Performance
Switches.
--allsystems
List Licensed Internal Code levels on all managed systems in the managed frame specified on the
-e option.
-t
The type of LIC levels to list. Valid values are sys for Managed System LIC levels only, power
for Power LIC levels only, syspower for both Managed System and Power LIC levels, or powerfru for Power FRU levels.
If this option is omitted, it will default to syspower for the -m and -e --allsystems options, and
will default to power for the -e and -w options.
-r
The repository to query for LIC levels that are available to be retrieved. Valid values are ibmwebsite for the IBM service Internet site, ftp for a remote FTP site, dvd for the DVD drive on the
Management Console, disk for the internal hard disk drive on the Management Console, mountpoint for the specified mountpoint, or usb for a USB flash memory device.
-h
The host name or IP address of the remote FTP server.
This option is required when displaying LIC levels that are available to be retrieved from a remote
FTP site. This option is not valid otherwise.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the remote FTP site.
This option is required when displaying LIC levels that are available to be retrieved from a remote
FTP site. This option is not valid otherwise.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the remote FTP site. If this option is omitted, you will be
prompted to enter the password.
Linux
October 2009
1
This option is only valid when displaying LIC levels that are available to be retrieved from a
remote FTP site.
-d
The mountpoint location or the directory to use on the remote FTP site. If this option is not specified for FTP, then the /opt/ccfw/data directory will be used.
This option is only valid when displaying LIC levels that are available to be retrieved from a
mountpoint or a remote FTP site.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each LIC level. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each
LIC level will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display Managed System LIC levels:
lslic -t sys -m mysystem
Display Power LIC levels:
lslic -t power -m 9406-570*1020304
Display Managed System and Power LIC levels and display levels available on the IBM service Internet
site:
lslic -t syspower -m mysystem -r ibmwebsite
Display Managed System LIC levels and display levels available from a remote FTP server:
lslic -t sys -m mysystem -r ftp -h ftphost.domainname
-u myuser --passwd mypasswd
Display Managed System and Power LIC levels for all managed systems in the managed frame:
lslic -e myframe --allsystems -t syspower
Display LIC levels for all managed frames which contain High Performance Switches:
lslic -w
Display LIC levels for all managed frames which contain High Performance Switches and display levels
available on the IBM service Internet site:
Linux
October 2009
2
lslic -w -r ibmwebsite
Display Power FRU levels for a managed system:
lslic -m mysystem -t powerfru
Display Power FRU levels for a managed frame:
lslic -e 9458-100*02AB33C -t powerfru
Display Power FRU levels for all managed frames which contain High Performance Switches:
lslic -w -t powerfru
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
updlic
Linux
October 2009
3
NAME
lslock - list lock information
SYNOPSIS
lslock -e managed-frame
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lslock lists which Hardware Management Console (HMC) owns the lock on the managed-frame. If the
managed-frame is not locked, then "No results were found." will be displayed.
OPTIONS
-e
The name of the managed frame for which to list lock information. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The ttttmmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined
name.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display which HMC owns the lock on the managed frame myFrame:
lslock -e myFrame
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
rmlock
Linux
April 2005
1
NAME
lslogon - list logon information
SYNOPSIS
lslogon -r {webui | ssh} {-t | -u} [-F [attribute-names] [--header]]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
lslogon lists the logged on users or the tasks they are running on the Hardware Management Console
(HMC).
OPTIONS
-r
The type of logon information to list. Valid values are webui for Web user interface users or tasks,
or ssh for SSH users or tasks.
-t
Specify this option to list information about the tasks that the users logged onto the HMC are running.
Either this option or the -u option is required. The -t and -u options are mutually exclusive.
-u
Specify this option to list information about the users logged onto the HMC.
Either this option or the -t option is required. The -u and -t options are mutually exclusive.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all of the tasks that users logged onto the HMC Web user interface are running:
lslogon -r webui -t
List all of the users remotely logged onto the HMC via SSH:
lslogon -r ssh -u
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
termtask
Linux
November 2008
1
NAME
lslparmigr - list partition migration information
SYNOPSIS
lslparmigr -r {lpar | mc | mempool | msp | procpool | sys |
virtualio}
[-m managed-system]
[-t target-managed-system [--ip IP-address [-u user-ID]]]
[--redundantvios {0 | 1 | 2}] [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lslparmigr lists partition migration information.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of resources for which to list partition migration information.
Specify lpar to list partition migration information for all of the partitions in managed-system.
Specify mc to list partition mobility capabilities for the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
Specify mempool to list shared memory pool information for the destination managed system.
Shared memory pool information is only listed if the shared memory pool has enough available
memory for the partition specified with the lpar_names or lpar_ids filter, if there is an available
paging space device for the partition, and if the paging VIOS redundancy requirement of the partition can be satisfied. The redundant attribute that is listed indicates whether or not the partition
would be configured to use redundant paging VIOS partitions on the destination managed system
(a value of 0 indicates the partition would be configured to not use redundant paging VIOS partitions, and a value of 1 indicates the partition would be configured to use redundant paging VIOS
partitions).
Specify msp to list possible source and destination mover service partition (MSP) pairs for active
partition migration of the partitions specified with the lpar_names or lpar_ids filter.
Specify procpool to list possible shared processor pools in the destination managed system that
have enough available processing resources for the partition specified with the lpar_names or
lpar_ids filter.
Specify sys to list the partition mobility capabilities for managed-system.
Specify virtualio to list possible and suggested mappings of the virtual fibre channel adapters and
virtual SCSI adapters in the partition specified with the lpar_names or lpar_ids filter to virtual
I/O servers in the destination managed system.
-m
The name of the managed system for which to list partition migration information. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where
tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
When listing shared memory pool, mover service partition, shared processor pool, or virtual I/O
information, specify the source managed system for the partition migration with this option.
This option is not valid when listing partition mobility capabilities for the HMC. This option is
required when listing all other types of partition migration information.
Linux
November 2012
1
-t
The name of the target, or destination, managed system for the partition migration. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where
tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
This option is required when listing shared memory pool, mover service partition, shared processor pool, or virtual I/O information. This option is not valid when listing any other type of partition migration information.
--ip
If the destination managed system is not managed by the same management console that is managing the source managed system, then use this option to specify the IP address or host name of the
management console that is managing the destination managed system.
To use this option, SSH must be enabled on both management consoles. Also, you must run the
mkauthkeys command once to set up SSH key authentication.
-u
If the destination managed system is not managed by the same management console that is managing the source managed system, then use this option to specify the user ID to use on the management console that is managing the destination managed system. If you do not specify the user ID,
then the user ID of the user that issues this command will be used.
--redundantvios,--redundantpgvios
When listing shared memory pool information, use this option to specify the paging VIOS redundancy requirement for the partition on the destination managed system. Valid values are 0 if the
partition is not to use redundant paging VIOS partitions, 1 if the partition is required to use redundant paging VIOS partitions, or 2 if the partition is to use redundant paging VIOS partitions if possible.
This option is only valid when listing shared memory pool information. If this option is not specified when listing shared memory pool information, then the partition is required to use the same
paging VIOS redundancy configuration on the destination managed system that the partition is
currently using on the source managed system.
The --redundantvios and --redundantpgvios options are equivalent. The --redundantpgvios
option is deprecated.
--filter The filter(s) to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which resources are to
be listed. If no filters are used, then all of the resources will be listed. For example, partition
information can be listed by using a filter to specify the names or IDs of the partitions to list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then information for all of the partitions in the managed system will be
listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Linux
November 2012
2
Valid filter names:
lpar_names | lpar_ids
One of these filters is required when listing shared
memory pool, mover service partition, shared
processor pool, or virtual I/O information. When
listing shared memory pool, shared processor pool,
or virtual I/O information, only one partition can
be specified. These filters are optional when
listing partition information, and if specified,
multiple partitions can be specified.
dest_sys_names
The user-defined name or the machine type, model,
and serial number (tttt-mmm*sssssss) for one
or more destination managed systems. This filter
is only valid when listing partition information.
The lpar_names, lpar_ids, and dest_sys_names filters are mutually exclusive.
This option is not valid when listing HMC or managed system information.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List partition migration information for all partitions in the managed system system1:
lslparmigr -r lpar -m system1
List partition migration information for all partitions in the managed system system1 that are currently
migrating or waiting to migrate to managed system system2:
lslparmigr -r lpar -m system1 --filter "dest_sys_names=system2"
List the shared memory pool information for managed system system2 for partition lpar1 if lpar1 is to use
redundant paging VIOS partitions on system2 if possible:
lslparmigr -r mempool -m system1 -t system2 --filter "lpar_names=lpar1"
--redundantvios 2
List possible source and destination MSP pairs for migrating partition lpar1 from managed system system1
to managed system system2:
Linux
November 2012
3
lslparmigr -r msp -m system1 -t system2 --filter "lpar_names=lpar1"
List possible shared processor pools in managed system system2 that partition lpar1 can use when it is
migrated from managed system system1 to system2:
lslparmigr -r procpool -m system1 -t system2 --filter
"lpar_names=lpar1"
List the partition mobility capabilities for managed system system1:
lslparmigr -r sys -m system1
List possible and suggested mappings of the virtual fibre channel and virtual SCSI adapters in the partition
with ID 1 to virtual I/O servers in managed system system2:
lslparmigr -r virtualio -m system1 -t system2 --filter "lpar_ids=1"
List possible and suggested mappings of the virtual fibre channel and virtual SCSI adapters in partition aix1
to virtual I/O servers in managed system system2, when system2 is managed by the HMC with host name
hmc2:
mkauthkeys --ip hmc2 -u hmc2user
lslparmigr -r virtualio -m system1 -t system2 --ip hmc2 -u hmc2user
--filter "lpar_names=aix1"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
migrlpar, mkauthkeys
Linux
November 2012
4
NAME
lslparutil - list utilization data
SYNOPSIS
To list utilization data collected for a managed system:
lslparutil -r {hmc | lpar | pool | procpool | mempool |
sys | all}
-m managed-system
[-d number-of-days] [-h number-of-hours]
[--minutes number-of-minutes]
[--startyear year] [--startmonth month]
[--startday day] [--starthour hour]
[--startminute minute] [--endyear year]
[--endmonth month] [--endday day]
[--endhour hour] [--endminute minute]
[-n number-of-events] [-s sample-rate]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
To list HMC settings for utilization data collection:
lslparutil -r config [-m managed-system]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lslparutil lists utilization data collected for a managed-system. This command also lists the Hardware Management Console (HMC) settings for utilization data collection.
The HMC collects the following types of utilization data: sampling events, state change events, configuration change events, and Utility Capacity on Demand (CoD) processor usage events.
Sampling events are collected for the managed system, for each partition in the managed system, and for
the physical processor pool, each shared processor pool, and the shared memory pool in the managed system. Sampling events are collected at the configured sample rate. They are also collected hourly, daily at
midnight, and monthly at midnight on the first day of each month. Sampling events are also collected
immediately following the collection of a Utility CoD processor usage event. Sampling events contain
information about memory and processor utilization.
State change events are collected for the managed system, for each partition in the managed system, and for
the HMC. State change events are collected when a state change occurs for the managed system, a partition, or when the HMC is started or shut down.
Configuration change events are collected for the managed system, for each partition in the managed system, for each shared processor pool in the managed system, for the shared memory pool in the managed
system, and for the HMC. Configuration change events are collected when a configuration change affecting
memory or processor resources occurs for the managed system, a partition, a shared processor pool, or the
shared memory pool. Configuration change events are also collected when the local time is changed on the
HMC.
Utility CoD processor usage events are collected for the managed system when a Utility CoD processor
minute is used. All Utility CoD processor minutes used during a single minute are grouped into one event.
Hourly sampling events and all state change, configuration change, and Utility CoD processor usage events
collected are only saved on the HMC for about 2 months. Daily sampling events are saved for about 2
years, and monthly sampling events are saved for about 10 years.
Sampling events are also saved in a snapshot file. Sampling events that are collected more frequently than
Linux
May 2012
1
hourly are only saved in the snapshot file. All state change, configuration change, and Utility CoD processor usage events collected are also saved in the snapshot file, in addition to being saved with the hourly
sampling events. The snapshot file is purged daily at midnight. Events more than 24 hours old are purged.
Therefore, the snapshot file will only contain events that were collected during the last 24 to 48 hours.
Utilization data collection for managed systems is not automatically enabled. The chlparutil command can
be used to enable utilization data collection and configure the sample rate.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of system resources for which events are to be listed. Valid values are hmc for HMC,
lpar for partitions, pool for physical processor pool, procpool for shared processor pools, mempool for shared memory pool, sys for managed system, all for HMC, partitions, physical processor
pool, shared processor pools, shared memory pool, and managed system, and config for HMC
configuration settings for utilization data collection.
-m
The name of the managed system for which the collected utilization data or the HMC configuration settings is to be listed. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and
ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if
there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name, or if the HMC does not currently have a connection to the managed system.
If this option is specified when listing HMC configuration settings, then the HMC configuration
settings for the managed-system will be listed. Otherwise, the HMC configuration settings for all
of the systems currently managed by this HMC, and for all of the systems for which utilization
data has been previously collected by this HMC will be listed.
-d
The number of days prior to today for which events will be listed. Events that were collected
today will be listed, along with events that were collected during the past number-of-days days.
This option cannot be specified with the -h, --minutes, --startyear, --startmonth, --startday,
--starthour, --startminute, --endyear, --endmonth, --endday, --endhour, or --endminute
options.
-h
The number of hours prior to the current time for which events will be listed.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, --minutes, --startyear, --startmonth, --startday,
--starthour, --startminute, --endyear, --endmonth, --endday, --endhour, or --endminute
options.
--minutes
The number of minutes prior to the current time for which events will be listed.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, --startyear, --startmonth, --startday,
--starthour, --startminute, --endyear, --endmonth, --endday, --endhour, or --endminute
options.
--startyear
The starting year for which events will be listed. The default value for this option is 1970.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
--startmonth
The starting month for which events will be listed. Valid values are 1 for January through 12 for
December. The default value for this option is 1 (January).
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
Linux
May 2012
2
--startday
The starting day for which events will be listed. Valid values are 1 through 31. The default value
for this option is 1.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
--starthour
The starting hour for which events will be listed. Valid values are 0 for midnight through 23 for
11:00 pm. The default value for this option is 0 (midnight).
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
--startminute
The starting minute for which events will be listed. Valid values are 0 through 59. The default
value for this option is 0.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
--endyear
The ending year for which events will be listed. The default value for this option is now.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
--endmonth
The ending month for which events will be listed. Valid values are 1 for January through 12 for
December. The default value for this option is now.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
--endday
The ending day for which events will be listed. Valid values are 1 through 31. The default value
for this option is now.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
--endhour
The ending hour for which events will be listed. Valid values are 0 for midnight through 23 for
11:00 pm. The default value for this option is now.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
--endminute
The ending minute for which events will be listed. Valid values are 0 through 59. The default
value for this option is now.
This option cannot be specified with the -d, -h, or --minutes options.
-n
The maximum number of events to be listed, starting with the most recent event. The number
specified must be greater than 0.
If this option is not specified, and neither are any of the -d, -h, --minutes, --startyear, --startmonth, --startday, --starthour, --startminute, --endyear, --endmonth, --endday, --endhour, or
--endminute options, then only the most recent event will be listed.
-s
Use this option to specify the sample rate for which utilization data is to be listed. Valid values are
h for hourly sampling events and all state change, configuration change, and Utility CoD processor
usage events, d for daily sampling events, m for monthly sampling events, and s for the snapshot
file.
If this option is not specified then events in the snapshot file will be listed.
Linux
May 2012
3
--filter The filter(s) to apply to the events to be listed. Filters are used to select which events for the specified resource type are to be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for this command:
lpar_ids
Specify partition ID(s)
lpar_names
Specify partition user-defined name(s)
event_types
Specify one or more of the values
sample, state_change, config_change,
utility_cod_proc_usage
pools
Specify shared processor pool ID(s)
pool_names
Specify shared processor pool
user-defined name(s)
Valid filters with -r hmc:
event_types
Valid filters with -r lpar:
event_types, lpar_ids | lpar_names,
pools | pool_names
Valid filters with -r pool:
event_types
Valid filters with -r procpool:
event_types, pools | pool_names
Valid filters with -r mempool:
event_types
Valid filters with -r sys:
event_types
Linux
May 2012
4
Valid filters with -r all:
event_types, lpar_ids | lpar_names,
pools | pool_names
The lpar_ids and lpar_names filter will
only apply to partition events, and the pools
and pool_names filter will only apply to
partition events and shared processor pool events
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each event. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each event
will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Command attributes:
borrowed_pool_proc_units
The sum of the processing units being borrowed
from powered off partitions with dedicated
processors and the processing units available
to be assigned to partitions, rounded down to
a whole processor.
capped_cycles
The number of capped processing cycles
utilized by this partition since the
managed system was started.
configurable_pool_proc_units
The number of processing units assigned to
all shared processor partitions, rounded up
to a whole processor.
configurable_sys_mem
The amount of configurable system memory
(in megabytes).
configurable_sys_proc_units
The number of configurable system
processing units.
curr_5250_cpw_percent
The 5250 CPW percent assigned to the
partition.
curr_avail_5250_cpw_percent
The 5250 CPW percent available to be
assigned to partitions.
curr_avail_pool_proc_units
The number of processing units available
to be assigned to partitions.
curr_avail_sys_mem
The amount of memory (in megabytes)
available to be assigned to partitions.
curr_avail_sys_proc_units
The number of processing units available
to be assigned to partitions.
Linux
May 2012
5
curr_io_entitled_mem
The amount of I/O entitled memory (in megabytes)
assigned to the shared memory partition.
curr_max_pool_mem
The maximum size (in megabytes) of the shared
memory pool.
curr_mem
The amount of memory (in megabytes)
assigned to the partition. For shared memory
partitions, this is the amount of logical
memory assigned to the partition.
curr_mem_weight
The current relative memory priority for
the shared memory partition. The smaller the
value, the lower the priority. Possible
values are 0 - 255.
curr_pool_mem
The size (in megabytes) of the shared memory
pool.
curr_proc_mode
The processing mode for the partition.
Possible values are ded or shared.
curr_proc_units
The number of processing units assigned
to the partition.
curr_procs
The number of processors or virtual
processors assigned to the partition.
curr_reserved_pool_proc_units
The number of processing units that are
reserved for temporary use by the
uncapped partitions in the shared
processor pool.
curr_shared_proc_pool_id
The unique integer identifier for the
shared processor pool that the partition
is in.
curr_shared_proc_pool_name
The user-defined name of the shared
processor pool, at the time the event was
collected, that the partition is in.
curr_sharing_mode
The sharing mode of the partition.
Possible values are keep_idle_procs,
share_idle_procs,
share_idle_procs_active,
share_idle_procs_always,
cap, or uncap.
curr_uncap_weight
The current weighted average of
processing priority when in uncapped
sharing mode. The smaller the value, the
lower the weight. Possible values are
0 - 255.
Linux
May 2012
6
dedup_cycles
The number of processing cycles spent deduplicating
data since Active Memory Deduplication was enabled
for the shared memory pool. The processing cycles
were donated by the paging Virtual I/O Server
partitions assigned to the pool.
dedup_mem
The amount of logical memory (in megabytes) assigned
to the partition that has been deduplicated.
dedup_pool_mem
The amount of memory (in megabytes) in the shared
memory pool that is being used for deduplicated data.
entitled_cycles
The number of processing cycles to which
the partition has been entitled since the
managed system was started. This value is
based on the number of processing units
assigned to the partition, and may be
greater than or smaller than the number
of cycles actually used.
event_type
The type of event. Possible values are
sample, state_change, config_change, or
utility_cod_proc_usage.
idle_cycles
The number of cycles that the partition reported as
idle. If the partition does not have the ability to
report idle cycles, this value is 0.
lpar_curr_io_entitled_mem
The total amount of I/O entitled memory (in
megabytes) assigned to all of the partitions
in the shared memory pool.
lpar_dedup_mem
The total amount of partition logical memory (in
megabytes) that has been deduplicated.
lpar_id
The unique integer identifier for the
partition.
lpar_mapped_io_entitled_mem
The total amount of I/O entitled memory (in
megabytes) currently mapped by all of the
partitions in the shared memory pool.
lpar_name
The user-defined name of the partition
at the time the event was collected.
lpar_run_mem
The total amount of logical memory (in megabytes)
assigned to all of the partitions in the shared
memory pool.
mapped_io_entitled_mem
The amount of I/O entitled memory (in megabytes)
currently mapped by the shared memory partition.
max_pool_proc_units
This number, minus the reserved
Linux
May 2012
7
processing units in the shared processor
pool, is the maximum number of processing
units that the partitions in the shared
processor pool can use.
mem_dedup
Indicates whether Active Memory Deduplication is
enabled for the shared memory pool. Possible values
are 0 for disabled or 1 for enabled.
mem_mode
The memory mode for the partition.
Possible values are ded or shared.
mem_overage_cooperation
The difference between the shared memory
partition’s assigned memory overcommitment
and its actual overcommitment. A positive
value means the partition is using less memory
than system firmware has requested it to use.
name
The user-defined name of the managed
system.
page_faults
The total number of page faults that have
occurred since the shared memory pool was
created.
page_in_delay
The total page-in delay, in microseconds, spent
waiting for page faults since the shared memory
pool was created.
phys_run_mem
The runtime amount of physical memory (in megabytes)
allocated to the shared memory partition.
prev_time
The time on the HMC when the HMC time was
changed.
proc_cycles_per_second
Processing cycles per second on one physical
processor. This value is static for a particular
managed system.
On POWER6 and later servers, this value is set
to a fixed constant of 512,000,000.
resource_type
The type of system resource for which the
event was collected. Possible values are
hmc, lpar, pool, procpool, mempool, or sys.
run_latch_cycles
The number of non-idle cycles used by the partition,
while the run latch was set, since the managed system
was started.
run_latch_instructions
The number of non-idle instructions performed by the
partition, while the run latch was set, since the
managed system was started.
run_mem_weight
Linux
May 2012
8
The runtime relative memory priority for
the shared memory partition. The smaller the
value, the lower the priority. Possible
values are 0 - 255.
sample_rate
The rate, in seconds, at which samples
are obtained. This rate can be changed
with the chlparutil command.
shared_cycles_while_active
The number of dedicated processing cycles
shared by this partition while it has
been active since the managed system was
started.
shared_proc_pool_id
The unique integer identifier for the
shared processor pool.
shared_proc_pool_name
The user-defined name of the shared
processor pool at the time the event was
collected.
state
For system events, this is the state of
the managed system at the time the event
was collected. For partition events,
this is the state of the partition at the
time the event was collected.
sys_firmware_mem
The amount of memory (in megabytes) on the managed
system that is being used by system firmware.
sys_firmware_pool_mem
The amount of memory (in megabytes) in the shared
memory pool that is being used by system firmware.
sys_time
The time on the managed system that the
sample was taken.
time
The time on the HMC that the event was
collected.
time_cycles
The number of time cycles since the
managed system was started.
time_shut_down
The time the HMC was shut down or
rebooted.
total_pool_cycles
The total number of processing cycles
available in the physical processor pool
or shared processor pool since the
managed system was started.
type_model_serial_num
The machine type, model, and serial
number of the managed system.
uncapped_cycles
The number of uncapped processing cycles
Linux
May 2012
9
utilized by this partition since the
managed system was started.
unreported_proc_min
The total number of Utility CoD processor
minutes that have not been reported.
used_proc_min
The number of Utility CoD processor
minutes that were used during the last
minute.
utilized_pool_cycles
The number of processing cycles in the
physical processor pool or shared
processor pool that have been utilized
since the managed system was started.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all of the monthly sampling events that were collected for the managed system sys1 for the entire year
2005:
lslparutil -r all -m sys1 --startyear 2005 --endyear 2005 --endmonth 12 --endday 31 --endhour 23 -s m
List all of the hourly managed system sampling events that have been collected for the managed system
with type, model, and serial number 9406-520*1000101 since midnight today:
lslparutil -r sys -m 9406-520*1000101 -d 0 --filter "event_types=sample" -s h
List all of the events that have been collected for the managed system sys1 since January 1, 2006, and list a
maximum of 25 events:
lslparutil -r all -m sys1 --startyear 2006 -n 25 -s h
List the 10 most recent hourly sampling events that were collected for partition p1:
lslparutil -r lpar -m sys1 -n 10 -s h --filter "event_types=sample,lpar_names=p1"
List all of the state change and configuration change events that were collected for the managed system
sys1 for the month of June in 2005:
lslparutil -r all -m sys1 --startyear 2005 --startmonth 6 --endyear 2005 --endmonth 6 --endday 30
--endhour 23 -s h --filter ""event_types=state_change,config_change""
List all of the Utility CoD processor usage events that were collected for the managed system sys1 for the
month of May in 2007:
lslparutil -r all -m sys1 --startyear 2007 --startmonth 5 --endyear 2007 --endmonth 5 --endday 31
--endhour 23 -s h --filter "event_types=utility_cod_proc_usage"
List all of the HMC events that have been collected for managed system sys1 since February 1, 2006:
Linux
May 2012
10
lslparutil -r hmc -m sys1 --startyear 2006 --startmonth 2 -s h
List the configuration settings for utilization data collection on this HMC for all managed systems:
lslparutil -r config
To calculate the default shared processor pool utilization in percent over a twelve hour time period:
lslparutil -m sys1 -r procpool --startyear 2006
--startmonth 2 --startday 23 --starthour 0 --endyear 2006
--endmonth 2 --endday 23 --endhour 12 --filter
"event_types=sample,pool_names=DefaultPool"
-F time,total_pool_cycles,utilized_pool_cycles
02/23/2006 12:00:01,134967149091025,467439053292
02/23/2006 11:00:02,134963299532241,467428119008
02/23/2006 10:00:01,134959313365305,467419269942
02/23/2006 09:00:01,134954622214624,467403199531
02/23/2006 08:00:02,134942086330068,467368397739
02/23/2006 07:00:01,134929553859752,467333227651
02/23/2006 06:00:01,134917026289150,467295577359
02/23/2006 05:00:02,134904482088726,467258616569
02/23/2006 04:00:01,134891946956456,467223704573
02/23/2006 03:00:01,134879415157938,467188374373
02/23/2006 02:00:01,134866883128692,467152556956
02/23/2006 01:00:02,134854347365860,467116506907
02/23/2006 00:00:03,134841811733640,467081011935
Pool utilization =
(utilized_pool_cycles / total_pool_cycles) * 100
Pool utilization = ((467439053292 - 467081011935) /
(134967149091025 - 134841811733640)) * 100
Pool utilization = 0.29%
To calculate the processor utilization for the shared processor partition with ID 7 over the last minute (the
sampling rate is 1 minute):
lslparutil -m sys1 -r lpar --filter "lpar_ids=7", -n 2 -F time,lpar_id,
capped_cycles,uncapped_cycles,entitled_cycles,time_cycles
03/29/2012 18:09:30,7,55844419525044,0,106332165468039,
1234978811234159
03/29/2012 18:08:30,7,55839107527864,0,106316742434446,
1234947965168143
Processor utilization % =
((capped_cycles + uncapped_cycles) / entitled_cycles) * 100
Processor utilization % =
(((55844419525044 - 55839107527864) + (0 - 0)) /
(106332165468039 - 106316742434446)) * 100
Processor utilization % = 34.44%
Processor units utilized =
(capped_cycles + uncapped_cycles) / time_cycles
Linux
May 2012
11
Processor units utilized =
((55844419525044 - 55839107527864) + (0 - 0)) /
(1234978811234159 - 1234947965168143)
Processor units utilized = 0.17
To calculate the processor utilization for the dedicated processor partition with ID 8 over the last minute
(the sampling rate is 1 minute):
lslparutil -m sys1 -r lpar --filter "lpar_ids=8", -n 2
-F time,lpar_id,capped_cycles,idle_cycles,time_cycles
03/29/2012 18:09:30,8,10650723610566,27015925200832,1234978811234159
03/29/2012 18:08:30,8,10619877543196,26994400296144,1234947965168143
Processor utilization % =
((capped_cycles - idle_cycles) / capped_cycles) * 100
Processor utilization % = (((10650723610566 - 10619877543196) (27015925200832 - 26994400296144)) /
(10650723610566 - 10619877543196)) * 100
Processor utilization % = 30.22%
Processor units utilized =
(capped_cycles - idle_cycles) / time_cycles
Processor units utilized = ((10650723610566 - 10619877543196) (27015925200832 - 26994400296144)) /
(1234978811234159 - 1234947965168143)
Processor units utilized = 0.30
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chlparutil, rmlparutil
Linux
May 2012
12
NAME
lsmediadev - list storage media devices
SYNOPSIS
lsmediadev [-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsmediadev lists the storage media devices that are available for use on the Hardware Management Console
(HMC).
OPTIONS
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all of the storage media devices that are available for use on the HMC:
lsmediadev
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
October 2005
1
NAME
lsmemdev - list memory devices
SYNOPSIS
lsmemdev -r avail -m managed-system
{-p partition-names | --id partition-IDs}
[--min minimum-size] [--max maximum-size] [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsmemdev lists block storage devices that can be used as reserved storage devices for the managed-system.
Reserved storage devices are used as paging space devices for partitions that use shared memory. Reserved
storage devices are also used for suspended partitions.
Block storage devices can be listed for any Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partition in the managed system.
However, a device cannot be added to a pool unless the VIOS partition is assigned to that pool.
On a managed system that supports partition suspend and resume operations, block storage devices are
added to the reserved storage device pool. On a managed system that supports Active Memory Sharing but
does not support partition suspend and resume operations, block storage devices are added to the shared
memory pool.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of resources to list. The only valid value is avail to list the block storage devices that are
available to add to a reserved storage device pool or a shared memory pool. Any device that is
already in a pool will not be listed.
-m
The name of the managed system which has the VIOS partition(s) for which to list block storage
devices. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form
tttt-mmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
-p
The name of one or two VIOS partitions for which to list block storage devices. The partition(s)
must be in the running state and must have an RMC connection to the Hardware Management
Console (HMC).
If two VIOS partitions are specified, then only those block storage devices that can be accessed by
both VIOS partitions are listed. The two partition names must be comma separated.
You can either use this option to specify the name(s) of the VIOS partition(s), or use the --id
option to specify the ID(s). The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of one or two VIOS partitions for which to list block storage devices. The partition(s)
must be in the running state and must have an RMC connection to the HMC.
If two VIOS partitions are specified, then only those block storage devices that can be accessed by
both VIOS partitions are listed. The two partition IDs must be comma separated.
You can either use this option to specify the ID(s) of the VIOS partition(s), or use the -p option to
specify the name(s). The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
--min
The minimum size, in megabytes, of the block storage devices to list. If this option is not specified,
a default value of 0 is used.
--max
The maximum size, in megabytes, of the block storage devices to list. If this option is not specified, no maximum size is used.
--filter The filter(s) to apply to the block storage devices to be listed. Filters are used to select which
devices are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of the devices will be listed. For example,
Linux
September 2010
1
only physical devices can be listed by using the types filter.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Only one value can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for this command:
redundant
Valid values are:
0 - devices which could never be accessed by
another VIOS partition
1 - devices which possibly could be accessed by
another VIOS partition
types
Valid values are:
logical - logical devices
phys - physical devices
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each device. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each device
will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all of the available block storage devices that can be accessed by VIOS partition vios1:
lsmemdev -r avail -m sys1 -p vios1
List all of the available block storage devices that can be accessed by both VIOS partitions vios1 and vios2:
lsmemdev -r avail -m sys1 -p vios1,vios2
Linux
September 2010
2
List the names and sizes of all of the available block storage devices that can be accessed by VIOS partition
vios1:
lsmemdev -r avail -m sys1 -p vios1 -F device_name,size
List the available block storage devices which are between 1 GB and 4 GB in size and that can be accessed
by both the VIOS partitions with IDs 1 and 2:
lsmemdev -r avail -m sys1 --id 1,2 --min 1024 --max 4096
List all of the available physical block storage devices that can be accessed by the VIOS partition with ID
1:
lsmemdev -r avail -m 9117-MMA*1234567 --id 1 --filter "types=phys"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lshwres
Linux
September 2010
3
NAME
lsmemopt - list memory optimization information
SYNOPSIS
lsmemopt -m managed-system [-o {currscore | calcscore}]
[-p partition-names | --id partition-IDs]
[-x partition-names | --xid partition-IDs]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsmemopt lists information, including status and progress information, about the most recent memory optimization operation that was started on the managed-system.
lsmemopt also lists affinity scores for the managed-system. A system’s affinity score is a measure of how
good the processor-memory affinity is on the system. The score is a number between 0 and 100, with 0 representing the worst affinity and 100 representing perfect affinity. Depending on the system configuration, a
score of 100 may not be attainable.
lsmemopt can list the current affinity score, and can calculate and list the potential affinity score which
could be attained after running a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation. Note that the potential affinity
score may differ slightly from the actual affinity score that is attained after running the Dynamic Platform
Optimization operation.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to list memory optimization information. The name
may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are currscore to list the current affinity score for the managed-system, and calcscore to calculate and list the potential affinity score for the managed-system.
If this option is omitted, information about the most recent memory optimization operation that
was started on the managed-system is listed.
-p
The name of one or more potential partitions to optimize. This list of partitions is used to calculate the potential affinity score that could be attained if a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation were run to optimize this list of partitions.
Multiple partition names must be comma separated.
You can either use this option to specify the names of the potential partitions to optimize, or use
the --id option to specify the IDs of the partitions. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
If neither this option nor the --id option is used to specify a list of potential partiitions to optimize,
the list of potential partitions to optimize defaults to all partitions that are not specified in the list
of potential partitions to exclude from the optimization.
This option is only valid when -o calcscore is specified.
--id
The ID of one or more potential partitions to optimize. This list of partitions is used to calculate
the potential affinity score that could be attained if a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation
were run to optimize this list of partitions.
A range of partition IDs may be specified. A range is specified by specifying the beginning
Linux
November 2012
1
partition ID, a dash, and the ending partition ID. Both the beginning and ending partition IDs are
included in the range. For example, the range 1-5 includes partitions IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
The list of partition IDs specified with this option must be comma separated and can include one
or more partition IDs, one or more ranges of partition IDs, or both.
You can either use this option to specify the IDs of the potential partitions to optimize, or use the
-p option to specify the names of the partitions. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
If neither this option nor the -p option is used to specify a list of potential partiitions to optimize,
the list of potential partitions to optimize defaults to all partitions that are not specified in the list
of potential partitions to exclude from the optimization.
This option is only valid when -o calcscore is specified.
-x
The name of one or more potential partitions to exclude and protect from an optimization operation. This list of partitions is used to calculate the potential affinity score that could be attained if a
Dynamic Platform Optimization operation were run with this list of partitions to exclude.
Multiple partition names must be comma separated.
You can either use this option to specify the names of the potential partitions to exclude, or use the
--xid option to specify the IDs of the partitions. The -x and the --xid options are mutually exclusive.
If neither this option nor the --xid option is used to specify a list of potential partiitions to exclude,
the list of potential partitions to exclude defaults to an empty list.
This option is only valid when -o calcscore is specified.
--xid
The ID of one or more potential partitions to exclude and protect from an optimization operation.
This list of partitions is used to calculate the potential affinity score that could be attained if a
Dynamic Platform Optimization operation were run with this list of partitions to exclude.
A range of partition IDs may be specified. A range is specified by specifying the beginning partition ID, a dash, and the ending partition ID. Both the beginning and ending partition IDs are
included in the range. For example, the range 8-11 includes partitions IDs 8, 9, 10, and 11.
The list of partition IDs specified with this option must be comma separated and can include one
or more partition IDs, one or more ranges of partition IDs, or both.
You can either use this option to specify the IDs of the potential partitions to exclude, or use the -x
option to specify the names of the partitions. The --xid and the -x options are mutually exclusive.
If neither this option nor the -x option is used to specify a list of potential partiitions to exclude,
the list of potential partitions to exclude defaults to an empty list.
This option is only valid when -o calcscore is specified.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
Linux
November 2012
2
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List information about the last memory optimization operation that was started:
lsmemopt -m system1
List just the status of the last memory optimization operation that was started:
lsmemopt -m 8233-E8B*1234321 -F status
List the current system affinity score:
lsmemopt -m sys -o currscore
Calculate and list the potential system affinity score that could be attained if a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation were run to optimize all partitions in the system:
lsmemopt -m sys -o calcscore
Calculate and list the potential system affinity score that could be attained if a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation were run to optimize partitions lp1 and lp3:
lsmemopt -m sys -o calcscore -p lp1,lp3
Calculate and list the potential system affinity score that could be attained if a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation were run to optimize the partitions with IDs 2, 4, 6 through 9, and 11, while excluding the
partition with ID 1:
lsmemopt -m sys -o calcscore --id 2,4,6-9,11 --xid 1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
optmem
Linux
November 2012
3
NAME
lsnportlogin - list N_Port login information
SYNOPSIS
lsnportlogin [-m managed-system] [-w wait-time] [-d detail-level]
--filter "filter-data" [-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsnportlogin lists WWPN login status information for virtual fibre channel client adapters configured in
partitions or partition profiles.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to list WWPN login status information. The name
may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-w
The maximum time, in minutes, to wait for each Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) command issued by
the HMC to complete. If a VIOS command does not complete within the time specified, the query
operation for the virtual fibre channel client adapter will be stopped.
wait-time must be a whole number. If wait-time is 0, the operation will not be timed out.
If this option is not specified, a default value of 3 minutes is used.
-d
The level of detail requested from VIOS commands issued by the HMC. Valid values are 0 (none)
through 5 (highest).
If this option is not specified, a default value of 1 is used.
--filter The filters to apply to the WWPN login status information to be listed. Filters are used to select
the partitions or partition profiles for which WWPN login status information is to be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names:
lpar_names | lpar_ids, profile_names
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
Linux
May 2011
1
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Descriptions of selected command attributes:
wwpn_status
The WWPN status. Possible values are:
0 - WWPN is not activated
1 - WWPN is activated
2 - WWPN status is unknown
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the WWPN login status information for partition clientPartition:
lsnportlogin -m sys --filter "lpar_names=clientPartition"
List the WWPN login status information for profile defaultProf for the partition with ID 5:
lsnportlogin -m 9117-MMB*1234567 --filter "profile_names=defaultProf,
lpar_ids=5"
List only the partition name, WWPN, and WWPN status, and separate the output values with a colon:
lsnportlogin -m sys --filter "lpar_names=clientPartition" -F
lpar_name:wwpn:wwpn_status
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chnportlogin
Linux
May 2011
2
NAME
lspsm - list Power systems management console settings
SYNOPSIS
lspsm [-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lspsm lists Power systems management console configuration settings.
OPTIONS
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the Power systems management console settings:
lspsm
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chpsm
Linux
May 2011
1
NAME
lspwdpolicy - list password policy information
SYNOPSIS
lspwdpolicy -t {p | s} [-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lspwdpolicy lists Hardware Management Console (HMC) password policy information.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of password policy information to list. Valid values are p to list all of the password policies on the HMC, and s to list password policy status information. Password policy status information indicates whether a password policy is active, and if so, which password policy is the
active policy.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all of the HMC password policies:
lspwdpolicy -t p
List just the names of all of the HMC password policies:
lspwdpolicy -t p -F name
List HMC password policy status information:
lspwdpolicy -t s
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chpwdpolicy, mkpwdpolicy, rmpwdpolicy
Linux
September 2010
1
NAME
lspwrmgmt - list power management settings
SYNOPSIS
lspwrmgmt [-m managed-system] -r sys
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lspwrmgmt lists the power management settings for the managed-system. Power management settings can
only be configured for managed systems that are capable of POWER6 Power Management.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to list power management settings. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
If this option is omitted, then power management settings for all of the systems managed by this
Hardware Management Console (HMC) will be listed.
-r
The type of resources for which to list power management settings. The only valid value is sys for
managed systems.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each managed system. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will
be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the power management settings for managed system system1:
lspwrmgmt -r sys -m system1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chpwrmgmt
Linux
November 2007
1
NAME
lsrefcode - list reference codes
SYNOPSIS
lsrefcode -r {sys | lpar} -m managed-system
[-s {p | s}] [-n number] [--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsrefcode lists reference codes for the managed-system or for partitions in the managed-system.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of reference codes to list. Valid values are sys for managed system reference codes, and
lpar for partition reference codes.
-m
The name of the managed system which has the reference codes to list. The name may either be
the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is
the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same
user-defined name.
-s
When listing managed system reference codes, use this option to specify the service processor for
which reference codes are to be listed. Valid values are p for the primary service processor and s
for the secondary service processor. If this option is not specified, reference codes for the primary
service processor will be listed.
This option is only valid when listing managed system reference codes.
-n
The number of reference codes to list, starting with the current reference code, for the managedsystem or for each partition. Reference codes are listed in order, with the most recent (current) reference code first.
The number specified must be greater than 0. If there are fewer reference codes available than
number, only the available reference codes will be listed.
If this option is omitted, only the current reference code will be listed.
--filter The filter to apply to the partition reference codes to be listed. A filter is used to select the partitions for which reference codes are to be listed. If no filter is specified, then reference codes for all
partitions in the managed-system will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
filter-name=value,filter-name=value,...<LF>
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"filter-name=value,value,...",...<LF>
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Valid filter names for this command are lpar_names or lpar_ids. Only one of these filters may be
specified. Multiple partitions can be specified with the filter.
Linux
February 2006
1
This option is not valid when listing managed system reference codes.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each reference code. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the reference code
attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the current reference code for the managed system:
lsrefcode -r sys -m system1
List the last 10 reference codes for the managed system, and only display attribute values for each reference
code, following a header of attribute names:
lsrefcode -r sys -m 9406-570*1543901A -n 10 -F --header
List the last 5 reference codes for the secondary service processor on the managed system:
lsrefcode -r sys -m system1 -s s -n 5
List the current reference code for each partition in the managed system, and only list the partition name,
time stamp, and reference code value for each reference code, and separate the output values with a comma:
lsrefcode -r lpar -m system1 -F lpar_name,time_stamp,
refcode
List the last 25 reference codes for partitions p1 and p2:
lsrefcode -r lpar -m 9406-520*12345678 -n 25 --filter
""lpar_names=p1,p2""
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
February 2006
2
NAME
lsrsdevsize - list reserved storage device size
SYNOPSIS
lsrsdevsize -m managed-system
[-p partition-name | --id partition-ID]
[-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsrsdevsize lists the minimum required reserved storage device size for a suspend capable or remote restart
capable partition. The device size listed is in megabytes.
The device size can be listed for an existing partition, or for a partition that has not yet been created.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system which has, or will have, the partition for which to list the device
size. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form
tttt-mmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
-p
The name of the partition for which to list the device size. The configuration defined in the last
activated profile for the partition will be used to determine the device size for the partition. If the
partition has never been activated, then the configuration defined in the default profile will be used.
If the partition has not yet been created, then you cannot use this option.
If the partition for which to list the device size already exists, you should either use this option to
specify the name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and
the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to list the device size. The configuration defined in the last activated profile for the partition will be used to determine the device size for the partition. If the partition has never been activated, then the configuration defined in the default profile will be used. If
the partition has not yet been created, then you cannot use this option.
If the partition for which to list the device size already exists, you should either use this option to
specify the ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the partition’s name. The --id and
the -p options are mutually exclusive.
-f
The name of the file containing the input data for this command. The input data consists of
attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format.
The format of the input data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
If the partition for which to list the device size already exists and it is specified with the -p or --id
option, then all of the following attributes are optional. Any of the attributes that are specified will
override the value in the last activated profile or default profile for the partition (neither profile will
be modified). If the partition for which to list the device size does not exist, then all of the following attributes except hpt_ratio must be specified.
Valid attribute names:
lpar_env
Valid values are:
aixlinux - the partition will be an AIX or Linux
partition
Linux
October 2011
1
os400 - the partition will be an IBM i partition
max_mem
The maximum amount of memory for the partition, in
megabytes.
max_procs
The maximum number of dedicated processors or the
maximum number of virtual processors for the
partition.
max_virtual_slots
The maximum number of virtual I/O adapter slots for
the partition.
mem_mode
Valid values are:
ded - the partition will use dedicated memory
shared - the partition will use shared memory
hpt_ratio
The ratio of the hardware page table size to the
maximum memory for the partition. Valid values are
displayed by the lshwres -r mem -m managed-system
--level sys -F possible_hpt_ratios command.
Input data for this command can be specified with this option or the -i option. The -f and the -i
options are mutually exclusive.
-i
This option allows you to enter input data on the command line, instead of using a file. Data
entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be enclosed
in double quotes.
Input data for this command can be specified with this option or the -f option. The -i and the -f
options are mutually exclusive.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the minimum required reserved storage device size for a partition that has not yet been created:
lsrsdevsize -m system1 -i "lpar_env=aixlinux,max_mem=8192,max_procs=1,
max_virtual_slots=25,mem_mode=ded"
List the minimum required reserved storage device size for partition p1 using the configuration defined in
the last activated or default profile for the partition:
Linux
October 2011
2
lsrsdevsize -m 9117-MMB*1000234 -p p1
List the minimum required reserved storage device size for the partition with ID 5 using the configuration
defined in the last activated or default profile for the partition and a maximum memory of 4096 MB:
lsrsdevsize -m system1 --id 5 -i "max_mem=4096"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lssyscfg
Linux
October 2011
3
NAME
lssacfg - list Service Agent configuration information
SYNOPSIS
lssacfg -t {email | ftpfirewall | ftpoffload | snmp |
snmptrapnames}
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lssacfg lists Service Agent configuration information.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of Service Agent configuration information to list. Valid values are email for customer
email notification settings, ftpfirewall for FTP firewall settings, ftpoffload for FTP offload server
settings, snmp for SNMP trap notification settings, and snmptrapnames to list all defined SNMP
traps.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names representing the desired attribute values to display. If
this option is specified without any attribute names, then all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display the Service Agent customer email notification settings:
lssacfg -t email
Display the Service Agent FTP firewall settings used for offloading service information:
lssacfg -t ftpfirewall
Display the Service Agent FTP server host name and directory used for offloading service information:
lssacfg -t ftpoffload -F host,directory
Display the Service Agent configuration for emitting SNMP trap notifications:
lssacfg -t snmp
Display all defined Service Agent SNMP traps:
lssacfg -t snmptrapnames
ENVIRONMENT
None
Linux
November 2006
1
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsacfg
Linux
November 2006
2
NAME
lsstat - list statistics
SYNOPSIS
lsstat -r {samplerate | vlan} [-m managed-system]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsstat lists statistics collected for a managed-system. This command also lists the Hardware Management
Console (HMC) settings, such as the sample rate, for statistics collection.
When listing statistics collected for a managed-system, only the last sample collected is listed.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of resources to list. Valid values are samplerate for the sample rate for statistics collection, and vlan for Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) statistics data.
-m
The name of the managed system for which statistics data or the HMC settings for statistics collection are to be listed. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or
be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is
the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are
multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
This option is required when listing statistics data. This option is not required when listing the
HMC settings for statistics collection. If it is not specified, then the settings for all of the systems
that support statistics collection and are currently managed by this HMC will be listed.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the VLAN statistics data for managed system mySystem:
lsstat -r vlan -m mySystem
List the sample rates for all managed systems that support VLAN statistics collection:
lsstat -r samplerate
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
Linux
September 2010
1
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chstat
Linux
September 2010
2
NAME
lssvc - list service settings
SYNOPSIS
lssvc -s snmp [-r {trapnames | trapconfig}]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lssvc lists the settings for a service, such as SNMP, on the Hardware Managment Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-s
The service for which to list settings. The only valid value is snmp for Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3.
-r
The type of service resources to list. Valid values are trapnames to list all of the traps supported
by the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC, and trapconfig to list the SNMPv3 trap notification list. If
this option is omitted, then general status information about the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC will
be listed.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List status information about the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC:
lssvc -s snmp
List all of the traps supported by the SNMPv3 agent on the HMC:
lssvc -s snmp -r trapnames
List the SNMPv3 trap notification list:
lssvc -s snmp -r trapconfig
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsvc
Linux
September 2010
1
NAME
lssvcevents - list console or serviceable events
SYNOPSIS
lssvcevents -t {console | hardware}
[-d number-of-days | -i number-of-minutes]
[-m managed-system]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lssvcevents lists console events logged by the Hardware Management Console (HMC), or serviceable
events.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of events to list. Valid values are console for console events, or hardware for serviceable events.
-d
The number of days prior to today for which events will be listed. Events that occurred today will
be listed, along with any events that occurred during the past number-of-days days.
If this option is omitted when listing console events, console events that occurred within the past 7
days will be listed.
If this option is omitted when listing serviceable events, all serviceable events will be listed.
-i
The number of minutes to go back and search for events. This search is based on the time that the
event was initially created on the HMC, and is not affected by later updates to the event.
-m
The name of the managed system for which serviceable events are to be listed. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
If this option is omitted, all serviceable events will be listed.
This option is only valid when listing serviceable events.
--filter The filter to apply to the serviceable events to be listed. A filter is used to select which serviceable
events are to be listed. For example, only open serviceable events can be listed by using a filter to
specify the status (open) of the serviceable events to list. If a filter is not used, then all serviceable
events will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Linux
May 2004
1
Multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for serviceable events:
problem_nums
Specify event problem number(s)
status
Specify event status. Valid values are
open or closed.
This option is not valid when listing console events.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each event. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each event
will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the serviceable events that occurred today:
lssvcevents -t hardware -d 0
List the console events that occurred within the past 3 days:
lssvcevents -t console -d 3
List all of the open serviceable events for the system system1:
lssvcevents -t hardware -m system1 --filter "status=open"
List only the problem numbers and status of all serviceable events for the system that occurred within the
last 7 days, and separate the output values with a colon:
lssvcevents -t hardware -m 9406-570*101234A -d 7 -F
problem_num:status
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
May 2004
2
NAME
lssyscfg - list system resources
SYNOPSIS
lssyscfg -r {lpar | prof | sys | sysprof | cage | frame}
[-m managed-system | -e managed-frame]
[--filter "filter-data"]
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lssyscfg lists the attributes of partitions, partition profiles, or system profiles for the managed-system. It can
also list the attributes of the managed-system, and of all of the systems managed by this Hardware Management Console (HMC).
lssyscfg can also list the attributes of cages in the managed-frame, the attributes of the managed-frame, or
the attributes of all of the frames managed by this HMC.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of resources to list. Valid values are lpar for partitions, prof for partition profiles, sys for
managed systems, sysprof for system profiles, cage for managed frame cages, and frame for managed frames.
-m
The name of either the managed system to list, or the managed system which has the system
resources to list. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in
the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the
serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
This option is required when listing partitions, partition profiles, or system profiles. This option is
optional when listing managed systems, and if it is omitted, then all of the systems managed by
this HMC will be listed. This option is not valid when listing managed frame cages or managed
frames.
-e
The name of either the managed frame to list, or the managed frame which contains the cages to
list. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form ttttmmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the
managed frame. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames
with the same user-defined name.
This option is required when listing managed frame cages. This option is optional when listing
managed frames, and if it is omitted, then all of the frames managed by this HMC will be listed.
This option is not valid when listing partitions, partition profiles, system profiles, or managed systems.
--filter The filter(s) to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which resources of the
specified resource type are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of the resources of the specified resource type will be listed. For example, specific partitions can be listed by using a filter to
specify the names or IDs of the partitions to list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then all of the partitions in the managed system will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
Linux
May 2011
1
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for partitions:
lpar_names | lpar_ids | work_groups
Only one of these three filters may be
specified.
Valid filter names for partition profiles:
lpar_names | lpar_ids, profile_names
Valid filter names for system profiles:
profile_names
This option is not valid when listing managed systems, managed frame cages, or managed frames.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for the
resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Descriptions of selected command attributes:
capabilities
A comma separated list of managed system capabilities.
Capabilities that are supported by the managed system
are displayed in the list. Capabilities that are not
supported are not displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all systems managed by this HMC:
lssyscfg -r sys
List only the user-defined name, machine type and model, and serial number for all of the systems managed
by this HMC, and separate the output values with a colon:
lssyscfg -r sys -F name:type_model:serial_num
List the managed system system1:
Linux
May 2011
2
lssyscfg -r sys -m system1
List all of the capabilities supported by managed system system1:
lssyscfg -r sys -m system1 -F capabilities
List all partitions in the managed system, and only display attribute values for each partition, following a
header of attribute names:
lssyscfg -r lpar -m 9406-570*12345678 -F --header
List the partitions lpar1, lpar2, and lpar3:
lssyscfg -r lpar -m system1 --filter ""lpar_names=lpar1,
lpar2,lpar3""
List only the names, IDs, and states of partitions lpar1, lpar2, and lpar3, and separate the output values with
a comma:
lssyscfg -r lpar -m system1 --filter ""lpar_names=lpar1,
lpar2,lpar3"" -F name,lpar_id,state
List all partition profiles defined for all partitions in the managed system:
lssyscfg -r prof -m 9406-570*12345678
List all partition profiles defined for partition lpar2:
lssyscfg -r prof -m system1 --filter "lpar_names=lpar2"
List the partition profiles prof1 and prof2 defined for the partition that has an ID of 2:
lssyscfg -r prof -m system1 --filter "lpar_ids=2,
"profile_names=prof1,prof2""
List all system profiles defined for the managed system:
lssyscfg -r sysprof -m 9406-520*100128A
List the system profile sysprof1:
lssyscfg -r sysprof -m system1 --filter "profile_names=
sysprof1"
List all frames managed by this HMC:
lssyscfg -r frame
List the managed frame myFrame:
lssyscfg -r frame -e myFrame
List all cages in the managed frame:
Linux
May 2011
3
lssyscfg -r cage -e 9119-59*000012C
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsyscfg, mksyscfg, rmsyscfg, lshwres
Linux
May 2011
4
NAME
lssysconn - list system connections
SYNOPSIS
lssysconn -r {all | nondiscover} [-F [attribute-names] [--header]]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
lssysconn lists connection information for all of the systems and frames managed by this Hardware Management Console (HMC). Connection information for all systems and frames to which this HMC is connected or attempting to connect is listed.
lssysconn also lists IP addresses that cannot be automatically discovered by this HMC when using DHCP.
If this HMC is set up as a DHCP server on a private network, whenever the Remove Connection task or the
rmsysconn command is run to remove a managed system or a managed frame from the HMC, the HMC
places the IP address(es) of that system or frame in a list of removed IP addresses. Any IP address in that
list will not be rediscovered when reattached to the HMC. The lssysconn -r nondiscover command can be
used to display the contents of that list of removed IP addresses.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of resources for which to list connection information. Valid values are all for all managed systems and managed frames, and nondiscover for all IP addresses that cannot be automatically discovered by this HMC when using DHCP.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each
resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List connection information for all systems and frames managed by this HMC:
lssysconn -r all
List only the IP address and connection state for all of the systems and frames managed by this HMC, and
separate the output values with a colon:
lssysconn -r all -F ipaddr:state
List all IP addresses that cannot be automatically discovered by this HMC when using DHCP:
lssysconn -r nondiscover
ENVIRONMENT
None
Linux
April 2008
1
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lssyscfg, mksysconn, rmsysconn
Linux
April 2008
2
NAME
lssysplan - list system plans
SYNOPSIS
lssysplan [-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lssysplan lists the system plan files in the system plan file directory on the Hardware Management Console
(HMC).
OPTIONS
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed for
each file. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for each file will
be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
The possible attributes that can be listed are: name, description, source, version, and date.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. The header record will be the first record displayed. This option is only
valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List all of the system plan files on this HMC:
lssysplan
List the system plan files on this HMC, and only display attribute values for each file, following a header of
attribute names:
lssysplan -F --header
List only the names, dates, and descriptions of the system plan files on this HMC:
lssysplan -F name,date,description
List only the names and descriptions of the system plan files on this HMC, following a header of attribute
names:
lssysplan -F name,description --header
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
February 2006
1
SEE ALSO
deploysysplan, cpsysplan, mksysplan, rmsysplan
Linux
February 2006
2
NAME
lstskey - list trusted system key information
SYNOPSIS
lstskey -m managed-system [-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lstskey lists trusted system key information for the managed-system. The trusted system key is used for virtual Trusted Platform Module (vTPM) data encryption.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to list trusted system key information. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where
tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
List the trusted system key information for managed system system1:
lstskey -m system1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chtskey
Linux
October 2011
1
NAME
lsusrtca - Displays welcome text
SYNOPSIS
lsusrtca -t {w | b} [-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsusrtca displays the Web user interface welcome text or the SSH banner text that is shown before users log
onto the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-t
The type of text to display. Valid values are w for the welcome text that is displayed on the Web
user interface before users log onto the HMC, and b for the SSH banner text that is displayed
before users remotely log into the HMC using SSH.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed. If no
attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display the welcome text that is displayed on the Web user interface before a user logs in:
lsusrtca -t w
Display the SSH banner text that is displayed before a user logs in remotely using SSH:
lsusrtca -t b
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chusrtca
Linux
November 2008
1
NAME
lsvet - list Capacity on Demand advanced functions activation information
SYNOPSIS
lsvet -t {code | hist} -m managed-system
[-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
lsvet lists Capacity on Demand (CoD) advanced functions activation information for the managed-system.
CoD advanced functions include PowerVM and Enterprise Enablement.
CoD advanced functions are sometimes referred to as Virtualization Engine systems technologies.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of information to list. Valid values are code for information used to generate CoD
advanced functions activation codes, and hist for the CoD advanced functions activation history
log.
-m
The name of the managed system for which information is to be listed. The name may either be
the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is
the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same
user-defined name.
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names representing the desired attribute values to display. If
this option is specified without any attribute names, then all of the attributes will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names will be
displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which was specified
with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the values of
only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed. This option is
only valid when used with the -F option.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Display activation code generation information:
lsvet -m sys1 -t code
Display the activation history log:
lsvet -m 9117-570*1001213 -t hist
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chvet
Linux
June 2007
1
NAME
migrcfg - migrate configuration
SYNOPSIS
migrcfg -m managed-system -t 1 -f file [--help]
DESCRIPTION
migrcfg migrates partition configuration data to a managed-system.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system to which to migrate the partition configuration data. The name
may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-t
The migration data type. The only valid value is 1.
-f
The name of the file on floppy diskette that contains the partition configuration data to migrate.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
migrcfg -m mySystem -t 1 -f cfgFile
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lssyscfg
Linux
May 2004
1
NAME
migrlpar - perform a partition migration operation
SYNOPSIS
To perform a partition migration operation:
migrlpar -o {m | r | s | v}
-m managed-system [-t target-managed-system]
[--ip IP-address [-u user-ID]]
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[-n profile-name]
[--redundantvios {0 | 1 | 2}] [--mpio {1 | 2}]
[--vlanbridge {1 | 2}] [--protectstorage {1 | 2}]
[{-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"}]
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [-v] [--force]
[--help]
To set system attributes related to partition migration operations:
migrlpar -o set [-m managed-system] -r sys
[{-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"}]
[--help]
To set mover service partition (MSP) attributes related to partition migration operations:
migrlpar -o set -m managed-system -r lpar
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[{-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"}]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
migrlpar performs partition migration operations.
Partition migration operations can be performed for AIX, Linux, or IBM i partitions only.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are m to validate then migrate one or more partitions if
validation succeeds, r to recover from a failed partition migration, s to stop a partition migration, v
to validate one or more partition migrations, and set to set attributes related to partition migration
operations.
A recover operation should be issued, if possible, on the management console that is managing the
source managed system.
A stop operation must be issued on the management console that is managing the source managed
system.
-m
The name of the source managed system for the partition migration operation. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*sssssss, where
tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
If this option is not specified for a system set operation, then the set operation will be performed
for all systems that are currently managed by this Hardware Management Console (HMC).
-t
Linux
The name of the target, or destination, managed system for the partition migration operation. The
name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form ttttmmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number
of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed
November 2012
1
systems with the same user-defined name.
This option is required when migrating partitions or validating partition migrations. This option is
not valid when performing any other operation.
--ip
If the destination managed system is not managed by the same management console that is managing the source managed system, then use this option to specify the IP address or host name of the
management console that is managing the destination managed system.
SSH must be enabled on both management consoles. Also, you must run the mkauthkeys command once to set up SSH key authentication.
This option is required when migrating partitions, validating partition migrations, or recovering
from a failed partition migration if the destination managed system is not managed by the same
management console that is managing the source managed system. This option is not valid when
performing any other operation.
-u
If the destination managed system is not managed by the same management console that is managing the source managed system, then use this option to specify the user ID to use on the management console that is managing the destination managed system. If you do not specify the user ID,
then the user ID of the user that issues this command will be used.
-p
The name of the partition for which to perform the operation.
One or more partition names can be specified When migrating partitions or validating partition
migrations. When performing any other operation, only a single partition name can be specified.
Multiple partition names must be comma separated. The maximum number of partition names
that can be specified is displayed by the lslparmigr -r mc -F max_lpars_per_migrlpar_cmd
command.
The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to perform the operation.
One or more partition IDs can be specified When migrating partitions or validating partition
migrations. When performing any other operation, only a single partition ID can be specified.
Multiple partition IDs must be comma separated. The maximum number of partition IDs that can
be specified is displayed by the lslparmigr -r mc -F max_lpars_per_migrlpar_cmd command.
The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
-n
The name of the partition profile to create for the migrated partition on the destination managed
system. If this option is omitted when migrating a partition, then the last activated profile for the
partition will be replaced with the current partition configuration on the destination managed system.
This option is only valid when migrating a single partition or validating a single partition migration. When migrating more than one partition or validating more than one partition migration, the
multiple_profile_names attribute must be specified instead.
--redundantvios,--redundantpgvios
When validating or migrating partitions that use shared memory, use this option to specify whether
the partitions are to be configured to use redundant paging VIOS partitions on the destination managed system.
When validating or migrating suspended partitions, use this option to specify whether the
Linux
November 2012
2
partitions are to be configured to use redundant VIOS partitions on the destination managed system for accessing the devices that contain the data needed to resume the suspended partitions.
When validating or migrating remote restart capable partitions, use this option to specify whether
the partitions are to be configured to use redundant VIOS partitions on the destination managed
system for accessing the devices that contain the data needed to perform remote restarts of the partitions.
Valid values are 0 if the partitions are to be configured to not use redundant VIOS partitions, 1 if
the partitions are to be configured to use redundant VIOS partitions, or 2 if the partitions are to be
configured to use redundant VIOS partitions if possible. If this option is not specified, then each
partition will be configured to use the same VIOS redundancy configuration on the destination
managed system that the partition is currently using on the source managed system.
This option is only valid when validating or migrating partitions that use shared memory, partitions that are suspended, or partitions that are remote restart capable. This option is not valid
when performing any other operation.
The --redundantvios and --redundantpgvios options are equivalent. The --redundantpgvios
option is deprecated.
--mpio When validating or migrating partitions, use this option to specify whether the management console is required to maintain an equivalent multipath I/O (MPIO) configuration of each partition’s
virtual SCSI and virtual fibre channel adapters on the destination managed system. Valid values
are 1 if the management console is required to maintain an equivalent MPIO configuration, or 2 if
the management console is not required to maintain an equivalent MPIO configuration, but should
do so if possible. If this option is not specified, then this option defaults to the value 1.
If this option has a value of 1 and the management console cannot guarantee that an equivalent
MPIO configuration of all of a partition’s virtual SCSI and virtual fibre channel adapters can be
maintained on the destination managed system, then an error will occur and the operation will fail
for that partition.
This option is only valid when validating or migrating partitions. This option is not valid when
performing any other operation.
--vlanbridge
When validating or migrating partitions, use this option to specify whether each partition’s virtual
ethernet adapters are required to be configured so that they are bridged on the same VLAN to an
external network on the destination managed system. Valid values are 1 if virtual ethernet
adapters are required to be bridged, or 2 if virtual ethernet adapters are not required to be bridged,
but should be bridged if possible. If this option is not specified, then this option defaults to the
value 1.
If this option has a value of 1 and the management console cannot guarantee that a partition’s virtual ethernet adapters can be bridged, then an error will occur and the operation will fail for that
partition.
This option is only valid when validating or migrating partitions. This option is not valid when
performing any other operation.
--protectstorage
Use this option to allow suspended partitions to be migrated.
After a suspended partition has been migrated to another managed system, it is exposed to accidental reassignment of its virtual storage devices while it remains suspended. Since there is no
Linux
November 2012
3
way to prevent this exposure, it is recommended that a suspended partition be resumed before
being migrated.
Valid values for this option are 1 if each suspended partition’s virtual storage devices are required
to be protected, or 2 if each suspended partition’s virtual storage devices are not required to be
protected. If this option is not specified, then this option defaults to the value 1. To migrate suspended partitions, you must specify a value of 2 and assume responsibility for ensuring the
integrity of each suspended partition’s virtual storage devices.
This option is only valid when validating or migrating partitions. This option is not valid when
performing any other operation.
-f
The name of the file containing the input data for this command. The input data consists of
attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format.
The format of the input data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Attributes that can be specified when validating or migrating a single partition:
dest_lpar_id
The partition ID to use on the destination managed
system
virtual_fc_mappings
Comma separated list of virtual fibre channel adapter
mappings, with each mapping having the following
format:
virtual-slot-number/vios-lpar-name/vios-lpar-ID
[/[vios-virtual-slot-number][/[vios-fc-port-name]]]
The first 2 ’/’ characters must be present. The
third ’/’ character is optional, but it must be
present if vios-virtual-slot-number or vios-fc-portname is specified. The last ’/’ character is
optional, but it must be present if vios-fc-port-name
is specified.
Optional values may be omitted. Optional values are
vios-lpar-name or vios-lpar-ID (one of those
values is required, but not both), vios-virtual-slotnumber, and vios-fc-port-name.
For example:
4//1/14/fcs0 specifies a mapping of the virtual fibre
channel client adapter with slot number 4 to the
virtual fibre channel server adapter with slot number
Linux
November 2012
4
14 in the VIOS partition with ID 1 on the
destination managed system. In addition, the mapping
specifies to use physical fibre channel port fcs0.
virtual_scsi_mappings
Comma separated list of virtual SCSI adapter mappings,
with each mapping having the following format:
virtual-slot-number/vios-lpar-name/vios-lpar-ID
[/vios-virtual-slot-number]
The first 2 ’/’ characters must be present. The
last ’/’ character is optional, but it must be
present if vios-virtual-slot-number is specified.
Optional values may be omitted. Optional values are
vios-lpar-name or vios-lpar-ID (one of those
values is required, but not both), and
vios-virtual-slot-number.
For example:
12/vios1//16 specifies a mapping of the virtual SCSI
adapter with slot number 12 to slot number 16 on the
VIOS partition vios1 on the destination managed
system.
source_msp_name
source_msp_id
source_msp_ipaddr
dest_msp_name
dest_msp_id
dest_msp_ipaddr
shared_proc_pool_name | shared_proc_pool_id
primary_rs_vios_name | primary_rs_vios_id
primary_paging_vios_name | primary_paging_vios_id
These attributes are deprecated. Use the
primary_rs_vios_name | primary_rs_vios_id
attributes instead.
Attributes that can be specified when validating or migrating one or more partitions. For each of
the following attributes, lpar-name and lpar-ID is the name or ID of the migrating partition. If the
-p option is used to specify the migrating partitions, then lpar-name is required and lpar-ID can be
omitted. If the --id option is used to specify the migrating partitions, then lpar-ID is required and
lpar-name can be omitted:
multiple_dest_lpar_ids
Comma separated list of partition IDs to use on the
destination managed system. The format is:
lpar-name/lpar-ID/dest-lpar-ID
For example:
lp16//16 specifies that migrating partition lp16 is to
use partition ID 16 on the destination managed system.
multiple_virtual_fc_mappings
Comma separated list of virtual fibre channel adapter
mappings, with each mapping having the following
format:
Linux
November 2012
5
lpar-name/lpar-ID/virtual-slot-number/vios-lpar-name/
vios-lpar-ID/[vios-virtual-slot-number][/
[vios-fc-port-name]]
See the virtual_fc_mappings attribute format for more
information.
multiple_virtual_scsi_mappings
Comma separated list of virtual SCSI adapter mappings,
with each mapping having the following format:
lpar-name/lpar-ID/virtual-slot-number/vios-lpar-name/
vios-lpar-ID/[vios-virtual-slot-number]
See the virtual_scsi_mappings attribute format for
more information.
multiple_shared_proc_pool_names
Comma separated list of the names of the shared
processor pools to use on the destination managed
system. The format is:
lpar-name/lpar-ID/shared-proc-pool-name
For example:
lp3//sp6 specifies that the migrating partition lp3
is to use shared processor pool sp6 on the destination
managed system.
multiple_shared_proc_pool_ids
Comma separated list of the IDs of the shared
processor pools to use on the destination managed
system. The format is:
lpar-name/lpar-ID/shared-proc-pool-ID
For example:
/3/6 specifies that the migrating partition with ID 3
is to use the shared processor pool with ID 6 on the
destination managed system.
multiple_primary_rs_vios_names
Comma separated list of the names of the VIOS
partitions to use on the destination managed system
as the primary VIOS partitions for accessing the
reserved storage devices of the migrating partitions.
The format is:
lpar-name/lpar-ID/vios-lpar-name
multiple_primary_rs_vios_ids
Comma separated list of the IDs of the VIOS
partitions to use on the destination managed system
as the primary VIOS partitions for accessing the
reserved storage devices of the migrating partitions.
The format is:
lpar-name/lpar-ID/vios-lpar-ID
multiple_profile_names
Linux
November 2012
6
Comma separated list of names of the partition
profiles to create for the migrating partitions
on the destination managed system. The format is:
lpar-name/lpar-ID/profile-name
For example:
lpar1//migprof specifies to create the partition
profile migprof for migrating partition lpar1
on the destination managed system.
source_msps
Comma separated list of source MSPs to use for the
operation. The format is:
MSP-name/MSP-ID/[MSP-IP-address]
Both ’/’ characters must be present, but optional
values may be omitted. Optional values are MSP-name
or MSP-ID (one of those values is required, but not
both), and MSP-IP-address.
For example:
msp1//9.1.2.3 specifies to use IP address 9.1.2.3 on
source MSP msp1 for the operation.
dest_msps
Comma separated list of destination MSPs to use for
the operation. The format is:
MSP-name/MSP-ID/[MSP-IP-address]
Both ’/’ characters must be present, but optional
values may be omitted. Optional values are MSP-name
or MSP-ID (one of those values is required, but not
both), and MSP-IP-address.
For example:
msp1// specifies to use any IP address on destination
MSP msp1 for the operation.
Attributes that can be specified for a system set operation:
inactive_prof_policy
Valid values are:
prof - use the last activated profile for
partitions when validating or migrating
inactive partitions
config - use the current configuration of
partitions when validating or migrating
inactive partitions
Attributes that can be specified for an MSP set operation:
num_active_migrations_configured
concurr_migration_perf_level
Valid values are 1 - 5
Linux
November 2012
7
Input data for this command can be specified with this option or the -i option. The -f and the -i
options are mutually exclusive.
Input data can be specified when migrating partitions, validating partition migrations, or performing a set operation. This option is not valid when performing any other operation.
-i
This option allows you to enter input data on the command line, instead of using a file. Data
entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be enclosed
in double quotes.
Input data for this command can be specified with this option or the -f option. The -i and the -f
options are mutually exclusive.
Input data can be specified when migrating partitions, validating partition migrations, or performing a set operation. This option is not valid when performing any other operation.
-r
The type of resource for which to set attributes related to partition migration operations. Valid values are sys for managed system, and lpar for mover service partition.
-w
The maximum time, in minutes, to wait for operating system commands issued by the management console to the partitions to be migrated to complete. If an operating system command does
not complete within the time specified, the partition migration operation for that partition will be
stopped.
wait-time must be a whole number. If wait-time is 0, the partition migration operation will not be
timed out.
If this option is not specified, a default value of 3 minutes is used.
This option is valid when migrating partitions or validating partition migrations. This option is not
valid when performing any other operation.
-d
The level of detail requested from operating system commands issued by the management console
to all partitions participating in migrations. Valid values are 0 (none) through 5 (highest).
If this option is not specified, a default value of 1 is used.
This option is valid when migrating partitions or validating partition migrations. This option is not
valid when performing any other operation.
--force This option allows you to force a recover operation to proceed when errors are encountered.
This option is only valid when recovering from a failed partition migration.
-v
Specify this option to enable verbose mode for the partition migration operation. When verbose
mode is enabled, detail messages and warning messages are displayed for successful partition
migrations. Detail messages and warning messages are always displayed for partition migrations
that fail, regardless of whether this option is specified.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Validate the operation to migrate partition mylpar from managed system system1 to managed system system2:
migrlpar -o v -m system1 -t system2 -p mylpar
-i ""virtual_scsi_mappings=12/vios1/,13/vios2/",dest_msp_name=vios1,
source_msp_name=vios"
Linux
November 2012
8
Validate the operation to migrate the partitions with IDs 3, 6, and 7 from managed system system1 to managed system system2:
migrlpar -o v -m system1 -t system2 --id 3,6,7
-i ""multiple_virtual_scsi_mappings=/3/12/vios1//32,/3/13/vios2//33,
/7/12/vios1//72",source_msps=vios1//9.3.4.5,dest_msps=vios1//"
Migrate the partition with ID 5 from managed system system1 to managed system system2:
migrlpar -o m -m system1 -t system2 --id 5 -n migprof
-i "virtual_fc_mappings=5//1/18/fcs0,dest_msp_id=1,source_msp_id=3"
Migrate the partition smp from managed system system1 to managed system system2, configure the partition to use redundant paging VIOS partitions on system2, and use vios1 as the primary paging VIOS for
the partition:
migrlpar -o m -m system1 -t system2 -p smp --redundantvios 1
-i "primary_rs_vios_name=vios1"
Migrate the partitions lp4 and lp5 from managed system system1 to managed system system2:
migrlpar -o m -m system1 -t system2 -p lp4,lp5 --mpio 2
-i ""multiple_dest_lpar_ids=lp4//21,lp5//22",
multiple_shared_proc_pool_names=lp5//sp1"
Stop the partition migration that is just starting for partition mylpar:
migrlpar -o s -m system1 -p mylpar
Recover the failed partition migration of partition mylpar:
migrlpar -o r -m system1 -p mylpar
Migrate the partition aix1 from managed system system1 to managed system system2, when system2 is
managed by the HMC with the host name hmc2:
mkauthkeys --ip hmc2 -u hmc2user
migrlpar -o m -m system1 -t system2 -p aix1 --ip hmc2 -u hmc2user
Set the inactive profile migration policy for all systems currently managed by this HMC:
migrlpar -o set -r sys -i "inactive_prof_policy=prof"
Set partition migration attributes for MSP vios2:
migrlpar -o set -r lpar -m sys1 -p vios2
-i "num_active_migrations_configured=10,
concurr_migration_perf_level=3"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
Linux
November 2012
9
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lslparmigr, mkauthkeys
Linux
November 2012
10
NAME
mkaccfg - create access control object
SYNOPSIS
mkaccfg -t {resourcerole | taskrole}
{-f configuration-file | -i "configuration-data"}
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
mkaccfg creates a new access control role.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of access control role to create. Valid values are resourcerole for managed resource role
and taskrole for task role.
-f
The name of the file containing the configuration data needed to create the access control role.
The configuration data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. These attribute name/value pairs form a configuration record. A line feed marks
the end of a configuration record. There can only be one configuration record in the file.
The format of a configuration record is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...<LF>
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...<LF>
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Attribute names for managed resource roles (all attributes are required):
name
name of the managed resource role to
create
resources
comma separated list of managed resource
objects
Attribute names for task roles (all attributes are required):
name
name of the task role to create
resources
comma separated list of tasks
parent
name of the parent task role on which to
base this task role. Valid values are
hmcsuperadmin, hmcoperator, hmcviewer,
hmcpe, hmcservicerep, or a user-defined
task role.
The -f and the -i options are mutually exclusive.
-i
Linux
This option allows you to enter configuration data on the command line, instead of using a file.
Data entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be
enclosed in double quotes.
September 2007
1
The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Create a managed resource role using the configuration data in the file /tmp/mr1file:
mkaccfg -t resourcerole -f /tmp/mr1file
Create a task role named tr1:
mkaccfg -t taskrole -i "name=tr1,parent=hmcsuperadmin,
"resources=cec:ChangeCoD+ListCoDInformation+
ListCECProperty,lpar:ChangeLPARProperty+ListLPARProperty+
CreateProfile""
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chaccfg, lsaccfg, rmaccfg
Linux
September 2007
2
NAME
mkauthkeys - manage SSH authentication keys
SYNOPSIS
To add an SSH key as an authorized key:
mkauthkeys {-a | --add} "string" [--help]
To remove an SSH key from the authorized keys:
mkauthkeys {-r | --remove} {"string" | -u user-ID} [--help]
To set up SSH key authentication for partition mobility operations between this Hardware Management
Console (HMC) and another management console:
mkauthkeys [-g] --ip IP-address -u user-ID [--passwd password]
[-t {rsa | dsa}] [--help]
To test SSH key authentication for partition mobility operations from this HMC to another management
console:
mkauthkeys --test --ip IP-address [-u user-ID] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
mkauthkeys manages SSH authentication keys.
mkauthkeys can be used to add or remove SSH keys as authorized keys for the user which issues this command.
mkauthkeys can be also be used to set up SSH key authentication for partition mobility operations between
this HMC and another management console.
OPTIONS
-a,--add
Adds the specified SSH key string as an authorized key for the user which issues this command.
The string is added to the user’s $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys2 file.
-r,--remove
Removes the specified SSH key string from the authorized keys for the user which issues this
command, or removes all of the SSH keys generated for the user specified in string from the
authorized keys for the user which issues this command.
If this option and the -u option is specified, then all of the authorized keys for user-ID will be
removed.
The keys are removed from the user’s $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys2 file.
string
To add or remove an SSH key as an authorized key for the user which issues this command, specify the SSH key to add or remove with this option.
To remove all of the SSH keys generated for a user from the authorized keys for the user which
issues this command, specify the user for which the SSH keys to remove were generated.
--ip
The IP address or host name of the remote management console with which to set up partition
mobility operations.
Public and private SSH keys will be generated for the ccfw user on this HMC. The keys will be
stored on this HMC in the $HOME/.ssh/ccfw directory for the user which issues this command.
Then, if SSH keys have not already been set up on the remote management console for the remote
user, then the saved public key will be sent to the remote management console and stored in the
remote user’s $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys2 file.
Linux
May 2011
1
-u
When removing all authorized SSH keys for a user, use this option to specify the user ID.
When setting up SSH key authentication for partition mobility operations between this HMC and
another management console, use this option to specify the user ID to use on the remote management console.
--passwd
When setting up SSH key authentication for partition mobility operations between this HMC and
another management console, use this option to specify the password for the user ID to use on the
remote management console. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to enter the password.
-t
The type of SSH keys to generate when setting up SSH key authentication for partition mobility
operations between this HMC and another management console. Valid values are rsa for RSA or
dsa for DSA. If this option is not specified, then RSA keys will be generated.
-g
Specify this option when setting up SSH key authentication for partition mobility operations
between this HMC and another management console to allow partition mobility operations to be
performed from the remote management console to this HMC. If this option is not specified, then
partition mobility operations can only be performed from this HMC to the remote management
console.
When this option is specified, public and private SSH keys will also be generated for the ccfw user
on the remote management console. The keys will be stored on the remote management console
in the remote user’s $HOME/.ssh/ccfw directory. Then, if SSH keys have not already been set up
on this HMC for the user that issues this command, then the saved public key will be sent to this
HMC and stored in this user’s $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys2 file.
--test
Tests SSH key authentication for partition mobility operations from this HMC to the management
console specified with the --ip option.
If the return code from this command is 0, then SSH key authentication is working properly.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
To add the SSH key ssh-rsa AAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAA [email protected], which was generated for the user
[email protected], as an authorized key for your user ID:
mkauthkeys -a "ssh-rsa AAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAA [email protected]"
To remove the SSH key ssh-rsa AAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAA [email protected], which was generated for user
[email protected], from the authorized keys for your user ID:
mkauthkeys -r "ssh-rsa AAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAA [email protected]"
To remove all of the SSH keys generated for the user [email protected] from the authorized keys for your user
ID:
mkauthkeys -r [email protected]
To remove all of the authorized SSH keys for user hmcUser1:
mkauthkeys -r -u hmcUser1
To set up partition mobility operations from your user ID on this HMC to the HMC with host name hmc2
for the user hmc2user on HMC hmc2 (you will be prompted for hmc2user’s password):
Linux
May 2011
2
mkauthkeys --ip hmc2 -u hmc2user
To set up partition mobility operations from your user ID on this HMC to the Systems Director Management Console (SDMC) with host name sdmc for the SDMC user sdmcuser, and from user sdmcuser to
this HMC for this user:
mkauthkeys -g --ip sdmc -u sdmcuser --passwd sdmcuserpw
Check if partition mobility operations from your user ID on this HMC to the HMC with host name hmc2
for the user hmc2user on HMC hmc2 have been set up:
mkauthkeys --ip hmc2 -u hmc2user --test
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
May 2011
3
NAME
mkhmcusr - create a Hardware Management Console user
SYNOPSIS
mkhmcusr -u user-name -a task-role [-d description]
[--passwd password] [-M number-of-days]
[--auth {local | kerberos | ldap}]
[--remoteuser remote-user-name] [--help]
or
mkhmcusr {-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
mkhmcusr creates a Hardware Management Console (HMC) user.
OPTIONS
-u
The user name of the HMC user to create. The user name cannot be longer than 32 characters, and
it must begin with a letter.
You can either use this option, or use the name attribute with the -f or -i option, to specify the user
name. The -u, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
-a
The access control task role for this user. Valid values are hmcsuperadmin, hmcoperator,
hmcviewer, hmcpe, hmcservicerep, or a user-defined task role.
You can either use this option, or use the taskrole attribute with the -f or -i option, to specify the
access control task role. The -a, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
-d
The description for this user. description can be any string.
You can either use this option, or use the description attribute with the -f or -i option, to specify
the description. If a description is not specified, then the description will be set to "HMC User".
The -d, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
--passwd
The password for this user. The password must be at least 7 characters in length.
A password cannot be specified when creating a remotely authenticated Kerberos or LDAP user.
You can either use this option, or use the passwd attribute with the -f or -i option, to specify the
password. If this option is omitted or the -f or -i option is specified and the passwd attribute is
omitted, you will be prompted to enter the password. The --passwd, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
-M
The number of days until the password for this user expires.
A password expiration cannot be specified when creating a remotely authenticated Kerberos or
LDAP user.
You can either use this option, or use the pwage attribute with the -f or -i option, to specify the
password expiration. If a password expiration is not specified, then this user’s password will never
expire. The -M, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
--auth The authentication type for this user. Valid values are local for local authentication, kerberos for
remote Kerberos authentication, and ldap for remote LDAP authentication.
You can either use this option, or use the authentication_type attribute with the -f or -i option, to
specify the authentication type. If an authentication type is not specified, then the authentication
Linux
October 2009
1
type for this user will be set to local authentication. The --auth, -f, and -i options are mutually
exclusive.
--remoteuser
The remote user ID used for remote Kerberos authentication for this user. This is the user’s Kerberos principal. The format of a typical Kerberos principal is primary/[email protected]
You can either use this option, or use the remote_user_name attribute with the -f or -i option, to
specify the remote user ID. A remote user ID must be specified when creating a remotely authenticated Kerberos user. The --remoteuser, -f, and -i options are mutually exclusive.
-f
The name of the file containing the input data for this command. The input data consists of
attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format.
The format of the input data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Valid attribute names for this command:
name
taskrole
Valid values are hmcsuperadmin, hmcoperator,
hmcviewer, hmcpe, hmcservicerep, or a user-defined
task role
[resourcerole]
[description]
[passwd]
[pwage]
number of days
[min_pwage]
number of days
[authentication_type]
Valid values are:
local - local authentication
kerberos - remote Kerberos authentication
ldap - remote LDAP authentication
[session_timeout]
number of minutes
[verify_timeout]
number of minutes
[idle_timeout]
number of minutes
[inactivity_expiration]
number of days
[remote_webui_access]
Valid values are:
0 - do not allow this user to log in remotely to the
HMC Web user interface
1 - allow this user to log in remotely to the
HMC Web user interface
[remote_ssh_access]
Valid values are:
0 - do not allow this user to log in remotely to the
HMC using SSH
1 - allow this user to log in remotely to the
HMC using SSH
Linux
October 2009
2
[remote_user_name]
Input data for this command can be specified with this option, the -i option, or any of the other
command options. The -f and the -i options are mutually exclusive, and they cannot be specified if
any of the other command options are specified.
-i
This option allows you to enter input data on the command line, instead of using a file. Data
entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be enclosed
in double quotes.
Input data for this command can be specified with this option, the -f option, or any of the other
command options. The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive, and they cannot be specified if
any of the other command options are specified.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Create the user sysadmin:
mkhmcusr -u sysadmin -a hmcsuperadmin --passwd aielkw3j
-M 180 -d "System Administrator"
or
mkhmcusr -i "name=sysadmin,taskrole=hmcsuperadmin,passwd=
aielkw3j,pwage=180,description=System Administrator"
Create the user myhmcuser (the user’s password must be entered when prompted):
mkhmcusr -u myhmcuser -a hmcviewer
or
mkhmcusr -i "name=myhmcuser,taskrole=hmcviewer"
Create a remotely authenticated Kerberos user krbuser:
mkhmcusr -u krbuser -a hmcoperator --auth kerberos
--remoteuser krbuser/[email protected]
or
mkhmcusr -i "name=krbuser,taskrole=hmcoperator,
authentication_type=kerberos,remote_user_name=
krbuser/[email protected]"
Create a remotely authenticated LDAP user ldapuser:
mkhmcusr -u ldapuser -a hmcsuperadmin --auth ldap
or
mkhmcusr -i "name=ldapuser,taskrole=hmcsuperadmin,
authentication_type=ldap"
Linux
October 2009
3
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmcusr, lshmcusr, rmhmcusr, lsaccfg
Linux
October 2009
4
NAME
mkpwdpolicy - create a password policy
SYNOPSIS
mkpwdpolicy {-f input-data-file | -i "input-data"} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
mkpwdpolicy creates a password policy for the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
mkpwdpolicy only creates a password policy. The chpwdpolicy command must be used to activate the
password policy.
OPTIONS
-f
The name of the file containing the data to create the password policy. The data consists of
attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format.
The format of the data is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...
Valid attribute names for this command:
name
The name of the password policy to create.
[description]
[min_pwage]
The number of days that must elapse before a password
can be changed. Defaults to 1 day.
[pwage]
The number of days that can elapse before a password
expires and must be changed. A value of 99999
indicates no password expiration. Defaults to 180
days.
[warn_pwage]
The number of days prior to password expiration when a
warning message will begin to be displayed. Defaults
to 7 days.
[min_length]
The minimum password length. Defaults to 8
characters.
[hist_size]
The number of times a password must be changed before
a password can be reused. This value cannot exceed
50, and defaults to 10.
[min_digits]
The minimum number of digits that a password must
contain. Defaults to 0.
[min_uppercase_chars]
The minimum number of uppercase characters that a
password must contain. Defaults to 1.
[min_lowercase_chars]
The minimum number of lowercase characters that a
password must contain. Defaults to 6.
[min_special_chars]
The minimum number of special characters that a
password must contain. Special characters include
symbols, punctuation, and white space characters.
Linux
September 2010
1
Defaults to 0.
Brackets around an attribute name indicate that the attribute is optional.
Comments are allowed in the input file. Comments must begin with the ’#’ character.
The data to create the password policy is required to be specified with this option or the -i option.
The -f and the -i options are mutually exclusive.
-i
This option allows you to enter the data to create the password policy on the command line,
instead of using a file. Data entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a
file, and must be enclosed in double quotes.
The data to create the password policy is required to be specified with this option or the -f option.
The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Create a password policy:
mkpwdpolicy -i "name=xyzPolicy,description=Company xyz policy,
pwage=90,min_digits=2,min_uppercase_chars=0,min_lowercase_chars=0"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chpwdpolicy, lspwdpolicy, rmpwdpolicy
Linux
September 2010
2
NAME
mksyscfg - create system resources
SYNOPSIS
mksyscfg -r {lpar | prof | sysprof} -m managed-system
[{-f configuration-file | -i "configuration-data"}]
[-o save {-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
-n profile-name [--force]]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
mksyscfg creates partitions, partition profiles, or system profiles for the managed-system.
mksyscfg can also be used to save the current configuration of a partition to a partition profile.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of system resources to create. Valid values are lpar for partitions, prof for partition profiles, and sysprof for system profiles.
When a partition is created, the default profile for the partition is also created.
-m
The name of the managed system for which the system resources are to be created. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-f
The name of the file containing the configuration data needed to create the system resources. The
configuration data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. These attribute name/value pairs form a configuration record. A line feed marks
the end of a configuration record. The file must contain one configuration record for each resource
to be created, and each configuration record must be for the same resource type.
The format of a configuration record is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...<LF>
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...<LF>
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in double quotes.
Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may need to be preceded by an
escape character, which is usually a ’\’ character.
Attribute names for partitions (see below for attribute names that are common to both partitions
and partition profiles):
name
name of the partition to create
[lpar_id]
profile_name
name of the default profile to create
lpar_env
Valid values are aixlinux, os400, or
vioserver
[allow_perf_collection]
Valid values are:
Linux
November 2012
1
0 - do not allow
1 - allow
This attribute replaces the
shared_proc_pool_util_auth attribute.
Setting this attribute also sets the
shared_proc_pool_util_auth attribute
to the same value.
[shared_proc_pool_util_auth]
Valid values are:
0 - do not allow authority
1 - allow authority
This attribute has been deprecated. Use
the allow_perf_collection attribute
instead. Setting this attribute also
sets the allow_perf_collection
attribute to the same value.
[lpar_avail_priority]
Valid values are 0 - 255.
[msp]
Virtual I/O server only
Valid values are:
0 - the partition is not a mover service
partition
1 - the partition is a mover service
partition
[time_ref]
Valid values are:
0 - the partition is not a time reference
partition
1 - the partition is a time reference
partition
[suspend_capable]
AIX, Linux, and IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - the partition cannot be suspended
1 - the partition can be suspended
[remote_restart_capable]
AIX, Linux, and IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - remote restart cannot be performed for the
partition
1 - remote restart can be performed for the
partition
[primary_rs_vios_name | primary_rs_vios_id]
Remote restart capable partitions only
[secondary_rs_vios_name | secondary_rs_vios_id]
Remote restart capable partitions only
To set no secondary reserved storage VIOS specify
none for secondary_rs_vios_id
[rs_device_name]
Remote restart capable partitions only
Name of the device on the primary reserved storage
VIOS partition
[vtpm_enabled]
Linux
November 2012
2
AIX, Linux, and VIOS only
Valid values are:
0 - virtual Trusted Platform Module (vTPM) is not
enabled for this partition
1 - vTPM is enabled for this partition
[os400_restricted_io_mode]
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - disable IBM i restricted I/O mode
1 - enable IBM i restricted I/O mode
[hardware_mem_encryption]
Valid values are:
0 - disable hardware-accelerated encryption
1 - enable hardware-accelerated encryption
[hardware_mem_expansion]
Valid values are:
0 - disable hardware-accelerated Active Memory
Expansion
1 - enable hardware-accelerated Active Memory
Expansion
Attribute names for partition profiles (see below for attribute names that are common to both partition profiles and partitions):
name
name of the partition profile to create
lpar_name | lpar_id
name or ID of the partition for which
to create the profile
Attribute names for both partitions and partition profiles:
[all_resources]
Valid values are:
0 - do not use all the managed system
resources
1 - use all the managed system resources
(this option is not valid for IBM i
partitions on IBM System p5 or
eServer p5 servers)
min_mem
megabytes
desired_mem
megabytes
max_mem
megabytes
[min_num_huge_pages]
AIX and Linux only
[desired_num_huge_pages]
AIX and Linux only
[max_num_huge_pages]
AIX and Linux only
[mem_mode]
Valid values are:
ded - dedicated memory
shared - shared memory
Linux
November 2012
3
[desired_io_entitled_mem]
Specify the number of megabytes or specify auto for
automatic I/O entitled memory management mode
[mem_weight]
[primary_paging_vios_name | primary_paging_vios_id]
[secondary_paging_vios_name | secondary_paging_vios_id]
To set no secondary paging VIOS specify none for
secondary_paging_vios_id
[mem_expansion]
Valid values are:
0
- disable Active Memory Expansion
1.00-10.00 - expansion factor
[hpt_ratio]
Ratio of hardware page table size to the maximum
memory for the partition. Valid values are displayed
by the lshwres -r mem -m managed-system
--level sys -F possible_hpt_ratios command.
[bsr_arrays]
[proc_mode]
Valid values are:
ded - dedicated processors
shared - shared processors
[min_procs]
[desired_procs]
[max_procs]
[min_proc_units]
[desired_proc_units]
[max_proc_units]
[min_5250_cpw_percent]
Only valid for IBM i partitions in
managed systems that support the
assignment of 5250 CPW percentages
[desired_5250_cpw_percent]
Only valid for IBM i partitions in
managed systems that support the
assignment of 5250 CPW percentages
[max_5250_cpw_percent]
Only valid for IBM i partitions in
managed systems that support the
assignment of 5250 CPW percentages
[sharing_mode]
Valid values for partitions using
dedicated processors are:
keep_idle_procs - never share
processors
share_idle_procs - share processors only
when partition is inactive
share_idle_procs_active - share
processors only when partition
is active
share_idle_procs_always - always share
processors
Valid values for partitions using shared
processors are:
Linux
November 2012
4
cap - capped
uncap - uncapped
[uncap_weight]
[shared_proc_pool_name | shared_proc_pool_id]
[affinity_group_id]
Memory and processor affinity group in which the
partition will participate. Valid values are
none and 1 - 255.
[io_slots]
Comma separated list of I/O slots, with
each I/O slot having the following
format:
slot-DRC-index/[slot-IO-pool-ID]/
is-required
Both ’/’ characters must be present, but
optional values may be omitted. Optional
values are slot-IO-pool-ID.
Valid values for is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
For example:
21030002/3/1 specifies an I/O slot with a
DRC index of 21030002, it is assigned to
I/O pool 3, and it is a required slot.
[lpar_io_pool_ids]
comma separated
[load_source_slot]
IBM i only, required on POWER5 servers
DRC index of I/O slot or virtual slot number
[alt_restart_device_slot]
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot, DRC index of HEA logical
port, or virtual slot number
console_slot
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot, DRC index of HEA logical
port, virtual slot number, or the value hmc
[alt_console_slot]
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot
[op_console_slot]
IBM i only
DRC index of I/O slot
[auto_start]
Valid values are:
0 - off
1 - on
[boot_mode]
AIX, Linux, and virtual I/O server only
Valid values are:
Linux
November 2012
5
norm - normal
dd - diagnostic with default boot list
ds - diagnostic with stored boot list
of - Open Firmware OK prompt
sms - System Management Services
[power_ctrl_lpar_ids | power_ctrl_lpar_names]
comma separated
[conn_monitoring]
Valid values are:
0 - off
1 - on
[hsl_pool_id]
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - HSL OptiConnect is disabled
1 - HSL OptiConnect is enabled
[virtual_opti_pool_id]
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - virtual OptiConnect is disabled
1 - virtual OptiConnect is enabled
[max_virtual_slots]
[virtual_eth_adapters]
Comma separated list of virtual ethernet adapters,
with each adapter having the following format:
virtual-slot-number/is-IEEE/port-vlan-ID/
[additional-vlan-IDs]/[trunk-priority]/
is-required[/[virtual-switch][/[MAC-address]/
[allowed-OS-MAC-addresses]/[QoS-priority]]]
The first 5 ’/’ characters must be present. The 6th
’/’ character is optional, but it must be present if
virtual-switch or any of the values following
virtual-switch are specified. The last 3 ’/’
characters are optional, but all 3 must be present if
MAC-address, allowed-OS-MAC-addresses, or QoS-priority
is specified.
Optional values may be omitted. Optional values are
additional-vlan-IDs, trunk-priority, virtual-switch,
MAC-address, allowed-OS-MAC-addresses, and
QoS-priority.
Valid values for is-IEEE and is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
If values are specified for additional-vlan-IDs, they
must be comma separated.
Valid values for trunk-priority:
0
- this adapter is not a trunk adapter (default
value)
Linux
November 2012
6
1 - 15 - this adapter is a trunk adapter with the
specified priority
If MAC-address is not specified, a unique MAC address
will be automatically generated for the adapter. If
it is specified, it must be specified as 12
hexadecimal characters. It is highly recommended that
you do not specify MAC-address so that the MAC address
will be automatically generated.
allowed-OS-MAC-addresses can be a comma separated list
of 1 to 4 MAC addresses, where each MAC address is
specified as 12 hexadecimal characters, or it can be
one of the following values:
all - all OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
(default value)
none - no OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
Valid values for QoS-priority:
none - do not use Quality of Service (QoS) (default
value)
0 - 7 - the QoS priority level to use
For example:
13/1/5/6,7/2/1
specifies a virtual ethernet adapter with a virtual
slot number of 13, it is IEEE 802.1Q compatible, it
has a port virtual LAN ID of 5, additional virtual LAN
IDs of 6 and 7, it is a trunk adapter with a trunk
priority of 2, and it is required. It also
uses the default virtual switch, it uses an
automatically generated MAC address, it allows all OS
defined MAC addresses, and it does not use QoS.
4/1/3//0/1///fecd537a910b,fecd537a910c/2
specifies a virtual ethernet adapter with a virtual
slot number of 4, it is IEEE 802.1Q compatible, it
has a port virtual LAN ID of 3, no additional virtual
LAN IDs, it is not a trunk adapter, it is required, it
uses the default virtual switch, it uses an
automatically generated MAC address, it allows the OS
defined MAC addresses FE:CD:53:7A:91:0B and
FE:CD:53:7A:91:0C, and it uses a QoS priority level
of 2.
[virtual_fc_adapters]
Comma separated list of virtual fibre channel
adapters, with each adapter having the following
format:
virtual-slot-number/client-or-server/
[remote-lpar-ID]/[remote-lpar-name]/
remote-slot-number/[wwpns]/is-required
All 6 ’/’ characters must be present, but optional
Linux
November 2012
7
values may be omitted. Optional values are
remote-lpar-ID or remote-lpar-name (one of those
values is required, but not both).
wwpns is optional for a client adapter, and is not
allowed for a server adapter. If wwpns is not
specified, WWPNs will be automatically generated for a
client adapter. It is highly recommended that you do
not specify wwpns so that WWPNs will be automatically
generated.
Valid values for client-or-server:
client
server
Valid values for is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
For example:
4/client//vios_p1/16//1
specifies a virtual fibre channel client adapter
with a virtual slot number of 4, a remote (server)
partition name of vios_p1, a remote (server) slot
number of 16, and it is required. WWPNs will be
automatically generated for this client adapter.
[virtual_scsi_adapters]
Comma separated list of virtual SCSI
adapters, with each adapter having the
following format:
virtual-slot-number/client-or-server/
[remote-lpar-ID]/[remote-lpar-name]/
[remote-slot-number]/is-required
All 5 ’/’ characters must be present, but
optional values may be omitted. Optional
values for server adapters are
remote-lpar-ID, remote-lpar-name,
and remote-slot-number. Optional values
for client adapters are remote-lpar-ID or
remote-lpar-name (one of those values
is required, but not both).
Valid values for client-or-server:
client
server
Valid values for is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
For example:
14/client/2//13/0
Linux
November 2012
8
specifies a virtual SCSI client adapter
with a virtual slot number of 14, a
remote (server) partition ID of 2, a
remote (server) slot number of 13, and
it is not required.
[virtual_serial_adapters]
Comma separated list of virtual serial
adapters, with each adapter having the
following format:
virtual-slot-number/client-or-server/
[supports-HMC]/[remote-lpar-ID]/
[remote-lpar-name]/[remote-slot-number]/
is-required
All 6 ’/’ characters must be present, but
optional values may be omitted. Optional
values for server adapters are
supports-HMC, remote-lpar-ID,
remote-lpar-name, and remote-slot-number.
Optional values for client adapters are
remote-lpar-ID or remote-lpar-name (one
of those values is required, but not
both), and the supports-HMC value is
not allowed.
Valid values for client-or-server:
client
server
Valid values for supports-HMC:
0 - no
Valid values for is-required:
0 - no
1 - yes
For example:
14/server/0////0
specifies a virtual serial server adapter
with a virtual slot number of 14, it does
not support an HMC connection, any client
adapter is allowed to connect to it, and
it is not required.
[hca_adapters]
AIX, Linux, and virtual I/O server only
Comma separated list of Host Channel
adapters (HCA), with each adapter having
the following format:
adapter-ID/GUID/capability
All 3 values must be specified for each
adapter.
Linux
November 2012
9
Valid values for capability:
1 - low
2 - medium
3 - high
4 - dedicated
For example:
23000cff/2550000000609/3 specifies
an HCA with an adapter ID of 23000cff,
a Globally Unique ID (GUID) of
2:55:00:00:00:06:09, and a capability
setting of high.
[lhea_logical_ports]
Comma separated list of Logical Host Ethernet adapter
(LHEA) logical ports, with each logical port having
the following format:
adapter-ID/port-group/physical-port-ID/
logical-port-ID/[allowed-VLAN-IDs][/
allowed-OS-MAC-addresses]
The first 4 ’/’ characters must be present. The
last ’/’ character is optional, but it must be
present if allowed-OS-MAC-addresses is specified.
Optional values may be omitted. Optional values are
allowed-VLAN-IDs and allowed-OS-MAC-addresses.
If values are specified for allowed-VLAN-IDs, they
must be comma separated, or one of the following
values can be specified:
all - allowed to participate in all VLANs
none - not allowed to participate in any VLAN
(default value)
allowed-OS-MAC-addresses can be a comma separated list
of 1 to 4 MAC addresses, where each MAC address is
specified as 12 hexadecimal characters, or it can be
one of the following values:
all - all OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
(default value)
none - no OS defined MAC addresses are allowed
For example:
23000000/2/0/1/3 specifies logical port 1 for
physical port 0 belonging to port group 2 of the
Host Ethernet adapter (HEA) with an adapter ID of
23000000. This logical port is allowed to
participate in the VLAN with an ID of 3 only.
It also allows all OS defined MAC addresses.
23000000/2/1/5/all/fecd537a910b,fecd537a910c
specifies logical port 5 for physical port 1
belonging to port group 2 of the HEA with an adapter
ID of 23000000. This logical port is allowed to
Linux
November 2012
10
participate in all VLANs, and it allows the OS defined
MAC addresses FE:CD:53:7A:91:0B and FE:CD:53:7A:91:0C.
[lhea_capabilities]
Comma separated list of LHEA
capabilities, with each capability
having one of the following formats:
adapter-ID/capability
or
adapter-ID/5/ieq/nieq/qp/cq/mr
where ieq (interruptible event queues),
nieq (non-interruptible event queues),
qp (queue pairs), cq (completion
queues), and mr (memory regions) each
specify the resource amount in addition
to the base minimum.
Valid values for capability:
0 - base minimum
1 - low
2 - medium
3 - high
4 - dedicated
For example:
23000000/3 sets the LHEA
capability for the HEA with an adapter ID
of 23000000 to high.
[sni_device_ids]
AIX, Linux, and virtual I/O server only
Comma separated list of Switch Network
Interface (SNI) adapter device IDs
[work_group_id]
Specify none if you are not using
Enterprise Workload Manager (EWLM)
[redundant_err_path_reporting]
Valid values are:
0 - disable
1 - enable
[electronic_err_reporting]
IBM i only
Valid values are:
0 - disable
1 - enable
[lpar_proc_compat_mode]
The valid values for the managed-system are
displayed by the lssyscfg -r sys -m managed-system
-F lpar_proc_compat_modes command.
Attribute names for system profiles:
name
Linux
November 2012
11
name of the system profile to create
lpar_names | lpar_ids
comma separated
profile_names
comma separated
Brackets around an attribute name indicate that the attribute is optional.
The -f and the -i options are mutually exclusive.
Configuration data is required to be specified with this option or the -i option except when -o save
is specified to save the current configuration of a partition to a partition profile. This option is not
valid when -o save is specified.
-i
This option allows you to enter configuration data on the command line, instead of using a file.
Data entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in a file, and must be
enclosed in double quotes.
When this option is used, only a single system resource can be created.
The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive.
Configuration data is required to be specified with this option or the -f option except when -o save
is specified to save the current configuration of a partition to a partition profile. This option is not
valid when -o save is specified.
-o
The operation to perform. The only valid value is save to save the current configuration of a partition to a partition profile.
If this option is not specified, then new system resources will be created using the configuration
data specified with the -f or -i option.
-p
The name of the partition whose current configuration is to be saved to a partition profile.
You can either use this option to specify the name of the partition whose current configuration is to
be saved, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
A partition is required to be specified with this option or the --id option when -o save is specified
to save the current configuration of a partition to a partition profile. This option is not valid otherwise.
--id
The ID of the partition whose current configuration is to be saved to a partition profile.
You can either use this option to specify the ID of the partition whose current configuration is to
be saved, or use the -p option to specify the partition’s name. The --id and the -p options are
mutually exclusive.
A partition is required to be specified with this option or the -p option when -o save is specified to
save the current configuration of a partition to a partition profile. This option is not valid otherwise.
-n
The name of the partition profile to which to save the partition configuration. If profile-name is the
name of an existing partition profile, this command will fail unless the --force option is specified.
This option is required when -o save is specified to save the current configuration of a partition to
a partition profile. This option is not valid otherwise.
Linux
November 2012
12
--force When saving the current configuration of a partition to a partition profile, specify this option to
overwrite an existing partition profile. Full system profiles cannot be overwritten.
This option is only valid when -o save is specified to save the current configuration of a partition
to a partition profile.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Create an AIX or Linux partition:
mksyscfg -r lpar -m system1 -i "name=aix_lpar2,
profile_name=prof1,lpar_env=aixlinux,min_mem=256,
desired_mem=1024,max_mem=1024,proc_mode=ded,
min_procs=1,desired_procs=1,max_procs=2,
sharing_mode=share_idle_procs,auto_start=1,
boot_mode=norm,lpar_io_pool_ids=3,
"io_slots=21010003/3/1,21030003//0""
Create an IBM i partition profile:
mksyscfg -r prof -m 9406-570*34134441 -i "name=prof2,
lpar_id=3,min_mem=512,desired_mem=512,max_mem=1024,
proc_mode=shared,min_procs=1,desired_procs=1,max_procs=2,
min_proc_units=0.1,desired_proc_units=0.5,max_proc_units=1.5,
sharing_mode=uncap,uncap_weight=128,auto_start=1,
"lpar_io_pool_ids=1,2",
"io_slots=2101001B/1/1,2103001B/2/1,2105001B//0",
load_source_slot=2101001B,console_slot=hmc,
max_virtual_slots=14,
"virtual_scsi_adapters=12/client/2//13/1,13/server////1""
Create partition profiles using the configuration data in the file /tmp/profcfg:
mksyscfg -r prof -m system1 -f /tmp/profcfg
Create a new partition profile by saving the current configuration of a partition:
mksyscfg -r prof -m system1 -o save -p p1 -n newProfile
Create a system profile:
mksyscfg -r sysprof -m system1 -i "name=sysprof1,
"lpar_names=lpar1,lpar2","profile_names=prof1,prof1""
Save the current configuration of a partition to an existing profile:
mksyscfg -r prof -m system1 -o save -p aix1 -n activeProfile --force
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
Linux
November 2012
13
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsyscfg, lssyscfg, rmsyscfg
Linux
November 2012
14
NAME
mksysconn - create system connection
SYNOPSIS
To establish a connection and add a system or frame to the Hardware Management Console (HMC):
mksysconn --ip IP-address [-r {sys | frame}]
[--passwd password] [--force] [--help]
To enable all systems and frames to be automatically discovered by the HMC when using DHCP:
mksysconn -o auto [--help]
DESCRIPTION
mksysconn establishes a connection from the Hardware Management Console (HMC) to a system in the
network and adds the system to the systems managed by the HMC. If a connection to the system cannot be
established because the network is down, the service processor for the system is down, or too many other
HMCs have already established a connection to the system, the system will be added as a managed system
which is in the No Connection state.
mksysconn can also establish a connection from the HMC to a frame in the network and add the frame to
the frames managed by the HMC. If a connection to the frame cannot be established because the network is
down, the bulk power assembly (BPA) for the frame is down, or too many other HMCs have already established a connection to the frame, the frame will be added as a managed frame which is in the No Connection state.
If your HMC is set up as a DHCP server on a private network, mksysconn -o auto can enable all systems
and frames to be automatically discovered by the HMC in the event that the Remove Connection task or the
rmsysconn command was previously run to remove a system or frame from the HMC.
If your HMC is set up as a DHCP server on a private network, do not use this command to establish
HMC connections to managed systems and frames that are DHCP clients. This command is intended
for use on a public network only, where the systems are set to use static IP addresses. Using this command in a DHCP environment establishes a temporary connection that will not continue to work
properly over network configuration changes, system power loss, and service repair actions.
OPTIONS
--ip
To connect to a system and add the system to the systems managed by the HMC, specify the IP
address or host name of the service processor for the system.
To connect to a frame and add the frame to the frames managed by the HMC, specify the IP
address or host name of one side of the bulk power assembly (BPA) for the frame. Note that to
properly connect to a frame, it is recommended that you run this command twice, once for each
side of the BPA, in order to connect to both sides of the BPA for the frame.
-r
The type of resource to which to connect and add to the HMC. Valid values are sys for system and
frame for frame. If this option is omitted, the HMC determines the resource type by determining
if the specified IP address belongs to a system or a frame. If the HMC is unable to determine if
the specified IP address belongs to a system or a frame, this command will fail unless the --force
option is specified.
--passwd
The HMC Access password for the system or the frame to which to connect. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted to enter the password.
--force If the HMC is unable to determine if the specified IP address belongs to a system or a frame, use
this option to force the HMC to attempt to establish a connection. The HMC will use the value
specified with the -r option to determine the type of connection to establish. If the -r option is not
specified, the HMC will attempt to establish a connection to a system.
Linux
November 2012
1
-o
If your HMC is set up as a DHCP server on a private network, specify auto with this option to
enable the HMC to automatically discover all systems and frames. You may need to do this if the
Remove Connection task or the rmsysconn command was previously run to remove a system or
frame from the HMC, and you want the HMC to be able to manage a system or frame with the
same IP address again. Whenever a managed system or a managed frame is removed from the
HMC when using DHCP, the HMC places the IP address(es) of that system or frame in a list of
removed IP addresses. Any IP address in that list will not be automatically rediscovered by the
HMC. The mksysconn -o auto command removes all IP addresses from that list. To remove a
specific IP address from that list, you can run the rmsysconn -o rediscover command instead.
auto is the only value that can be specified with this option. When this option is specified, all
other options are ignored.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Connect to and add the system with the host name sys1.company.com:
mksysconn --ip sys1.company.com --passwd sys1pw
Connect to and add the system with the IP address 9.3.152.145 (the HMC Access password for the system
must be entered when prompted):
mksysconn --ip 9.3.152.145
Connect to and add the frame with the host names frame1_A.company.com and frame1_B.company.com:
mksysconn --ip frame1_A.company.com -r frame --passwd
frame1pw
mksysconn --ip frame1_B.company.com -r frame --passwd
frame1pw
To enable all systems and frames to be automatically discovered by the HMC when using DHCP:
mksysconn -o auto
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lssysconn, rmsysconn, lssyscfg
Linux
November 2012
2
NAME
mksysplan - make system plan file
SYNOPSIS
mksysplan -f file-name -m managed-system
[--check] [-d "description"]
[--noprobe] [--novios] [--nohwdisc] [--noinvscout]
[-v] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
mksysplan creates a system plan file that represents the information known about the hardware, partitions,
profiles, and partition provisioning for the managed-system.
By default, mksysplan will perform additional inventory probes of active partitions, attempt hardware discovery for inactive partitions or unallocated hardware, and gather additional information from Virtual I/O
Server (VIOS) partitions. Additional information from VIOS partitions is only gathered for POWER5 and
POWER6 servers.
OPTIONS
-f
Specifies the file name that will contain the system plan that this command creates. If the file does
not exist, the command will create it in the system plan file directory on the Hardware Management Console (HMC). If the file exists, the command will overwrite the contents of the file unless
the --check option is specified.
The file name can only consist of the alphanumeric characters (upper and lower case) and a set of
special characters (comma, period, hyphen, underscore, and space). The file name cannot begin
with a period or hyphen.
The file name must end with the .sysplan suffix.
-m
Specifies the name of the managed system that the command will use to get the information to create the system plan file.
The name can be either the user-defined name for the managed system, or it can be in the form ttttmmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number
of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed
systems with the same user-defined name.
--check
Specifies that this command will check the system plan directory to see if the file name specified
with the -f option already exists. If the file does exist, the command will fail with an error message.
-d
Specifies a description that the command will add to the created file.
--noprobe
Limit the inventory gathering to obtain only the PCI slot devices without any further inventory
probes of active partitions, without any refresh of inactive partition or unallocated hardware information, and without gathering additional information from VIOS partitions.
--novios
Do not gather additional information from VIOS partitions.
This option is always in effect for POWER7 and later servers.
--nohwdisc
Do not perform hardware discovery for inactive partitions or unallocated hardware.
Linux
September 2010
1
--noinvscout
Do not perform additional inventory probes of active partitions.
-v
Displays verbose output during command processing, in addition to the default messages.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Make a system plan file sysplan.sysplan that represents the configuration of the managed system mySystem:
mksysplan -f sysplan.sysplan -m mySystem
Make a system plan file sysplan.sysplan that represents the configuration of the managed system
9406-570*3413556, and only survey PCI devices in slots:
mksysplan -f sysplan.sysplan -m 9406-570*3413556 -d "New 570 system plan for 5/11/2007"
--noprobe
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
cpsysplan, deploysysplan, lssysplan, rmsysplan
Linux
September 2010
2
NAME
mkvterm - open a virtual terminal session
SYNOPSIS
mkvterm -m managed-system
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
mkvterm opens a virtual terminal session for an AIX, Linux, or virtual I/O server partition.
After establishing a virtual terminal session, the ˜. character sequence can be entered in the terminal window to terminate it, or the rmvterm command can be used to force the session to be closed.
A partition can only have one open virtual terminal session at a time.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system which has the partition for which to open the virtual terminal
session. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form
tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial
number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple
managed systems with the same user-defined name.
-p
The name of the partition for which to open the virtual terminal session.
You must either use this option to specify the name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to open the virtual terminal session.
You must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the
partition’s name. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Open a virtual terminal session for partition p1:
mkvterm -m mySystem -p p1
Open a virtual terminal session for the partition with an ID of 1:
mkvterm -m 9406-570*12345678 --id 1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
rmvterm
Linux
August 2004
1
NAME
monhmc - monitor HMC subsystems and system resources
SYNOPSIS
To monitor Hardware Management Console (HMC) subsystems:
monhmc -s {hmcsvr | rmc} [-n <interval>]
[--help]
To monitor HMC system resources:
monhmc -r {disk | proc | mem | swap} [-n <interval>]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
monhmc provides a dynamic real-time view of HMC related subsystems and system resources. The top,
watch, and df commands are used to implement this command. Refer to documentation for those commands for additional information.
OPTIONS
-s
The HMC subsystem to monitor. Valid values are hmcsvr for HMC server processes, and rmc for
Resource Monitoring and Control (RMC) processes.
Either this option or the -r option is required. The -s and the -r options are mutually exclusive.
-r
The HMC system resource to monitor. Valid values are disk for filesystem disk space usage, proc
for processor (CPU) usage, mem for memory usage, and swap for swap space usage.
Either this option or the -s option is required. The -r and the -s options are mutually exclusive.
-n
The interval between updates in seconds. The default value for this option is 4 seconds.
If an interval of 0 is specified, then statistics are displayed only once, and this command exits. If
any other interval is specified, or if this option is omitted, then statistics are updated every interval
seconds, and this command runs until interrupted with Ctrl-c.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Monitor HMC processor usage and update the statistics every 10 seconds:
monhmc -r proc -n 10
Display RMC subsystem statistics once:
monhmc -s rmc -n 0
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
February 2007
1
NAME
optmem - optimize memory
SYNOPSIS
To start a mirrored memory defragmentation operation on a managed system:
optmem -m managed-system -o start -t mirror
[-q quantity] [--minutes time-limit]
To start a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation on a managed system:
optmem -m managed-system -o start -t affinity
[-p partition-names | --id partition-IDs]
[-x partition-names | --xid partition-IDs]
[--force]
To stop a memory optimization operation on a managed system:
optmem -m managed-system -o stop [--optid ID]
DESCRIPTION
optmem performs memory optimization operations on the managed-system. The memory optimization
operations that can be performed with this command are mirrored memory defragmentation operations and
Dynamic Platform Optimization operations.
Dynamic Platform Optimization operations dynamically optimize the placement of partitions to maximize
the processor-memory affinity of the partitions, which improves system performance. You can specify a list
of partitions to optimize, and a list of partitions that should be protected from the optimization. Partitions
which are not specified in either list could be either postively or negatively impacted by the optimization.
The lsmemopt command can be used to evaluate the current system affinity and the potential system affinity that could be attained by running a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation.
When a memory optimization operation is in progress, another memory optimization operation cannot be
started. In addition, operations that change the memory or processor configuration in the system are not
allowed.
System performance will degrade during a memory optimization operation. A memory optimization operation may take a long time to complete.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system on which to perform the memory optimization operation. The
name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form ttttmmm*sssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and sssssss is the serial number
of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*sssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed
systems with the same user-defined name.
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are start to start a memory optimization operation, and
stop to stop the memory optimization operation that is currently in progress. The managed system
may not be able to stop the operation immediately, so it may continue to run for several more seconds.
Dynamic Platform Optimization operations should not be stopped. Stopping a Dynamic Platform
Optimization operation before it has completed could leave the system in an affinity state that is
much worse than before the operation started.
Linux
-t
The type of memory optimization to perform. Valid values are mirror to perform a mirrored
memory defragmentation operation, and affinity to perform a Dynamic Platform Optimization
operation.
-q
The amount of mirrored memory to be made available by the defragmentation operation. Specify
only the additional amount of mirrored memory to be made available; do not include the amount
November 2012
1
of mirrored memory that is currently available. quantity must be in megabytes, it must be a multiple of the memory region size for the managed-system, and it must be greater than 0.
As much additional mirrored memory as possible, up to quantity, will be made available by the
defragmentation operation. If this option is not specified, then the maximum amount of mirrored
memory will be made available.
--minutes
The time limit, in minutes, for the mirrored memory defragmentation operation. If the operation
does not complete within the time limit specified, the operation will be stopped.
The managed system may not be able to stop the operation immediately when the time limit
expires, so it may continue to run for several more seconds.
If this option is not specified, the mirrored memory defragmentation operation will not be timed
out.
-p
The name of one or more partitions to optimize in a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation.
Multiple partition names must be comma separated.
You can either use this option to specify the names of the partitions to optimize, or use the --id
option to specify the IDs of the partitions. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
If neither this option nor the --id option is used to specify a list of partitions to optimize, the operation will attempt to optimize all partitions that are not specified in the list of partitions to exclude
from the operation.
--id
The ID of one or more partitions to optimize in a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation.
A range of partition IDs may be specified. A range is specified by specifying the beginning partition ID, a dash, and the ending partition ID. Both the beginning and ending partition IDs are
included in the range. For example, the range 1-5 includes partitions IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. The list
of partition IDs specified with this option must be comma separated and can include one or more
partition IDs, one or more ranges of partition IDs, or both.
You can either use this option to specify the IDs of the partitions to optimize, or use the -p option
to specify the names of the partitions. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
If neither this option nor the -p option is used to specify a list of partitions to optimize, the operation will attempt to optimize all partitions that are not specified in the list of partitions to exclude
from the operation.
-x
The name of one or more partitions to exclude and protect from the Dynamic Platform Optimization operation. The processor-memory affinity for the partitions will not be impacted by the operation.
Multiple partition names must be comma separated.
You can either use this option to specify the names of the partitions to exclude, or use the --xid
option to specify the IDs of the partitions. The -x and the --xid options are mutually exclusive.
If neither this option nor the --xid option is used to specify a list of partitions to exclude, no partitions will be excluded from the operation.
--xid
Linux
The ID of one or more partitions to exclude and protect from the Dynamic Platform Optimization
operation. The processor-memory affinity for the partitions will not be impacted by the operation.
November 2012
2
A range of partition IDs may be specified. A range is specified by specifying the beginning partition ID, a dash, and the ending partition ID. Both the beginning and ending partition IDs are
included in the range. For example, the range 8-11 includes partitions IDs 8, 9, 10, and 11.
The list of partition IDs specified with this option must be comma separated and can include one
or more partition IDs, one or more ranges of partition IDs, or both.
You can either use this option to specify the IDs of the partitions to exclude, or use the -x option to
specify the names of the partitions. The --xid and the -x options are mutually exclusive.
If neither this option nor the -x option is used to specify a list of partitions to exclude, no partitions
will be excluded from the operation.
--force Use this option to allow a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation to start without validating the
list of partitions to optimize or exclude. If the list of partitions to optimize or exclude contains a
partition that does not exist or a shutdown partition that is unable to start due to insufficient
resources in its current configuration, or if the list of partitions to optimize contains a partition
with a configuration that cannot be optimized, this command will fail if this option is not specified.
Otherwise, if this option is specified, those partitons will be ignored.
--optid The ID of the memory optimization operation to stop. If this option is omitted, then the memory
optimization operation currently in progress is stopped. The ID is displayed by the lsmemopt -m
managed-system command.
Although this option is not required to stop a memory optimization operation, it is highly recommended that it be specified to prevent the accidental cancellation of the wrong operation.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Start a mirrored memory defragmentation operation with no time limit to make an additional 256 MB of
mirrored memory available:
optmem -m system1 -o start -t mirror -q 256
Start a mirrored memory defragmentation operation with a time limit of 1 hour to make as much mirrored
memory available as possible:
optmem -m 8233-E8B*1234321 -o start -t mirror --minutes 60
Stop the mirrored memory defragmentation operation currently in progress:
optmem -m system1 -o stop
Start a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation to optimize all partitions in the system:
optmem -m sys -o start -t affinity
Start a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation to optimize partitions lp1 and lp3:
optmem -m sys -o start -t affinity -p lp1,lp3
Start a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation to optimize the partitions with IDs 2, 4, 6 through 9, and
11, while excluding the partition with ID 1:
optmem -m sys -o start -t affinity --id 2,4,6-9,11 --xid 1
Linux
November 2012
3
Start a Dynamic Platform Optimization operation to optimize the partitions with IDs 1 through 4, and
ignore any partitions that cannot be optimized:
optmem -m sys -o start -t affinity --id 1-4 --force
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsmemopt
Linux
November 2012
4
NAME
pedbg - Product Engineering debug tools
SYNOPSIS
pedbg {-d {on | off} | -j {on | off} | -l {rmc | se} | -c | -s | -q {n} | -r} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
pedbg provides debug tools for Product Engineer/Support Personnel. This command requires PE authority
to run, i.e, only hscpe user can access this command.
OPTIONS
-d
Turn on or off various debug tracing. This option will restart subsystems to start/stop internal tracing.
-j
Turn on or off Just in Time compiler. Turn off Just in Time compiler will result in loss of performance.
-l
List internal subsystem information. If rmc is specified, the list of RMC daemons will be displayed, along with its state. If se is specified, the IBM.ServiceEvent resource entries are displayed.
-c
Collect various logs and javacore. This option can copy the data collected onto DVD or leave a zip
file in the /dump directory.
-s
Collect various managed system dumps that were sent to the HMC. This option can copy the data
collected onto DVD or leave a zip file in the /dump directory.
-q
Collect logs or managed system dumps in quiet mode. Not prompted. Used with either the -c or
the -s option.
Options for log collection:
1 = network info only
2 = network info + base logs
3 = network info + base logs + extended logs
4 = all logs - network info + base logs + extended logs + archives
5 = collect files in /home/hscpe/ibmsupt only
7 = collect RMC ctsnap only
9 = run prompt to copy files to media
Options for managed system dumps:
1 collect all system dump types
2 collect FSPDUMP
3 collect SYSDUMP
4 collect LOGDUMP
5 collect SMADUMP
6 collect PWRDUMP
8 delete all system dumps
9 = run prompt to copy files to media
-r
Remove the log files collected that are put in /dump.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
The following command turns on debug:
pedbg -d on
The following command disables debug:
Linux
April 2004
1
pedbg -d off
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
April 2004
2
NAME
pesh - provides PE Shell access
SYNOPSIS
pesh <serial number of machine>
DESCRIPTION
pesh provides full shell access to Product Engineer/Support Personnel. pesh takes the serial number of the
machine where full shell access is requested, then prompts the user for a 1 day password obtained from the
support organization. If the password is valid, the user will be granted full shell access. Only user hscpe can
access this command.
EXAMPLES
The following command lists the Hardware Management Console information:
lshmc -v
Vital Product Data Information:
*FC ????????
*VC 20.0
*N2 Sat Apr 24 05:05:10 CDT 2004
*FC ????????
*DS Hardware Management Console
*TM 6792-LPU
*SE 23FGYWF
*MN IBM
*PN IBM
*SZ 1055961088
*OS Embedded Operating Systems
*NA 9.3.197.17
*FC ????????
*DS Platform Firmware
*RM V3R3.0
Using the serial number by the SE tag, pass the value
to the pesh command:
pesh 23FGYWF
You will be prompted for a password.
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
January 2003
1
NAME
refdev - refresh device
SYNOPSIS
refdev -m managed-system {-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
[-w wait-time] [-d detail-level] [-v] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
refdev refreshes the partition and profile data, which is used for remote restart of the partition, on the
reserved storage device for the partition. The Hardware Management Console (HMC) always attempts to
automatically keep the data on the reserved storage device up to date. However, there may be times when
the HMC is unable to update the data on the reserved storage device. If that happens, the user can run this
command to force the data on the reserved storage device to be refreshed.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system on which to perform the operation. The name may either be the
user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-p
The name of the partition for which to perform the operation.
You must either use this option to specify the name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to perform the operation.
You must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the
partition’s name. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
-w
The maximum time, in minutes, to wait for Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) commands issued by the
HMC to complete. If a VIOS command does not complete within the time specified, the device
refresh operation will be stopped.
wait-time must be a whole number. If wait-time is 0, the device refresh operation will not be
timed out.
If this option is not specified, a default value of 3 minutes is used.
-d
The level of detail requested from VIOS commands issued by the HMC. Valid values are 0 (none)
through 5 (highest).
If this option is not specified, a default value of 1 is used.
-v
Specify this option to enable verbose mode for the device refresh operation. When verbose mode
is enabled, detail messages and warning messages are displayed for a successful operation. Detail
messages and warning messages are always displayed for a device refresh operation that fails,
regardless of whether this option is specified.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Refresh the partition and profile data on the reserved storage device assigned to partition remoteRestartPartition:
refdev -m sys1 -p remoteRestartPartition
ENVIRONMENT
None
Linux
May 2011
1
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
May 2011
2
NAME
rmaccfg - remove access control object
SYNOPSIS
rmaccfg -t {resource | resourcerole | taskrole}
-n name [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmaccfg removes an access control role from the Hardware Management Console (HMC), or it removes
inactive managed resource objects assigned to an HMC user.
OPTIONS
-t
The type of access control objects to remove. Valid values are resource for inactive managed
resource objects, resourcerole for a managed resource role, and taskrole for a task role.
-n
When removing inactive managed resource objects assigned to an HMC user, use this option to
specify the user name of the HMC user from which to remove the inactive objects.
When removing an access control role, use this option to specify the name of the role to remove.
Note that the predefined task roles hmcsuperadmin, hmcoperator, hmcviewer, hmcpe, and
hmcservicerep cannot be removed.
If the specified access control role is currently assigned to one or more HMC users, you will be
prompted to confirm that you want to remove the role.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove the managed resource role lpar_role:
rmaccfg -t resourcerole -n lpar_role
Purge all inactive managed resource objects from the user superuser:
rmaccfg -t resource -n superuser
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chaccfg, lsaccfg, mkaccfg, lshmcusr
Linux
May 2004
1
NAME
rmdump - remove a dump
SYNOPSIS
rmdump -f file [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmdump removes a managed system dump or a managed frame dump from the Hardware Management
Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-f
The file name of the dump to be removed.
The lsdump -h -F name command can be used to list the file names of the dumps on the HMC.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove a system dump from the HMC:
rmdump -f SYSDUMP.1000D6P.00000001.20100806170032.gz
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lsdump
Linux
May 2011
1
NAME
rmfile - remove file
SYNOPSIS
rmfile -t {krbkeyfile | ldapcacert} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmfile removes a file of the specified type from the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-t
The type of file to remove. Valid values are krbkeyfile for the Kerberos service key (keytab) file
(/etc/krb5.keytab), and ldapcacert for the LDAP Certificate Authority (CA) certificate file.
After the successful completion of this command to remove the Kerberos service key file, the
HMC must be rebooted for the change to take effect.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove the Kerberos service key file from the HMC:
rmfile -t krbkeyfile
Remove the LDAP CA certificate file from the HMC:
rmfile -t ldapcacert
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
getfile
Linux
April 2008
1
NAME
rmhmcusr - remove Hardware Management Console users
SYNOPSIS
rmhmcusr {-u user-name |
-t {all | local | kerberos | ldap | automanage}}
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmhmcusr removes Hardware Management Console (HMC) users.
OPTIONS
-u
The user name of the HMC user to remove. The HMC users root and hscroot cannot be removed.
Either this option or the -t option must be specified. The -u and the -t options are mutually exclusive.
-t
The type of HMC users to be removed. Valid values are all for all users (except root, hscroot, and
hscpe), local for all users with an authentication type of local (except root, hscroot, and hscpe),
kerberos for all users with an authentication type of Kerberos, ldap for all users with an authentication type of LDAP, and automanage for all users with an authentication type of LDAP auto
managed.
Either this option or the -u option must be specified. The -t and the -u options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove the user tester:
rmhmcusr -u tester
Remove all users with an authentication type of Kerberos:
rmhmcusr -t kerberos
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhmcusr, lshmcusr, mkhmcusr
Linux
October 2009
1
NAME
rmlock - remove lock
SYNOPSIS
rmlock -e managed-frame [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmlock forces a Hardware Management Console (HMC) lock on the managed-frame to be released.
OPTIONS
-e
The name of the managed frame to unlock. The name may either be the user-defined name for the
managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the type, mmm is the model, and
ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if
there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined name.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Unlock the managed frame myFrame:
rmlock -e myFrame
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lslock
Linux
April 2005
1
NAME
rmlparutil - remove utilization data
SYNOPSIS
rmlparutil -m managed-system [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmlparutil removes the utilization data collected for a managed system from the Hardware Management
Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which collected utilization data is to be removed. The name
may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name, or if the HMC does not currently have a connection to the managed system.
Removing the utilization data for a managed system does not disable the collection of utilization
data for that managed system. Use the chlparutil command to disable the collection of utilization
data.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove the utilization data collected for the managed system mySystem:
rmlparutil -m mySystem
Remove the utilization data collected for the managed system with the type, model, and serial number
9406-520*98765432:
rmlparutil -m 9406-520*98765432
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chlparutil, lslparutil
Linux
February 2006
1
NAME
rmprofdata - remove profile data
SYNOPSIS
rmprofdata -m managed-system -f file [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmprofdata removes a profile data backup file for the managed-system.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to remove the profile data backup file. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name, or if the HMC does not currently have a connection to the managed system.
-f
The name of the profile data backup file to be removed. If file is not fully qualified, file will be
removed from the /var/hsc/profiles/serial-number directory on the HMC (serial-number is the
serial number of the managed system).
To remove profile data from removable media, the media must be present in the removable media
device and the device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is issued.
The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on the HMC.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove the profile data backup file called backup1 (the file will be removed from the /var/hsc/profiles/3413444 directory on the HMC):
rmprofdata -m 9406-570*3413444 -f backup1
Remove the profile data backup file called myFile on a floppy diskette (a floppy diskette must have already
been inserted into the diskette drive):
mount /media/floppy
rmprofdata -m mySystem -f /media/floppy/myFile
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
bkprofdata, lsmediadev, rstprofdata
Linux
November 2006
1
NAME
rmpwdpolicy - remove a password policy
SYNOPSIS
rmpwdpolicy -n policy-name [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmpwdpolicy removes a password policy from the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
Only user-defined password policies can be removed. The active password policy cannot be removed.
OPTIONS
-n
The name of the password policy to remove.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove the password policy xyzPolicy:
rmpwdpolicy -n xyzPolicy
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chpwdpolicy, lspwdpolicy, mkpwdpolicy
Linux
September 2010
1
NAME
rmsyscfg - remove a system resource
SYNOPSIS
rmsyscfg -r {lpar | prof | sysprof} -m managed-system
[-n resource-name] [-p partition-name]
[--id partition-ID] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmsyscfg removes a partition, a partition profile, or a system profile from the managed-system.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of system resource to remove. Valid values are lpar for a partition, prof for a partition
profile, and sysprof for a system profile.
When a partition is removed, all of the partition profiles that are defined for that partition are also
removed.
When a partition profile is removed, any system profiles that contain just that one partition profile
are also removed.
-m
The name of the managed system from which the system resource is to be removed. The name
may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-n
The name of the system resource to remove.
To remove a partition, you must either use this option to specify the name of the partition to
remove, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -n and the --id options are mutually exclusive when removing a partition.
To remove a partition profile or a system profile, you must use this option to specify the name of
the profile to remove.
-p
The name of the partition which has the partition profile to remove. This option is only valid when
removing a partition profile.
To remove a partition profile, you must either use this option to specify the name of the partition
which has the partition profile to remove, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The
-p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The partition’s ID.
To remove a partition, you must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition to remove,
or use the -n option to specify the partition’s name. The --id and the -n options are mutually
exclusive when removing a partition.
To remove a partition profile, you must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition that
has the profile to remove, or use the -p option to specify the partition’s name. The --id and the -p
options are mutually exclusive when removing a partition profile.
This option is not valid when removing a system profile.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove the partition partition5:
Linux
May 2004
1
rmsyscfg -r lpar -m system1 -n partition5
Remove the partition with ID 5:
rmsyscfg -r lpar -m system1 --id 5
Remove the partition profile prof1 for partition lpar3:
rmsyscfg -r prof -m system1 -n prof1 -p lpar3
Remove the system profile sysprof1:
rmsyscfg -r sysprof -m 9406-520*34134441 -n sysprof1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chsyscfg, lssyscfg, mksyscfg
Linux
May 2004
2
NAME
rmsysconn - remove system connection
SYNOPSIS
rmsysconn -o {remove | reset | rediscover}
{-m managed-system | -e managed-frame | --ip IP-address}
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmsysconn removes or resets a connection from the Hardware Management Console (HMC) to a managed
system or a managed frame.
If your HMC is set up as a DHCP server on a private network, you should not use this command to remove
HMC connections to managed systems and managed frames. The remove option of this command is
intended for use on a public network only, where the HMC is not set up as a DHCP server. Using the
remove option of this command prevents the HMC from managing any system or frame at that IP address,
even though that address may still be assigned through DHCP.
If your HMC is set up as a DHCP server on a private network and you do use this command to remove a
connection, the HMC places the IP address(es) of the managed system or managed frame being removed,
or places the IP address being removed, in a list of removed IP addresses. Any IP address in that list will
not be automatically rediscovered by the HMC. If you want to remove an IP address from that list so that
the IP address can be automatically discovered and the HMC can manage a system or frame at that IP
address in the future, use the rediscover option of this command. If you want to remove all IP addresses
from that list, you can use the mksysconn -o auto command.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are remove, reset, or rediscover.
When remove is specified, the HMC disconnects from the specified managed system or the specified managed frame. If all connections to the managed system or managed frame are removed,
then the managed system or managed frame is removed from the HMC.
When reset is specified, the HMC disconnects from the specified managed system or the specified
managed frame then attempts to reconnect. The reset operation is useful for retrying to establish a
connection to a managed system or a managed frame that is in the "No Connection" state.
When rediscover is specified, the specified IP address is removed from the HMC’s list of removed
IP addresses. This will allow the HMC to automatically reconnect to that IP address when using
DHCP.
-m
The name of the managed system to remove or to reset the connection to. The name may either be
the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is
the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same
user-defined name.
If the managed system has a single service processor, the connection to the service processor is
removed or reset. When the connection is removed, the managed system is removed from the
HMC.
If the managed system has two service processors, the connections to both service processors for
the managed system are removed or reset. When the connections to both service processors for
the managed system are removed, the managed system is removed from the HMC. To remove or
reset the connection to just one service processor for the managed system, use the --ip option.
Either this option, the --ip option, or the -e option is required for a remove or a reset operation.
Linux
April 2008
1
This option is not valid for a rediscover operation.
The -m, --ip, and the -e options are mutually exclusive.
-e
The name of the managed frame to remove or to reset the connection to. The name may either be
the user-defined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The ttttmmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined
name.
When this option is used to specify the managed frame to remove or to reset the connection to, the
connections to both sides of the bulk power assembly (BPA) for the managed frame are removed
or reset. When the connections to both sides of the BPA for the managed frame are removed, the
managed frame is removed from the HMC.
To remove or reset the connection to just one side of the BPA for the managed frame, use the --ip
option.
Either this option, the --ip option, or the -m option is required for a remove or reset operation.
This option is not valid for a rediscover operation.
The -e, --ip, and the -m options are mutually exclusive.
--ip
To remove or reset the connection to a managed system with a single service processor, you can
use this option to specify the IP address or host name of the service processor for the managed
system to remove or to reset the connection to. Alternatively, you can use the -m option to specify
the name of the managed system to remove or to reset the connection to.
To remove or reset the connection to just one service processor for a managed system with two
service processors, you can use this option to specify the IP address or host name of the service
processor to remove or to reset the connection to. To remove or reset the connection to both service processors for a managed system, use the -m option. Note that a managed system with two
service processors will not be removed from the HMC until the connections to both service processors for the managed system are removed.
To remove or reset the connection to just one side of the BPA for a managed frame, you can use
this option to specify the IP address or host name of the BPA side to remove or to reset the connection to. To remove or reset the connection to both sides of the BPA for a managed frame, use the
-e option. Note that a managed frame will not be removed from the HMC until the connections to
both sides of the BPA for the managed frame are removed.
To allow the HMC to automatically rediscover an IP address when using DHCP, use this option to
specify the IP address to be automatically rediscovered.
Either this option, the -m option, or the -e option is required for a remove or reset operation. This
option is required for a rediscover operation.
The --ip, -m, and the -e options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Disconnect from the managed system mySys and remove it from the HMC:
rmsysconn -o remove -m mySys
Reset the connection to the managed system service processor with IP address 9.3.152.145:
Linux
April 2008
2
rmsysconn -o reset --ip 9.3.152.145
Disconnect from the managed frame myFrame and remove it from the HMC:
rmsysconn -o remove -e myFrame
Reset the connection to one side of the BPA (with IP address 9.3.152.29) for a managed frame:
rmsysconn -o reset --ip 9.3.152.29
Allow the IP address 10.0.0.127 to be automatically rediscovered when using DHCP:
rmsysconn -o rediscover --ip 10.0.0.127
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
mksysconn, lssyscfg, lssysconn
Linux
April 2008
3
NAME
rmsysplan - remove system plan
SYNOPSIS
rmsysplan -f file-name [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmsysplan removes a system plan file from the system plan file directory on the Hardware Management
Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-f
Specifies the name of the file that will be removed. Only files in the system plan file directory on
the HMC will be removed.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Remove the system plan file sysplan.sysplan:
rmsysplan -f sysplan.sysplan
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
deploysysplan, cpsysplan, lssysplan, mksysplan
Linux
February 2006
1
NAME
rmvterm - close a virtual terminal session
SYNOPSIS
rmvterm -m managed-system
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rmvterm forces the closure of a virtual terminal session for an AIX, Linux, or virtual I/O server partition.
To close the virtual terminal session normally, enter the ˜. character sequence in the terminal window.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system which has the partition for which to close the virtual terminal
session. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form
tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial
number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple
managed systems with the same user-defined name.
-p
The name of the partition for which to close the virtual terminal session.
You must either use this option to specify the name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to close the virtual terminal session.
You must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the
partition’s name. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Close a virtual terminal session for partition p1:
rmvterm -m mySystem -p p1
Close a virtual terminal session for the partition with an ID of 1:
rmvterm -m 9406-570*12345678 --id 1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
mkvterm
Linux
August 2004
1
NAME
rnvi - HMC restricted-nvi text editor
SYNOPSIS
rnvi -f file [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rnvi enables users to edit a text file in a restricted mode. The rnvi command invokes the nvi command in a
chroot environment. The rnvi command must be issued from the user’s home directory and only one file
may be specified on the command line. The user may edit a file in a subdirectory located in their home
directory by specifying the relative path name. When this command is issued for the first time, a temporary
directory, called .rnvi_tmp, is created in the user’s home directory to store the editor’s temporary files.
Files are not recoverable from a crashed editing session.
Note: when the editor starts, the message "stderr: No such file or directory" may be displayed. This message can be safely ignored.
OPTIONS
-f
The name of the text file to edit. The file must be located within the user’s home directory.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Edit the file named example.txt in the user’s home directory:
rnvi -f example.txt
Edit the file named example.txt in the subdirectory called myfiles in the user’s home directory:
rnvi -f myfiles/example.txt
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
nvi, mkdir, rm
Linux
November 2007
1
NAME
rsthwres - restore hardware resources
SYNOPSIS
To restore memory or processing resources:
rsthwres -r {mem | proc} -m managed-system
[{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}]
To restore physical I/O slots:
rsthwres -r io -m managed-system
[{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}]
[-l slot-DRC-index]
To restore Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA) resources:
rsthwres -r hea -m managed-system
[{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}]
[-l HEA-adapter-ID]
[-g port-group --logport logical-port-ID]
DESCRIPTION
rsthwres restores the hardware resource configuration of partitions in the managed-system. This operation
may need to be performed after a dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR) operation fails.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of hardware resources to restore. Valid values are mem for memory, proc for processing
resources, io for physical I/O slots, and hea for Host Ethernet Adapter (HEA) resources.
-m
The name of the managed system which has the partitions for which to restore the hardware
resources. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the
form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the
serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
-p
The name of the partition for which to restore the hardware resources.
To restore hardware resources for a single partition, you must either use this option to specify the
name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. Otherwise, hardware
resources for all partitions in the managed-system will be restored.
The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the partition for which to restore the hardware resources.
To restore hardware resources for a single partition, you must either use this option to specify the
ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the partition’s name. Otherwise, hardware
resources for all partitions in the managed-system will be restored.
The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
-l
When restoring physical I/O slots, specify the DRC index of the physical I/O slot to restore. If this
option is omitted and a partition is specified with the -p or --id option, then all physical I/O slots
assigned to the specified partition will be restored. If this option is omitted and a partition is not
specified, then all physical I/O slots in the managed-system will be restored.
When restoring HEA resources, specify the adapter ID of the HEA to restore. If this option is
omitted and a partition is specified with the -p or --id option, then all HEA resources, including
Logical Host Ethernet Adapters and logical ports, assigned to the specified partition will be
restored. If this option is omitted and a partition is not specified, then all HEA resources in the
managed-system will be restored. This option is required when the -g and --logport options are
Linux
June 2007
1
specified to restore a specific logical port.
This option is only valid when restoring physical I/O slots or HEA resources.
-g
The port group containing the HEA logical port to restore. This option is required when the --logport option is specified to restore a specific logical port.
--logport
The ID of the HEA logical port to restore.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Restore the physical I/O slots for all partitions:
rsthwres -r io -m mySystem
Restore the physical I/O slot with DRC index 21010003:
rsthwres -r io -m 9406-570*12345678 -l 21010003
Restore memory resources for partition p1:
rsthwres -r mem -m 9406-570*12345678 -p p1
Restore processing resources for the partition with ID 1:
rsthwres -r proc -m mySystem --id 1
Restore all HEA resources in the managed system:
rsthwres -r hea -m mySystem
Restore all HEA resources for partition p1:
rsthwres -r hea -m mySystem -p p1
Restore the logical port with ID 3 in port group 2 of the HEA with an adapter ID of 23000010:
rsthwres -r hea -m 9117-MMA*1112223 --logport 3 -g 2
-l 23000010
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
chhwres, lshwres
Linux
June 2007
2
NAME
rstprofdata - restore profile data
SYNOPSIS
rstprofdata -m managed-system -l restore-type [-f file]
[--help]
DESCRIPTION
rstprofdata restores profile data for the managed-system from a backup file. rstprofdata can also be used
to initialize the profile data for the managed-system.
The bkprofdata command can be used to back up profile data for the managed-system.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system for which to restore or initialize profile data. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the
same user-defined name.
-l
The type of restore to perform. Valid values are:
1 - full restore from the backup file
2 - merge the current profile data and profile
data from the backup file, giving priority
to the backup data. If the profile data
conflicts, the backup data is restored
over the current data.
3 - merge the current profile data and profile
data from the backup file, giving priority
to the current data. If the profile data
conflicts, the backup data is not restored
over the current data.
4 - initialize the profile data. All
partitions, partition profiles, and system
profiles for the managed system will be
deleted.
-f
The name of the backup file that contains the profile data to be restored. If file is not fully qualified, file must exist in the
/var/hsc/profiles/serial-number directory on the HMC (serial-number is the serial number of the
managed system).
To restore the profile data from removable media, the media must be present in the removable
media device and the device must be mounted with the mount command before this command is
issued. The lsmediadev command can be used to display all of the removable media devices on
the HMC.
This option is required for all restore types except 4 (initialize).
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Do a full restore of the profile data from the file myFile on a USB flash memory device (a USB flash memory device must already be connected to the HMC):
lsmediadev (to obtain mount points)
mount /media/sdb1
Linux
August 2006
1
rstprofdata -m mySystem -l 1 -f /media/sdb1/myFile
Restore the profile data from the file backup1, and give priority to the current profile data (the file backup1
exists in the /var/hsc/profiles/3413444 directory on the HMC):
rstprofdata -m 9406-570*3413444 -l 3 -f backup1
Initialize the profile data:
rstprofdata -m 9406-570*3413444 -l 4
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
bkprofdata, lsmediadev
Linux
August 2006
2
NAME
rstupgdata - restore upgrade data
SYNOPSIS
rstupgdata -r dvd [--help]
DESCRIPTION
rstupgdata copies the current partition profile data, Hardware Management Console (HMC) user data, and
HMC configuration data previously saved on DVD-RAM into a portion of the HMC hard drive that the
HMC upgrade process cannot erase. After this commmand has been executed, reboot the HMC to automatically recover the data.
The DVD-RAM media must be present in the drive, and mounted with the mount command, before running this command.
NOTE: Time on the HMC will need to be set after the data has been recovered.
OPTIONS
-r
If dvd is specified, upgrade data will only be read from the DVD-RAM media.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Restore upgrade data from DVD-RAM to the HMC hard drive:
mount /media/cdrom
rstupgdata -r dvd
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
April 2006
1
NAME
saveupgdata - save upgrade data
SYNOPSIS
saveupgdata -r {disk | diskdvd | diskusb} [--help]
DESCRIPTION
saveupgdata stores the current partition profile data, Hardware Management Console (HMC) user data,
and HMC configuration data in a portion of the HMC hard drive that the HMC upgrade process cannot
erase. The HMC automatically recovers the data after the upgrade process completes.
This command should be run immediately prior to performing an HMC upgrade. If the HMC is rebooted
without performing an upgrade after running this command, this command needs to be run again.
OPTIONS
-r
If disk is specified, upgrade data will only be saved on the HMC hard drive.
If diskdvd is specified, then in addition to storing the upgrade data on the HMC hard drive, this
command will copy the same upgrade data onto DVD-RAM media.
If diskusb is specified, then in addition to storing the upgrade data on the HMC hard drive, this
command will copy the same upgrade data onto a USB flash memory device.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Save upgrade data to the HMC hard drive:
saveupgdata -r disk
Save upgrade data to the HMC hard drive and to DVD-RAM media (the media must be present in the DVD
drive):
saveupgdata -r diskdvd
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
November 2008
1
NAME
sendfile - transfer a file from the HMC to a remote system
SYNOPSIS
sendfile -f file -h host-name -u user-ID
[--passwd password] -d remote-directory
[-n remote-file-name] [-s] [-k key-file] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
sendfile transfers a file from the Hardware Management Console (HMC) to a remote system using File
Transfer Protocol (FTP) or secure FTP (SFTP).
OPTIONS
-f
The name of the file to transfer.
-h
The host name or IP address of the remote system to which to transfer the file.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the remote system.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the remote system. If this option is omitted, you will be prompted
to enter the password.
-d
The directory on the remote system to which to transfer the file.
-n
The file name to give the file on the remote system. If this option is omitted, the file is given the
same name that it has on the HMC.
-s
Use secure FTP to transfer the file. SSH will be used to transfer the file, therefore the remote system must have SSH installed and running.
-k
The name of the identity key file for public key authentication. This is the key file generated by
the ssh-keygen command. If the matching public key file resides on the remote system and the
passphrase is empty, you will not be required to enter a password with this command.
This option is only valid when using secure FTP to transfer the file.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Transfer a file using normal FTP. The file will be written to /home/myid/myfile on the remote system:
sendfile -f /home/joe/myfile -h [email protected]
-d /home/myid -u myid
Transfer a file using secure FTP. The file will be written to /tmp/xfile on the remote system:
sendfile -f /home/joe/myfile -h [email protected] -d /tmp
-n xfile -u myid -s
Generate a public key on the HMC then copy to the remote system for sendfile to use public key authentication with SFTP:
ssh-keygen -t rsa -f mykey
scp mykey [email protected]:/home/me/.ssh/authorized_keys2
sendfile -f /home/me/myfile -h [email protected] -d /tmp
-s -k mykey
Linux
November 2007
1
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
November 2007
2
NAME
startdump - start dump
SYNOPSIS
startdump {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame}
-t {pss | sp | sys | resource} [-s {a | b | p | s}]
[-l location-code] [-r resource-selector] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
startdump initiates a dump on the managed-system or the managed-frame.
The lsdump command can be used to determine when the dump has completed and is available. The getdump command can then be used to offload the dump from the managed-system or the managed-frame to
the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system on which to initiate the dump. The name may either be the userdefined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
This option is required when initiating a service processor dump, a system dump, or a resource
dump. This option is not valid otherwise.
-e
The name of the managed frame on which to initiate the dump. The name may either be the userdefined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the type,
mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss
form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined name.
This option is required when initiating a power subsystem dump. This option is not valid otherwise.
-t
The dump to initiate. Valid values are pss for a power subsystem dump, sp for a service processor
dump, sys for a system dump, or resource for a resource dump.
When a system dump is started, the managed-system will be halted. When the dump has completed, the managed-system will be restarted. Service processor dumps, resource dumps, and
power subsystem dumps do not cause any disruption to the managed system.
Resource dumps are only supported on POWER6 and later servers.
-s
When initiating a power subsystem dump, use this option to specify the side of the managed
frame’s bulk power assembly (BPA) on which to initiate the dump. Valid values are a for side A
and b for side B.
When initiating a service processor dump of the primary or secondary service processor, use this
option to specify the service processor on which to initiate the dump. Valid values are p for the
primary service processor and s for the secondary service processor. If this option is not specified
and the -l option is not specified, the service processor dump will be initiated on the primary service processor.
When initiating a service processor dump, this option and the -l option are mutually exclusive.
-l
When initiating a service processor dump of a node service processor, use this option to specify
the location code of the node service processor on which to initiate the dump.
This option is only valid when initiating a service processor dump. This option and the -s option
are mutually exclusive.
Linux
October 2009
1
-r
When initiating a resource dump, use this option to specify the resource selector that you have
obtained from your hardware service representative. If this option is not specified, no filter is
applied to the resource dump. An unfiltered resource dump can take an extended period of time to
complete and may prevent other dumps from processing.
This option is only valid when initiating a resource dump.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Initiate a system dump on the managed system 9406-570*12345678 (confirmation will be required):
startdump -m 9406-570*12345678 -t sys
Initiate a dump of the primary service processor on the managed system sys1:
startdump -m sys1 -t sp -s p
Initiate a dump of the node service processor with location code U78A2.001.DQDGARC-P9-C42:
startdump -m sys1 -t sp -l U78A2.001.DQDGARC-P9-C42
Initiate a power subsystem dump on side A of the BPA for the managed frame myFrame:
startdump -e myFrame -t pss -s a
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
getdump, lsdump, lsfru
Linux
October 2009
2
NAME
termtask - terminate a task
SYNOPSIS
termtask -r {webui | ssh} -s session -t task [--help]
DESCRIPTION
termtask terminates a user’s task that is running on the Hardware Management Console (HMC).
The lslogon command can be used to list information about the users logged onto the HMC and the tasks
they are running.
OPTIONS
-r
The type of task to terminate. Valid values are webui for a Web user interface task, or ssh for an
SSH task.
-s
When terminating a Web user interface task, use this option to specify the session ID of the user
that is running the task to terminate.
When terminating an SSH task, use this option to specify the TTY ID of the user that is running
the task to terminate.
-t
When terminating a Web user interface task, use this option to specify the task ID of the task to
terminate.
When terminating an SSH task, use this option to specify the process ID (PID) of the task to terminate.
You can specify all with this option to terminate all tasks that the user associated with the session
is running, and then log off the user.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Terminate all of the HMC Web user interface tasks that the user associated with session 4 is running, and
log off the user:
termtask -r webui -s 4 -t all
Terminate the task with process ID 11644 that the user remotely logged into the HMC via the SSH session
pts/5 is running:
termtask -r ssh -s pts/5 -t 11644
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lslogon
Linux
November 2008
1
NAME
updhmc - update code on the Hardware Management Console
SYNOPSIS
updhmc -t {m | s | l}
[-h ftp-server -u user-id [-p password | -i]]
[-f file] [-r] [-c] [--help]
DESCRIPTION
updhmc updates code on the Hardware Management Console (HMC). This command performs the equivalent of the Update HMC task under Updates on the console.
This command can be used with either a .iso or a .zip corrective service file. You are not required to burn
CD-R or DVD-R media in order to use a .iso file.
OPTIONS
-t
The source type to update from. Valid values are:
m - media
s - server
l - local file system. This is only valid when
-f is specified and the file is on the local
file system.
-h
Host name or IP address of the FTP server where the corrective service file is located. Only valid
when -t s is specified.
-u
User ID to use on the FTP server.
-p
Password to use on the FTP server. The password will be in clear text. When running the command interactively, use the -i option for entering a password without echo.
-i
Prompts for password. Password will be hidden.
-f
Name of the corrective service .iso or .zip file on the FTP server or the local file system.
-r
Reboot HMC after applying the update.
-c
Remove the corrective service file from the local file system after the update. Only valid when -t l
is specified.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
The following command performs an update using media and reboots afterwards.
updhmc -t m -r
The following command performs an update using FTP and a viewable password.
updhmc -t s -h ftpServer -u user1 -p password -f /tmp/Update1.zip
The following command performs an update using FTP and a password prompt.
updhmc -t s -h ftpServer -u user1 -i -f /tmp/Update1.iso
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
Linux
February 2010
1
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
February 2010
2
NAME
updlic - update Licensed Internal Code (LIC)
SYNOPSIS
To retrieve, install, and activate LIC updates:
updlic -o a {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
-w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower | io | all}]
-r {ibmwebsite | ftp | dvd | disk | mountpoint | usb}
-l {latest | latestconcurrent | sss | ccc,ppp |
release1_level1,release2_level2,...}
[-h host-name] [-u user-ID]
[--passwd password] [-d directory]
[--allowpoweroff] [-q] [-v]
To retrieve and install, but not activate LIC updates:
updlic -o i {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
-w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower | io | all}]
-r {ibmwebsite | ftp | dvd | disk | mountpoint | usb}
-l {latest | latestconcurrent | sss | ccc,ppp |
release1_level1,release2_level2,...}
[-h host-name] [-u user-ID]
[--passwd password] [-d directory] [-q] [-v]
To remove the most recently installed LIC updates and activate the previously accepted level:
updlic -o r {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
-w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower}]
[--allowpoweroff] [-q] [-v]
To change a managed system’s LIC update control to Management Console:
updlic -o h -m managed-system [-v]
To change a managed system’s LIC update control to Operating System:
updlic -o o -m managed-system [-v]
To disruptively activate LIC updates:
updlic -o d {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
-w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower}]
[--allowpoweroff] [-q] [-v]
To accept currently activated LIC updates:
updlic -o c {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
-w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower}] [-v]
To reject installed LIC updates:
updlic -o j {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
-w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower}] [-v]
To upgrade Licensed Internal Code to a new release:
updlic -o u {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
Linux
November 2012
1
-w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower}]
-r {ibmwebsite | ftp | dvd | disk | mountpoint | usb}
[-l {latest | release1_level1,release2_level2,...}]
[-h host-name] [-u user-ID]
[--passwd password] [-d directory]
[--allowpoweroff] [-q] [-v]
To check system readiness:
updlic -o k {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
-w}
[-v]
To synchronize LIC:
updlic -o s {-m managed-system | -e managed-frame [--allsystems] |
-w}
[-t {sys | power | syspower}] [-v]
To reboot the secondary service processor:
updlic -o b -m managed-system [-v]
To perform hypervisor and partition firmware activation:
updlic -o v -m managed-system [-v]
DESCRIPTION
updlic updates Licensed Internal Code (LIC) on the managed-system, managed-frame, or on all managed
frames which contain High Performance Switches.
OPTIONS
-o
The operation to perform. Valid values are a, i, r, h, o, d, c, j, u, k, s, b and v.
Use the a operation to retrieve, install, and activate LIC updates. Previously activated updates will
be automatically accepted.
Use the i operation to retrieve and install, but not activate, LIC updates.
Use the r operation to remove the most recently installed LIC updates and activate the previously
accepted level.
Use the h operation to change LIC update control to Management Console. This option is only
valid for a managed system.
Use the o operation to change LIC update control to Operating System. This option is only valid
for a managed system.
Use the d operation to disruptively activate LIC updates.
Use the c operation to accept currently activated LIC updates (copy T to P).
Use the j operation to reject installed LIC updates (copy P to T).
Use the u operation to upgrade Licensed Internal Code to a new release.
Use the k operation to check system readiness for LIC operations.
Use the s operation to synchronize LIC on redundant components. LIC will be synchronized from
Linux
November 2012
2
the primary Service Processor to the secondary Service Processor, and from the Side-A Bulk
Power Controller to the Side-B Bulk Power Controller.
Use the b operation to reboot the secondary service processor. This option is only valid for a managed system.
Use the v operation to perform hypervisor and partition firmware activation. Managed System
LIC is not activated by this option. This option is only valid for a managed system.
-m
The name of the managed system on which to update LIC. The name may either be the userdefined name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system. The
tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same userdefined name.
-e
The name of the managed frame on which to update LIC. The name may either be the userdefined name for the managed frame, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed frame. The ttttmmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed frames with the same user-defined
name.
-w
Update LIC on all managed frames which contain High Performance Switches.
--allsystems
Update LIC on all managed systems in the managed frame specified on the -e option.
-t
The type(s) of LIC updates to install. Valid values are sys for Managed System LIC updates only,
power for Power LIC updates only, syspower for both Managed System and Power LIC updates,
io for I/O LIC updates only, or all for Managed System, Power, and I/O LIC updates.
If this option is omitted, it will default to syspower for the -m and -e --allsystems options, and
will default to power for the -e and -w options.
-l
The LIC level to retrieve. Valid values are latest, latestconcurrent, sss, ccc,ppp or
release1_level1,release2_level2,....
This option is required for a and i operations. It is optional for u operation; if omitted it will
default to latest. This option is not valid otherwise.
Specify latest to retrieve the latest LIC updates, even if disruptive.
Specify latestconcurrent to retrieve the latest concurrent LIC updates.
Specify sss to retrieve a specific level of Managed System or Power LIC updates, even if disruptive. sss is the three character identifier of the specific level to retrieve. This is only valid when
the LIC type is either Managed System only or Power only.
Specify ccc,ppp to retrieve a specific level of Managed System and Power LIC updates, even if
disruptive. ccc is the three character identifier of the specific level of Managed System LIC
updates to retrieve. ppp is the three character identifier of the specific level of Power LIC updates
to retrieve. This is only valid when the LIC type is both Managed System and Power.
Specify release1_level1,release2_level2,... to retrieve specific levels of LIC updates, even if disruptive. The level specified in each entry indicates the desired level for all components which are
running the release specified in the entry.
-r
Linux
The repository from which to retrieve the LIC updates. Valid values are ibmwebsite for the IBM
service Internet site, ftp for a remote FTP site, dvd for the DVD drive on the Management Console, disk for the internal hard disk drive on the Management Console, mountpoint for the
November 2012
3
specified mountpoint, or usb for a USB flash memory device.
This option is required for a, i, and u operations. This option is not valid otherwise.
-h
The host name or IP address of the remote FTP server.
This option is required when retrieving LIC updates from a remote FTP site. This option is not
valid otherwise.
-u
The user ID to use to log in to the remote FTP site.
This option is required when retrieving LIC updates from a remote FTP site. This option is not
valid otherwise.
--passwd
The password to use to log in to the remote FTP site. If this option is omitted, you will be
prompted to enter the password.
This option is only valid when retrieving LIC updates from a remote FTP site.
-d
The mountpoint location or the directory to use on the remote FTP site. If this option is not specified for FTP, then the /opt/ccfw/data directory will be used.
This option is only valid when retrieving LIC updates from a mountpoint or a remote FTP site.
--allowpoweroff
Use this option to allow the Management Console to power off all managed systems in the same
managed frame during a disruptive update of the power subsystem, if necessary. Use this option
carefully. It allows the Management Console to power off managed systems which were not
explicitly targeted by this command.
-q
Use this option to query the concurrency status of the specified update. The update is not performed when this option is specified.
This option allows you to determine if the specified update is disruptive. If so, you can shut down
operating systems or configure I/O devices offline prior to performing the specified update.
When this option is used with -m, one of the following return codes will be returned:
0 - no updates are available
1 - all updates are concurrent
2 - Managed System and Power updates are concurrent.
I/O updates are disruptive.
3 - Managed System and Power updates are disruptive.
I/O updates are concurrent.
4 - all updates are disruptive
Any other return code value indicates that an error occurred.
When this option is used with -w, one of the following return codes will be returned:
0 - no updates are available
1 - all updates are concurrent
4 - all updates are disruptive
Any other return code value indicates that an error occurred.
When this option is not used, a return code value of zero indicates success. Any other value indicates that an error occurred.
Linux
November 2012
4
-v
Specify this option to enable verbose mode for the operation. When verbose mode is enabled,
progress messages are displayed. Note that some operations may not have any progress messages.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
To retrieve, install, and activate the latest available Managed System LIC and Power LIC updates for all
managed systems in the managed frame from the IBM service website:
updlic -e myframe --allsystems -o a -t syspower -l latest -r ibmwebsite
To retrieve and install specific Managed System and Power LIC levels from a remote FTP server:
updlic -m mysystem -o i -t syspower -l 22,21 -r ftp
-h ftphost -u ftpuser --passwd userpw
To retrieve, install and activate specific Managed System and Power LIC levels from the IBM service website:
updlic -m mysystem -o a -t syspower
-l 01EH330_100,02EB330_098,02BP240_219 -r ibmwebsite
To retrieve, install and activate specific Managed System and Power LIC levels for all managed systems in
the managed frame from the IBM service website:
updlic -e myframe --allsystems -o a -t syspower
-l 01ES340_061,02EP340_052 -r ibmwebsite
To remove the most recently installed Managed System and Power LIC levels and activate the previous levels:
updlic -m 9406-570*101234A -o r -t syspower
To query whether the latest LIC updates from the IBM service web site are concurrent or disruptive:
updlic -m 9406-570*101234A -o a -t all -l latest
-r ibmwebsite -q
To change LIC update control to Management Console:
updlic -m mysystem -o h
To change LIC update control to Operating System:
updlic -m mysystem -o o
To disruptively activate LIC updates:
updlic -m mysystem -o d
To accept the currently activated LIC updates:
updlic -m mysystem -o c
To accept the currently activated LIC updates for all managed systems in the managed frame:
Linux
November 2012
5
updlic -e myframe --allsystems -o c
To reject installed LIC updates:
updlic -m mysystem -o j
To check system readiness on a managed system:
updlic -m mysystem -o k
To retrieve and install the latest concurrent LIC updates for all managed frames which contain High Performance Switches from a remote FTP server:
updlic -w -o i -l latestconcurrent -r ftp
-h ftphost -u ftpuser --passwd userpw
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
SEE ALSO
lslic
Linux
November 2012
6
NAME
viosvrcmd - issue virtual I/O server command
SYNOPSIS
viosvrcmd -m managed-system
{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}
-c "command" [--help]
DESCRIPTION
viosvrcmd issues an I/O server command line interface (ioscli) command to a virtual I/O server partition.
The ioscli commands are passed from the Hardware Management Console (HMC) to the virtual I/O server
partition over an RMC session. RMC does not allow interactive execution of ioscli commands.
OPTIONS
-m
The name of the managed system which has the virtual I/O server partition to which to issue the
command. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the
form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the
serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
-p
The name of the virtual I/O server partition to which to issue the command.
You must either use this option to specify the name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition’s ID. The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id
The ID of the virtual I/O server partition to which to issue the command.
You must either use this option to specify the ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the
partition’s name. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
-c
The I/O server command line interface (ioscli) command to issue to the virtual I/O server partition.
command must be enclosed in double quotes. Also, command cannot contain the semicolon (;),
greater than (>), or vertical bar (|) characters.
--help
Display the help text for this command and exit.
EXAMPLES
Issue the ioslevel command to the virtual I/O server partition vios_lpar:
viosvrcmd -m mySystem -p vios_lpar -c "ioslevel"
Issue the lsdev -virtual command to the virtual I/O server partition that has an ID of 4:
viosvrcmd -m 9406-570*A0001234 --id 4 -c "lsdev -virtual"
ENVIRONMENT
None
BUGS
None
AUTHOR
IBM Austin
Linux
August 2004
1

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project